Lumixs5iix Manual

Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Complete Guide>
Digital Camera
DC-S5M2X
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product.
Register online at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support/register
(U.S. customers only)
A firmware update has been made available to improve camera capabilities and to
add functionality.
• For information about functions that have been added or modified, refer to the
pages for “Firmware Update”.
DVQP2992ZC
F0423NT2044
until
2023/6/1
About Operating Instructions
This document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Complete
Guide>”, includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations
of the camera.
 Symbols Used in This Document

Black icons show conditions in which functions can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which functions cannot be used.
Example:
Pictures/Videos
Recording mode
Operating symbols
In this document, camera operation is explained using the following symbols:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C)
(E)
(F)
2
(A) :
Front dial
(B) :
Rear dial
(C) 3421:
Cursor button up/down/left/right
or
Joystick up/down/left/right
(D) :
Press the center of the joystick
(E) :
[MENU/SET] button
(F) :
Control dial
• Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
• This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].
[ ][ ]  [Picture Quality]  Select [STD.]
3
Notification classification symbols

In this document, notifications are classified and described using the following
symbols:
: To confirm prior to using the function
: Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording
: Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications
: Related functions and information
• Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
• Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (S-R2060).
4
Contents
About Operating Instructions 2
Introduction 18
Before Use.................................................................................19
Standard Accessories................................................................22
Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................24
Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................25
Names of Parts ..........................................................................28
Camera.............................................................................................. 28
Supplied Lens.................................................................................... 36
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays .............................................................. 38
Getting Started 40
Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................41

Charging the Battery..................................................................43
Battery Insertion ................................................................................ 44
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging .............................. 46
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/
Charging)........................................................................................... 50
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 52
[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 54
Inserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................57
Attaching a Lens ........................................................................61
Attaching a Lens Hood ...................................................................... 64
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................67
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............69
5
Contents
Basic Operations 73
How to Hold the Camera ...........................................................74

Selecting the Recording Mode...................................................76
Camera Setting Operations .......................................................77
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................83
Setting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 83
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ................................ 84
Switching the Display Information ..................................................... 87
Quick Menu................................................................................90
Control Panel .............................................................................92
Menu Operation Methods ..........................................................95
[Reset] ............................................................................................. 100
Entering Characters.................................................................101
Intelligent Auto Mode ...............................................................102
Recording Using Touch Functions...........................................108
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................. 108
Touch AE......................................................................................... 111
Taking Pictures 113
Basic Picture Operations .........................................................114

[Aspect Ratio] ..........................................................................117
[Picture Size]............................................................................119
[Picture Quality] .......................................................................121
Recording Videos 123
Basic Video Operations ...........................................................124

[System Frequency].................................................................131
[Rec. File Format] ....................................................................133
6
Contents
[Rec Quality] ............................................................................135

[Image Area of Video] ..............................................................149
Focus / Zoom 151
Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................152

Using AF ..................................................................................154
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 159
[Focus Limiter] ................................................................................. 162
[AF Assist Light] .............................................................................. 164
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] .............................................................. 165
[AF Micro Adjustment] ..................................................................... 166
Selecting the AF Mode ............................................................170
Automatic Detection ........................................................................ 173
[Tracking]......................................................................................... 176
[Full Area AF] .................................................................................. 177
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone].................................................... 180
[1-Area+]/[1-Area]............................................................................ 182
[Pinpoint] ......................................................................................... 184
AF Area Operations .................................................................186
Move the Position of the AF Area.................................................... 186
Changing the Size of the AF Area ................................................... 189
Resetting the AF Area ..................................................................... 190
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])......................................................................................... 191
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad ........................... 192
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 194
Record Using MF.....................................................................195
[Focus Peaking]............................................................................... 200
Recording with Zoom...............................................................202
Extended Tele Conversion .............................................................. 204
7
Contents
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer 206
Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................207

Taking Burst Pictures...............................................................209
High Resolution mode .............................................................216
Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................221
Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................228
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................232
Recording Using the Self-timer................................................234
Bracket Recording ...................................................................238
[Live View Composite] .............................................................246
[Silent Mode]............................................................................250
[Shutter Type] ..........................................................................252
[Long Exposure NR] ........................................................................ 256
[Min. Shutter Speed]........................................................................ 257
[Shutter Delay]................................................................................. 258
Image Stabilizer .......................................................................259
Image Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 262
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity 269
[Metering Mode].......................................................................270
Program AE Mode ...................................................................272
Program Shift .................................................................................. 274
Aperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................276
Shutter-Priority AE Mode .........................................................279
Manual Exposure Mode...........................................................282
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.) ..................................................... 285
[B] (Bulb) ......................................................................................... 286
Preview Mode ..........................................................................287
8
Contents
Exposure Compensation .........................................................289

[i.Dynamic Range] ........................................................................... 292
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ............................293
ISO Sensitivity .........................................................................295
[Dual Native ISO Setting] ................................................................ 299
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]................................................................... 300
White Balance / Image Quality 301
White Balance (WB) ................................................................302

Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 308
[Photo Style] ............................................................................310
[Filter Settings].........................................................................323
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 328
[LUT Library] ............................................................................329
Lens Compensation.................................................................332
[Vignetting Comp.] ........................................................................... 332
[Color Shading Compensation] ....................................................... 333
[Diffraction Compensation] .............................................................. 337
Flash 338
Using an External Flash (Optional)..........................................339

Removing the Hot Shoe Cover........................................................ 340
Setting Flash............................................................................342
[Flash Mode].................................................................................... 343
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.] ............................................... 346
[Flash Adjust.].................................................................................. 348
[Flash Synchro] ............................................................................... 349
[Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................... 350
Recording Using a Wireless Flash...........................................351
9
Contents
Video Settings 358
Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/

S&Q) ........................................................................................359
Displays Suited to Video Recording ................................................ 360
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 361
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 365
Using AF (Video) .....................................................................367
[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 367
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 369
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ........................................................ 370
Video Brightness and Coloring ................................................372
[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 372
[Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 373
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 374
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 376
Audio Settings..........................................................................377
[Sound Rec Level Disp.].................................................................. 378
[Mute Sound Input] .......................................................................... 379
[Sound Rec Gain Level] .................................................................. 380
[Sound Rec Level Adj.].................................................................... 381
[Sound Rec Quality] ........................................................................ 382
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ............................................................... 383
[Wind Noise Canceller] .................................................................... 384
[Audio Information] .......................................................................... 385
External Microphones (Optional) .............................................386
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional) ................ 389
Reduction of Wind Noise ................................................................. 390
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)........................................391
[4ch Mic Input] ................................................................................. 393
Headphones ............................................................................394
10
Contents
[Sound Monitoring Channel] ............................................................ 396

Time Code ...............................................................................398
Setting the Time Code..................................................................... 399
Main Assist Functions..............................................................402
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] ............................................................... 403
[SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 404
[WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 406
[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 410
[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 412
[Frame Marker] ................................................................................ 414
Color Bars/Test Tone ...................................................................... 416
Special Video Recording 418
Slow & Quick Video .................................................................419

High Frame Rate Video ...........................................................426
[Focus Transition] ....................................................................428
[Live Cropping].........................................................................433
Log Recording .........................................................................438
[V-Log View Assist] ......................................................................... 442
HLG Videos .............................................................................443
[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 446
Anamorphic Recording ............................................................447
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 449
[Synchro Scan] ........................................................................451
[Loop Recording (video)] .........................................................453
[Segmented File Recording] ....................................................455
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be
Recorded .................................................................................456
11
Contents
HDMI Output (Video) 464
Connecting HDMI Devices.......................................................465

HDMI Output Image Quality.....................................................466
Images Output via HDMI ................................................................. 466
HDMI Output Settings..............................................................469
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 470
Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 471
Outputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 472
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI.................. 472
Output of RAW Video Data......................................................473
Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI ............................................ 475
Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data ....................................... 480
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) 481
Compatible External SSDs ......................................................482

Connecting the External SSD ..................................................483
Formatting the External SSD ...................................................486
Notes About External SSDs.....................................................487
Playing Back and Editing of Images 489
Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................490

Playing Back Videos ................................................................492
Video Repeat Playback ................................................................... 496
Extracting a Picture ......................................................................... 498
[Video Divide] .................................................................................. 499
Switching the Display Mode.....................................................501
Enlarged Display ............................................................................. 502
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 504
Calendar Playback .......................................................................... 506
12
Contents
Group Images ..........................................................................507

Deleting Images.......................................................................509
[RAW Processing]....................................................................511
[Video Repair] ..........................................................................520
[Playback] Menu ......................................................................523
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu......................... 523
[Playback] ([Playback Mode]) .......................................................... 525
[Playback] ([Process Image])........................................................... 528
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])......................................................... 529
[Playback] ([Edit Image]) ................................................................. 530
[Playback] ([Others])........................................................................ 534
Camera Customization 535
Fn Buttons ...............................................................................536
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 539
Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 550
[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................551
Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 551
Temporarily Change Dial Operation ................................................ 553
Quick Menu Customization......................................................554
Register to the Quick Menu ............................................................. 554
Custom Mode ..........................................................................561
Register in Custom Mode ................................................................ 562
Using Custom Mode ........................................................................ 564
Calling Up Settings .......................................................................... 565
[Custom] Menu ........................................................................566
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])..................................................... 567
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) .................................................... 573
[Custom] menu ([Operation]) ........................................................... 579
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) ................................... 585
13
Contents
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 596

[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])............................................................... 600
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) ..................................................... 602
[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................605
[Setup] menu ([Card/File]) ............................................................... 606
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]) ................................................... 612
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) ................................................................. 617
[Setup] menu ([Setting]) .................................................................. 623
[Setup] menu ([Others])................................................................... 625
My Menu ..................................................................................629
Registration in My Menu.................................................................. 629
Edit My Menu .................................................................................. 630
List of Menu 631
[Photo] menu ...........................................................................632

[Video] menu............................................................................634
[Custom] menu ........................................................................637
[Setup] menu ...........................................................................641
[My Menu] ................................................................................643
[Playback] menu ......................................................................644
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth 645
Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................647

Installing “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 648
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) ..................... 649
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 655
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations ....................................................................................... 661
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ..............................663
[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 665
14
Contents
[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 667

[Import images]................................................................................ 670
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 672
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 674
[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 676
[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 678
[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 679
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC..............................680
Wi-Fi Connections ...................................................................684
[Via Network] ................................................................................... 685
[Direct] ............................................................................................. 689
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 691
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] ...................................................... 693
Send Settings and Selecting Images.......................................694
Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 694
Selecting Images ............................................................................. 695
[LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ........................................................696
Streaming Function 699
Stream by Operating a Smartphone ........................................701

Stream by Operating the Camera............................................705
Stream by Operating the PC....................................................710
Streaming Settings ..................................................................713
Notes When Using the Streaming Function.............................721
Notes When Using USB Tethering/Wired LAN................................ 722
Connecting to Other Devices 723
Connecting...............................................................................724
Viewing on a TV.......................................................................726
15
Contents
Importing Images to a PC ........................................................730

Copying Images to a PC ................................................................. 731
Installing Software ........................................................................... 734
Storing on a Recorder..............................................................735
Tethered Recording .................................................................736
Installing Software ........................................................................... 737
Operating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 738
Using “LUMIX Tether” with a Wired LAN Connection ..................... 739
Remote Control of Multiple Cameras .............................................. 741
Materials 744
Digital Camera Accessory System ..........................................745

Using Optional Accessories.....................................................746
Battery Grip (Optional) .................................................................... 747
Shutter Remote Control (Optional) .................................................. 749
Tripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 751
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)................................. 752
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ....................................................753
Recording Screen............................................................................ 753
Playback Screen ............................................................................. 769
Message Displays....................................................................774
Troubleshooting .......................................................................778
Power, Battery ................................................................................. 778
Recording ........................................................................................ 779
Video ............................................................................................... 784
Playback .......................................................................................... 785
Monitor/Viewfinder........................................................................... 786
Flash................................................................................................ 787
Wi-Fi Function ................................................................................. 788
TV, PC ............................................................................................. 791
16
Contents
Others.............................................................................................. 792
Cautions for Use ......................................................................793
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available
Recording Time with the Battery..............................................803
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording
Time According to Recording Media........................................812
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for
Copying....................................................................................822
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...847
Specifications...........................................................................854
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................872
17
Introduction
This chapter describes information you should know before starting.
≥ Before Use: 19
≥ Standard Accessories: 22
≥ Lenses That Can Be Used: 24
≥ Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25
≥ Names of Parts: 28
18
Introduction – Before Use
Before Use
 Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality.
Make sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version.
We recommend using the latest firmware version.
• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and
select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the
firmware in [Firmware Version]. ([Firmware Version]: 628)
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index4.html
(English only)
 Handling of the Camera

When using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force.
These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.

This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a
rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism
in the body. It is not a malfunction.
19
 Splash Resistant
Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this
camera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust.
Splash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is
subjected to direct contact with water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following
precautions are taken:
– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically
designed to support this feature.
– Securely close the doors, contact points cover, etc.
– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and
moisture to enter inside.
– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
 Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor

is Fogged Up)
• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care
as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and
monitor.
• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog
will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the
ambient temperature.
20
 Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance

Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
 No Compensation Regarding Recording

Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
 Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights

Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
 Also Read “Cautions for Use” (Cautions for Use: 793)
21
Introduction – Standard Accessories
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Quick Start Guide>” (supplied).
≥Digital camera body

(This is referred to as camera in this document.)
≥Battery pack
(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)
• Charge the battery before use.
≥AC adaptor
• This is used for charging and power supply.
≥USB connection cable
≥Shoulder strap
≥Body cap*1
≥Hot shoe cover*1
≥Cover for the battery grip connector*1
*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.
22
Introduction – Standard Accessories
Items Supplied with DC-S5M2XK (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2XW

(Double Lens Kit Product)
≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:

S-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”
• Dust and splash resistant
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap*2
≥Lens rear cap*2
Items Supplied with DC-S5M2XC (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2XW

(Double Lens Kit Product)
≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:

S-S50 “LUMIX S 50mm F1.8”
• Dust and splash resistant
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap*2
≥Lens rear cap*2
*2 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.
• The memory card is optional.

• Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can
purchase the accessories separately.)
23
Introduction – Lenses That Can Be Used
Lenses That Can Be Used

The lens mount of this camera is compliant with the L-Mount standard of
Leica Camera AG.
It can be used with 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lenses and APS-C
size interchangeable lenses of this standard.
• The interchangeable lenses used in the explanations are designated as follows in
this document.
– 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens: full-frame lens
– APS-C-size interchangeable lens: APS-C lens
• When there is no distinguishing the type of lens, the explanation will use lens.
• Refer to catalogs/websites for information regarding supported lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
• The angle of view while recording with an APS-C lens is equivalent to the angle
of view of a focal length of 1.5× when converted to the focal length of a 35 mm
film camera. (If a 50 mm lens is used, the angle of view will be equivalent to a
75 mm lens.)
• As the image area narrows, the following function is not available when using an
APS-C lens:
– High Resolution Mode
• Attaching commercially available accessories that do not comply with the
L-Mount standard may lead to operation failure or malfunction of the camera.
– If a failure or malfunction occurs due to this cause, the warranty will be void.
24
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
Memory Cards That Can Be Used

This section describes the memory cards that can be used with this
camera. (As of April 2023)
Card slot 1/Card slot 2: SD memory card
SD memory card/SDHC memory card/SDXC memory card (Maximum 512 GB)
• The camera supports UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3 standard and UHS-II Video
Speed Class 90 standard SD cards.
• SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards are referred to
by the generic name of SD cards or cards in this document.
• For information on memory cards with confirmed operation, check the
following support site:
(English only)
25
 SD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera

When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD
Speed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.
• Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
[Video Record]
Bit rate of the Example of

Speed Class
recording quality indication
Class 10
72 Mbps or less UHS Speed Class 1 or higher
Video Speed Class 10 or higher
UHS Speed Class 3

200 Mbps or less
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
400 Mbps or less Video Speed Class 60 or higher
600 Mbps or less Video Speed Class 90
• The following types of video cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available): 481)
– [MOV] video with bit rate of 800 Mbps or more
– [Apple ProRes] video with resolution other than FHD
– Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with image compression system
ALL-Intra
26
• You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect
switch (A) on the SD card to “LOCK”.
(A)
• The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static
electricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up
important data.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
27
Introduction – Names of Parts
Names of Parts
≥ Camera: 28
≥ Supplied Lens: 36
≥ Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 38
Camera
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(1)
(2) (12)
(13)
(14)
(3)
28
(1) Drive mode dial (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)

(2) Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 340)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(3) Stereo microphone (Audio Settings: 377)
• Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record.
(4) Front dial (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 78)
(5) Shutter button (Basic Picture Operations: 114)
(6) [WB] (White balance) button (White Balance (WB): 302)
(7) [ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
(8) [ ] (Exposure compensation) button (Exposure Compensation: 289)
(9) Charging light (Charging Light Indications: 47)/
Network connection light (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
functions: 645)
(10) Video rec. button (Basic Video Operations: 124)
(11) [ ] (Recording distance reference mark) (Operations on the MF Assist
Screen: 197)
(12) Rear dial (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 78)
(13) Camera on/off switch (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time):
69)
(14) Mode dial (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
29
(18)
(15)
(19)
(16) (20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(17)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(15) [LVF] button (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 84)
(16) [ ] (Playback) button (Playing Back and Editing of Images: 489)
(17) Monitor (Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 38, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 753)/
Touch screen (Touch Screen: 81)
(18) [ ] (AF mode) button (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
(19) Focus mode lever (Selecting the Focus Mode: 152, Using AF: 154, Record
Using MF: 195)
(20) [AF ON] button ([AF ON] button: 156)
(21) Joystick (Joystick: 80)/
Fn buttons (Fn Buttons: 536)
1: Fn12, 3: Fn13, 2: Fn14, Center: Fn15, 4: Fn16
30
(22) [Q] (Quick menu) button (Quick Menu: 90)

(23) Cursor buttons (Cursor Buttons: 79)/
Fn buttons (Fn Buttons: 536)
3: Fn8, 1: Fn9, 4: Fn10, 2: Fn11
(24) Control dial (Control Dial: 78)
(25) [MENU/SET] button ([MENU/SET] Button: 79, Menu Operation Methods: 95)
(26) [DISP.] button (Switching the Display Information: 87)
(27) [ ] (Cancel) button (Menu Operation Methods: 95)/
[ ] (Delete) button (Deleting Images: 509)/
Fn button (Fn1) (Fn Buttons: 536)
31
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(39) (37)
(32) (40) (38)
(33) (41)
(42)
(28) Eye sensor (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 84)
(29) Viewfinder (Viewfinder/Monitor Displays: 38, Switching Between the Monitor
and Viewfinder: 84, Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 753)
(30) Eye cup (Cleaning the Viewfinder: 795)
(31) Speaker ([Beep]: 617)
(32) Tripod mount (Tripod: 801)
• If you attempt to attach a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or
more, you may not be able to securely fix it in place or it may damage the
camera.
(33) Battery grip connector (cover for the battery grip connector) (Battery Grip
(Optional): 747)
• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
32
(34) [REMOTE] socket (Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 749)

(35) Card slot 1 (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)
(36) Card access light 1 (Card Access Indications: 59)
(37) Card slot 2 (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)
(38) Card access light 2 (Card Access Indications: 59)
(39) Card door (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)
(40) DC Coupler cover (AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 752)
• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the Panasonic DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional) and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) are used.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional).
• When using an AC Adaptor (optional), use the AC cable/AC mains lead
supplied with the AC Adaptor (optional).
(41) Battery door (Battery Insertion: 44)
(42) Battery door release lever (Battery Insertion: 44)
33
(43)
(43)
(44) (49)
(45)
(50)
(46)
(51)
(47) (52)
(48) (53)
(54)
(55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (44)
(43) Fan outlet ([Fan Mode]: 601)

• The fan outlet for the cooling fan.
• Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers, tablecloths,
curtains, and similar items.
(44) Shoulder strap eyelet (Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 41)
(45) Fan inlet ([Fan Mode]: 601)
• The fan inlet for the cooling fan.
• Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers, tablecloths,
curtains, and similar items.
(46) Preview button (Preview Mode: 287)/
Fn button (Fn2) (Fn Buttons: 536)
(47) Grip
(48) Lens release button (Removing a Lens: 63)
(49) Self-timer light (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)/
AF assist light ([AF Assist Light]: 164)
34
(50) Diopter adjustment dial (Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter: 83)

(51) [MIC] socket (External Microphones (Optional): 386)
(52) Headphone socket (Headphones: 394)
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
(53) HDMI socket (Connecting HDMI Devices: 465, Output of RAW Video Data:
473, HDMI socket: 724)
(54) USB port (Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 46, Connecting
the External SSD: 483, Streaming Function: 699, USB port: 725, Using “LUMIX
Tether” with a Wired LAN Connection: 739)
(55) Lens lock pin (Lens fitting mark) (Attaching a Lens: 61)
(56) Sensor
(57) Contact points
(58) Mount
(59) Screw hole for function expansion
35
Supplied Lens
S-R2060
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(1) Lens surface

(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 195)
(3) Zoom ring (Recording with Zoom: 202)
(4) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 154, Record Using MF: 195)
• You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(5) Contact points
(6) Lens mount rubber
(7) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 61)
• Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade
image quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each
picture after you have taken it when recording.
36
S-S50
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Lens surface

(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 195)
(3) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 154, Record Using MF: 195)
• You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(4) Contact points
(5) Lens mount rubber
(6) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 61)
37
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays
At the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following
icons.
• For information about the icons other than those described here (Monitor/
Viewfinder Displays: 753)
Viewfinder
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
FINE
L AFS
60 F3.5 ISO100 999

(8) (9)(10)(11)(12) (13) (14) (15) (16)(17)
Monitor
FINE
L AFS
60 F3.5 ±0 ISO100 999
38
(1) Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 310)

(2) Level gauge ([Level Gauge]: 594)
(3) Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 121)/
Picture size ([Picture Size]: 119)
(4) AF area (AF Area Operations: 186)
(5) Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 152, Using AF: 154, Record Using
MF: 195)
(6) AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
(7) Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 259)
(8) Focus (green) (Basic Picture Operations: 114, Using AF: 154)/
Recording state (red) (Basic Video Operations: 124, High Resolution mode:
216)
(9) Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
(10) Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 270)
(11) Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 114, Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 279)
(12) Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 114, Aperture-Priority AE Mode:
276)
(13) Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation: 289)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 284)
(14) ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
(15) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)/
Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 607)
(16) Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
and Video Recording Time According to Recording Media: 812)/
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of Pictures That
Can Be Taken Continuously: 213)
(17) Battery indication (Power Indications: 52)
• Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
39
Getting Started
Before recording, read this chapter to prepare the camera.
≥ Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 41

≥ Charging the Battery: 43
≥ Inserting Cards (Optional): 57
≥ Attaching a Lens: 61
≥ Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle: 67
≥ Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 69
40
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Attaching a Shoulder Strap

Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
1

2 


3

41
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
4

• Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
• Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
42
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
Charging the Battery

≥ Battery Insertion: 44
≥ Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 46
≥ Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power/
Charging): 50
≥ Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 52
≥ [Power Save Mode]: 54
You can charge the battery in the camera body.

You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical
outlet.
You can also use the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional).
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22. (As of
April 2023)
• The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before
use.
43
Battery Insertion
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22).
• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
• Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
(A)
• Check that the lever (A) is holding the battery in place.
44
 Removing the Battery

1 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2 Open the battery door.
3 Push the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery.
• Check that the card access lights are off before removing the battery. (Card
Access Indications: 59)
(A)
• Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (cushion) of the
battery door.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
• The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after
charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
45
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging

Charging time: Approx. 220 min
• Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.

• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
46
(B)
1
3
4
2
2 Insert the battery into the camera.
3 Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using
the USB connection cable.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)
4 Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.

• The charging light (B) turns red and charging begins.
 Charging Light Indications
Charging light (red)

On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
Blinking: Charging error.
47
• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the
camera with the USB connection cable.
In that case, charging may take a while.
• The battery in the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5: optional) cannot be charged.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
• While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and
86 oF).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
• Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera off, it
consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet in order to save power.
48
 Power Supply
When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera
is turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power.
• [ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
• You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the
camera and a USB device (PC, etc.).
• The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.

• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.
• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
• For information about the high temperature display (For information
about the high temperature display: 129)
49
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power

(Supplying Power/Charging)
Since this camera and the items supplied with the Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional) are compatible with USB PD (USB Power
Delivery), you can charge while the camera is being supplied with power.
Connect the USB connection cable, AC adaptor and AC cable/AC mains
lead of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional) to the camera.
Charging time: Approx. 170 min
• Use the camera body and the AC adaptor supplied with the Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional). The camera is turned off.
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
(D) (E)
(C)
(C) USB connection cable

(D) AC adaptor
(E) AC cable/AC mains lead
50
• Insert the battery into the camera.

• Connect using the USB connection cable of the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15:
optional).
• When the camera is on, charging will take longer than when the camera is off.
• Even when connecting with devices that support USB PD, you may not be able
to charge while using the camera.
• If connecting with devices (PC, etc.) that do not support USB PD and turning the
camera on, then this will supply power only.
• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the power plug.
• Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
• Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
51
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply

 Power Indications
Indication on monitor
(F) (G) (H)
(F) USB connection cable supplying power

(G) Battery indication
(H) Using the battery in the Battery Grip
80 % or higher
60 % to 79 %
40 % to 59 %
20 % to 39 %
19 % or below
Low battery
• Charge or replace the battery.
Blinking in red
• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.

The exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.
52
• We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.

There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause
accidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting
from the use of non-genuine batteries.
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power
plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
• Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cable on other devices.
This may cause a malfunction.
• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
• The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery
is fully charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
• Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.
• If the battery indication does not go to [ ] even when charging is complete,
the battery may be deteriorating.
Try not to use that battery.
53
[Power Save Mode]

This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a
set time. Reduces battery consumption.
[ ][ ]  Select [Power Save Mode]
54
[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
[Sleep Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected
Mode(Wi-Fi)] from Wi-Fi.
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn
[Auto LVF/
off.
Monitor Off]
(The camera is not turned off.)
Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being
displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching is active.
Sets the amount of time until the camera is
[Time to Sleep]
put to sleep.
Sets the screen where the camera is put to
[Power Save
sleep.
LVF Shooting]
[Only Control Panel]: Puts the camera to
[Method of sleep only when the control panel (Control
Activation] Panel: 92) is displayed.
[While Recording Standby]: Puts the
camera to sleep from any screen during
recording standby.
• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],
perform one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.
55
• [Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:

– While connected to a PC
– During video recording/video playback
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with [Live View Composite]
– When recording with [Focus Transition]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
56
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
Inserting Cards (Optional)
• Format the cards with the camera before use. ([Card Format]: 606)
This camera supports the double card slot function.

When two cards are used, relay recording, backup recording, and
allocation recording are available.
1

57
2 (A)
(B)
3

(A) Card slot 1

(B) Card slot 2
• Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly
until they click.
• You can set the way to record to card slots 1 and 2:

([Double Card Slot Function]: 607)
• You can set the folder and file name where to save the images:
([Folder / File Settings]: 609)
58
 Card Access Indications

The card access light turns on while the card is being accessed.
(C)
(D)
(C) Card access light for card slot 1

(D) Card access light for card slot 2
• The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.
• Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may
be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
59
 Removing a Card
1 Open the card door.

2 Push the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight.
• Check that the card access lights are off before removing the card.
60
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens
≥ Attaching a Lens Hood: 64
You can attach the Leica Camera AG L-Mount standard lens to this
camera.
For information about the lens that can be used (Lenses That Can Be
Used: 24)
• Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].

• Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust.
If dirt or dust gets on the lens (Dirt on the Image Sensor: 794)
• Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
61
1

2 

(A)
• When removing the body cap, rotate it while pressing the lens release button (A).
(B)
(B) Lens fitting marks
62
 Removing a Lens
• While pressing the lens release button (A), rotate the lens in the direction of the
arrow until it stops and then remove it.
(A)
• When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function
with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation
of the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens
when you select [Yes]. You can also select from amongst already registered lens
information. ([Lens Information]: 267)
• You can change the settings so that the confirmation message is not displayed:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 604)
• Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
• After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
63
Attaching a Lens Hood

For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the
inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from
the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.
It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.
When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the
interchangeable lens (S-R2060)
• Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will become bent.
64
1 Align mark (C) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on

the tip of the lens.
(C)
2 Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to

align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the
tip of the lens.
≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.
(D)
65
 Removing the Lens Hood (S-R2060)

While pressing the lens hood button (E), rotate the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow and then remove it.

(E)
• The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the
camera.
Example) S-R2060
1 Align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
(D)
66
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle

At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
180°
2
180°
90°
67
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
• The angles of adjustment are guides only.

• Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.
• You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of
the monitor during recording:
([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 589)
68
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the

First Time)
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time
zone and clock appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
1 Set the camera on/off switch to [ON].

≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step . 4
2 When [Please set the language] appears, press or

.
3 Set the language.
≥Press 34 to select the language and then press or .
4 When [Please set the time zone] appears, press or

.
69
5 Set the time zone.

≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or .
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move
forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A)
(A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
6 When [Please set the clock] appears, press or .
70
7 Set the clock.

21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second).
34: Select a value.
To set the display order and time display format

≥To display the screen for setting the display order (B) and time
display format (C), select [Style] by pressing 21 and then press
or .
(B) (C)
71
8 Confirm your selection.

≥Press or .
9 When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,

press or .
• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2023”.
• Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the
built-in battery.)
• [Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
([Time Zone]: 625, [Clock Set]: 625)
72
Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic camera operations and the Intelligent Auto
mode which helps you start recording immediately.
≥ How to Hold the Camera: 74

≥ Selecting the Recording Mode: 76
≥ Camera Setting Operations: 77
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings: 83
≥ Quick Menu: 90
≥ Control Panel: 92
≥ Menu Operation Methods: 95
≥ Entering Characters: 101
≥ Intelligent Auto Mode: 102
≥ Recording Using Touch Functions: 108
73
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
How to Hold the Camera

To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your
side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
≥ Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
≥ Support the lens from below with your left hand.
• Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other
objects.
• Do not cover the fan inlet (C) and fan outlet (D) of the cooling fan with your hand, etc.
(D) (B) (D)
(C) (A)
74
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
 Vertical Orientation Detection Function

This function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held
vertically orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically
oriented.
• If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated.
([Rotate Disp.]: 526)
• When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation

detection function may not work correctly.
• You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording:
([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 604)
75
Basic Operations – Selecting the Recording Mode
Selecting the Recording Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the recording mode.
[iA]
Intelligent Auto mode (Intelligent Auto Mode: 102)
[P]
Program AE mode (Program AE Mode: 272)
[A]
Aperture-Priority AE mode (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 276)
[S]
Shutter-Priority AE mode (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 279)
[M]
Manual Exposure mode (Manual Exposure Mode: 282)
[ ]
Creative Video mode (Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/
S&Q): 359)
[S&Q]
Slow & Quick mode (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]
Custom mode (Custom Mode: 561)
76
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
Camera Setting Operations

When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
(A)
(G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B)
(A) Front dial ( ) (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 78)
(B) Rear dial ( ) (Front Dial/Rear Dial: 78)
(C) Control dial ( ) (Control Dial: 78)
(D) Cursor buttons (3421) (Cursor Buttons: 79)
(E) [MENU/SET] button ( ) ([MENU/SET] Button: 79)
(F) Joystick (3421/ ) (Joystick: 80)
(G) Touch screen (Touch Screen: 81)
77
 Front Dial/Rear Dial

Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
 Control Dial
Rotate:
78
 Cursor Buttons
Press:
 [MENU/SET] Button
Press:
Confirms a setting.
• Displays the menu during recording and playback.
79
 Joystick
The joystick can be operated in 8 directions by tilting it up, down, left, right
and diagonally and by pressing the center part.
(H) Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or moves a position.

• Place your finger on the center of the joystick before tilting. The joystick may not
work as expected when the sides are pressed.
(I) Press: Confirms a setting.
(H)
(I)
• You can disable the operations of operating parts.

([Operation Lock Setup]: 580)
80
 Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen.
Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.
81
Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are
touching the touch screen.
• If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the
precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
• Touch operations can be disabled:

([Touch Settings]: 579)
82
Basic Operations – Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings

≥ Setting the Viewfinder: 83
≥ Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 84
≥ Switching the Display Information: 87
Setting the Viewfinder

 Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial while looking through the
viewfinder.
• Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the viewfinder.
83
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder

With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.
When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor (A) works and the
camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.
You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button
(B).
Press [LVF].
(B) (A)
(C) (D) (E)
(C) Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching

(D) Viewfinder display
(E) Monitor display
84
 Simultaneous Display on the Monitor and Viewfinder

When automatic viewfinder/monitor switching (C), if the monitor is rotated
towards the lens, the recording screen seen when looking through the
viewfinder is also displayed on the monitor.
85
• The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the way
the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
• During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
does not work.
• To focus when looking through the viewfinder:

([Eye Sensor AF]: 578)
• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:
([Eye Sensor]: 616)
• You can set the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording
pictures:
([Monitor Frame Rate]: 613)
• You can set the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording
pictures.
([LVF Frame Rate]: 614)
• You can switch the display speed in the live view on the monitor and viewfinder
when the focus mode is set to [AFC].
([AFC Live View]: 614)
• You can adjust the brightness, coloring, red or blue tints, etc., of the monitor/
viewfinder:
([Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 615)
• You can adjust monitor/viewfinder luminance:
([Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]: 615)
86
Switching the Display Information

Press [DISP.].
≥ The display information is switched.
 Recording Screen
Monitor
(F) (G) (H) (I)
FINE
L AFS
ISO 0 0
0
AUTO
3:2
AFS FINE OFF
Fn
ISO
999
±0 AUTO 999 AWB 999
(F) With information

(G) Without information
(H) Control panel
(I) Turned off (black)
87
Viewfinder
(J) (K)
FINE
L AFS
999
(J) With information

(K) Without information
• Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.

This can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. ([Level Gauge]: 594)
• Control panel operation (Control Panel: 92)

• You can hide the control panel and black screen:
([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 595)
• The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not
overlap:
([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 589)
• You can display the outline for the live view:
([Framing Outline]: 595)
88
 Playback Screen
(L) (M) (N) (O)
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999 AFS 1/5
3:2 FINE sRGB

L
STD. AWB
ISO 100 0
60 F3.5
2023.12. 1 10:00
60 F3.5 ±0 ISO100
FINE
L 100-0001
(L) With information

(M) Detailed information display
• Pressing 34 switches the display information. (Detailed information display: 772)
(N) Without information
(O) Without blinking highlights
• This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking
Highlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. ([Blinking
Highlights]: 591)
89
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1 Display the Quick menu.

≥Press [Q].
2 Select a menu item.

≥Press 3421.
≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.
ISO
AWB AUTO
0 0 0
0 0 0
3:2
90
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
3 Select a setting item.

≥Rotate or .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item.
ISO
AWB AUTO
0 0 0
0 0 0
3:2
4 Close the Quick menu.

≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q].
• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
• The Quick menu can be customized:

(Quick Menu Customization: 554)
91
Basic Operations – Control Panel
Control Panel
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode)/[S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick
mode), the display changes to one especially for video.
• For information about the screen (Control Panel: 761, Control Panel (Creative
Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode): 764)
1 Display the control panel.

≥Press [DISP.] several times.
ISO 0 0
0
AUTO
3:2
AFS FINE Fn
999
AWB 999
2 Touch the items.

≥The setting screens for each of the items are displayed.
92
3 Change the setting.

Example) Changing the AF mode
≥Touch the setting item.
• Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the
settings.
4 Touch [Set].
93
 Changing Directly Using the Dial

Steps 2 to 4 can also be changed using the following operations.
1 Press one of 3421 to enable selection of items.
• Selected items are displayed in yellow.
2 Press 3421 to select an item.
• Selection is also possible by rotating or .
3 Rotate to change the settings values.
ISO 0
0
AUTO
3:2
AFS FINE
AWB
ISO 0
0
AUTO
3:2
AFS FINE
AWB
• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
94
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
Menu Operation Methods

≥ [Reset]: 100
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by
touch.
Configuration and operation parts of the menu

The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Use the operation parts indicated below to operate the main tab, the sub tab, the page
tab, and menu items without moving to the corresponding menu levels.
• You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.
(B) (C)
(D)
(E)
(A)
(A) Main tab ([Q] button)

(B) Sub tab ( )
(C) Menu item ( )
(D) Page tab ( )
(E) Setting item
95
1 Display the menu.

≥Press .
2 Select a main tab.

≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the main tab and then pressing or .
96
3 Select a sub tab.

≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1.
the sub tab and then pressing or .
• If there are page tabs (D), then after the page tabs have finished switching,
the next sub tab is switched to.
(D)
4 Select a menu item.

≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1.
the menu item and then pressing or .
97
5 Select a setting item and then confirm your selection.

≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
the setting item and then pressing or .
6 Close the menu.

≥You can also close the menu by pressing [ ] several times.
98
 Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings

If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a
description about the item is displayed on the screen.
 Grayed Out Menu Items

Menu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out.
If you press or while a grayed out menu item is selected, the
reason why it cannot be set is displayed.
• The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the
menu item.
99
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
• Recording settings
• Network settings (settings of [Streaming Setup], [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup], and
[Bluetooth])
• Setup and custom settings (other than [Streaming Setup], [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup], and
[Bluetooth])
[ ][ ]  Select [Reset]
• If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
• If the setup and custom settings are reset, [Lens Information] in [Image
Stabilizer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu/[Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu
is also returned to the default setting.
• The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
• List of default settings and settings that can be reset (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 822)
100
Basic Operations – Entering Characters
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1 Enter characters.
≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press or
until the character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this)
• To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate or to the right to

move the entry position cursor.
• If you select an item and press or , you can perform the following
operations:
–[ ]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
– [ ] ]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
–[ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
–[ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
• When entering a password, (A) shows the number of characters you have
entered and the number of characters you can enter.
(A)
2 Complete entering.
≥Select [Set] and then press or .
101
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
Intelligent Auto Mode
The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings
automatically selected by the camera.
The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings
automatically to match the subject and recording conditions.
1 Set the recording mode to [iA].

≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
102
2 Aim the camera at the subject.

≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3 Adjust the focus.

≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any

humans.
103
4 Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully to take pictures.
≥Press the video rec. button to record videos.
• Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from

appearing dark when there is a backlight.
104
 Types of Automatic Scene Detection

Taking pictures Recording video
i-Portrait*1  
*2
i-Portrait & Animal  
i-Scenery  
i-Macro  
i-Night Portrait*3 
i-Night Scenery 
i-Food 
i-Sunset 
i-Low Light 
 
*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to

[HUMAN] or [FACE/EYE].
*2 Detected when [Detecting Subject] in the [Photo] ([Focus]) menu is set to
[ANIMAL+HUMAN].
*3 Detected when using an external flash.
• If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).

• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
105
 AF Mode
Changing the AF mode.
• Each press of [ ] changes the AF mode.
• The mode can also be changed by touching the screen or pressing and holding the
joystick.
• [AF Detection Setting] is fixed to [ON].
• The [Detecting Subject] setting is maintained for any recording mode other than [iA]
mode. (Automatic Detection: 173)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ] ([Full Area AF])

The camera detects a person’s face, eyes, and body (entire body or upper half of the
body) and the body of animals, and adjusts the focus.
• You can switch the human, animal, or eye to be focused by either touching the white
AF area or moving the joystick 3421.
106
[ ] ([Tracking])
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the
subject, maintaining focusing.
Aim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button
halfway.
• The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or fully.
• For information about AF modes (Automatic Detection: 173, [Tracking]: 176)
 Flash
When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate flash
mode for the recording conditions.
When Slow Sync. ([ ], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake
because the shutter speed becomes slow.
• For information about external flashes (Using an External Flash (Optional):

339)
107
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
Recording Using Touch Functions

≥ Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 108
≥ Touch AE: 111
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.

Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
108
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the icon.
≥The icon switches each time you touch it.
AF
(Touch AF)
Focus on the touched position.
(Touch Shutter)
Record with focus on the touched position.
(OFF)
3 (When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the

subject.
109
• When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
• For information about operations to move the AF area (AF Area Operations:
186)
• It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position:
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 191)
110
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.

When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.

1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [ AE ].
≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.
AF
111
3 Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the

brightness.
• To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
ュリヴヱハ 5HVHW 6HW
4 Touch [Set].
 How to Disable Touch AE

Touch [ ].
• When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:

– [Live Cropping]
• You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you
touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
112
Taking Pictures
These are the basic operations and settings for taking pictures.
≥ Basic Picture Operations: 114

≥ [Aspect Ratio]: 117
≥ [Picture Size]: 119
≥ [Picture Quality]: 121
113
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations
Basic Picture Operations
1 Select the recording mode ([iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]).

114
2 Adjust the focus.

≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently).
≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed.
(When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications
blink in red.)
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].
60 F3.5
(C) (B) (A)
115
3 Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further).
• Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the

[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture
display duration to your preferred setting. ([Auto Review]: 585)
• With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu
to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture even when
the subject is not in focus. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 573)
116
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]
[Aspect Ratio]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[ ][ ]  Select [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]
Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2]
Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9]
Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1]
Square aspect ratio
[65:24]
65:24 panoramic aspect ratio
[2:1]
2:1 panoramic aspect ratio
117
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]
• [65:24] and [2:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following
functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
• When using APS-C lenses, [65:24] and [2:1] are not available.
• A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:

([Frame Marker]: 414)
118
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture’s image size. The image size varies depending on the
[Aspect Ratio] or the lens used.
When an APS-C lens is used, the image area switches to the one for
APS-C, thereby narrowing the angle of view.
[ ][ ]  Select [Picture Size]
119
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
[Aspect [Picture Size]

Ratio] When using full-frame lenses When using APS-C lenses
[L] (21.5M) 5328×4000 [L] (9.5M) 3536×2656
[4:3] [M] (10.5M) 3792×2848 [M] (5M) 2560×1920
[S] (5.5M) 2688×2016 [S] (2.5M) 1840×1376
[L] (24M) 6000×4000 [L] (10.5M) 3984×2656
[3:2] [M] (12M) 4272×2848 [M] (5.5M) 2880×1920
[S] (6M) 3024×2016 [S] (3M) 2064×1376
[L] (20M) 6000×3368 [L] (9M) 3984×2240
[16:9] [M] (10M) 4272×2400 [M] (4.5M) 2880×1624
[S] (5M) 3024×1704 [S] (2M) 1920×1080
[L] (16M) 4000×4000 [L] (7M) 2656×2656
[1:1] [M] (8M) 2848×2848 [M] (3.5M) 1920×1920
[S] (4M) 2016×2016 [S] (2M) 1376×1376
[65:24] [L] (13M) 6000×2208
[2:1] [L] (18M) 6000×3000
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, the [M] and [S] image sizes are indicated with [ ].
• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– High Resolution mode
120
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[ ][ ]  Select [Picture Quality]
[FINE]
JPEG images that give priority to image quality.
File format: JPEG
[STD.]
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of recordable pictures without changing the
picture size.
File format: JPEG
[RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]
This records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.
File format: RAW+JPEG
[RAW]
This records RAW images.
File format: RAW
121
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on the
camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
The color depth of RAW images recorded with this camera is 14 bits. This is limited
to 12 bits during burst recording, however.
• You can process RAW images on the camera. ([RAW Processing]: 511)
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Adwaa) to process and edit
RAW files on a PC. (SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE: 734)
• RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [3:2] aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [RAW+FINE] or [RAW+STD.] on the
camera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
• When the following function is being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:
• You can assign the function that records a RAW image and a JPEG image
simultaneously once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot RAW+JPG]: 542)
• Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]:
([Color Space]: 571)
122
Recording Videos
These are the basic operations and settings for recording videos.
• Please also refer to the following chapters for more detailed information about
recording videos:
– Video Settings: 358
– Special Video Recording: 418
– HDMI Output (Video): 464
≥ Basic Video Operations: 124

≥ [System Frequency]: 131
≥ [Rec. File Format]: 133
≥ [Rec Quality]: 135
≥ [Image Area of Video]: 149
123
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
Basic Video Operations
It is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 6K (5952×3968)

on this camera.
It also supports switching of the system frequency and 3 types of recording
file format; MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes.
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
1 Select the recording mode.

124
2 Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A).
• Release the video rec. button right after you press it.
(A)
3 Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A) again.
125
 Screen Displays While Video Recording

The live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video
recording, and video recording time (B) and elapsed recording time (C) are
displayed.
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• The recording state indication (D) and card access indication (E) turn red while
videos are being recorded.
3s
24m59s
(D) (C) (E) (B)
• If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
126
 Exposure Control While Video Recording

Videos will be recorded using the aperture value, shutter speed, ISO
sensitivity, and Dual Native ISO settings below.
Recording Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity/Dual Native

mode ISO setting
The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
[iA]
(Types of Automatic Scene Detection: 105)
The settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] [ON]. ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 571)
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ ]/[S&Q] Records with manually set values.
127
 Size Interval for Dividing Files

A new file will be created to continue recording if the continuous recording
time or the file size exceeds the following conditions.
File division
[Rec. File Recording
Resolution Bit rate Continuous
Format] media File size
recording time
(A)
[FHD] (B) 30 minutes 4 GB
(C)
[MP4] All
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
Other than
(B) 3 hours
[FHD] 96 GB
(C) 4 minutes
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
600 Mbps
(B) 3 hours
or less 192 GB
(C) 4 minutes
[MOV] All (A)
800 Mbps (B)
or more 3 hours
(C) 640 GB
4 minutes
(A) 30 minutes 4 GB
[FHD] (B) 3 hours
192 GB
(C) 4 minutes
[Apple
All (A)
ProRes]
Other than (B)
[FHD] 3 hours
(C) 640 GB
4 minutes
(A) Using an SDHC memory card

(B) Using an SDXC memory card
(C) Using an external SSD
128
• If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video

recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
• The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
• If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording bothers
you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.
– Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for recording.
• Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a while
after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
• Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may occur
where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not displayed
correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
• Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
• For information about the high temperature display
When the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen.
If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot
be used is displayed on the screen and recording, HDMI output, and the
streaming function will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the
message indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message
indicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on
again.
129
• You can set the temperature during video recording at which the camera
automatically stops recording:
([Thermal Management]: 613)
• You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with
the [ ] mode:
([Video-Priority Display]: 599)
• You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video is
being recorded:
([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 599)
130
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
[System Frequency]
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played
back with the camera.
The default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV
broadcast system for the region where the camera was purchased.
[ ][ ]  Select [System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
System frequency for regions using the NTSC broadcasting system
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
System frequency for regions using the PAL broadcasting system
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
System frequency for producing cinema film
131
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
• After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.
• If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system
of your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your
TV.
We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are
unsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing
cinema film.
• After changing the setting, it is recommended to insert another card and format it
with this camera.
– Make the [System Frequency] setting the same for when you are recording and
playing back.
132
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format]
[Rec. File Format]
Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.
[ ][ ]  Select [Rec. File Format]
[MP4]
This file format is suitable for playback on PCs.
[MOV]
This file format is suitable for image editing.
[Apple ProRes]
Records using the Apple ProRes codec.
This file format is suitable for image editing.
133
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format]
• The following types of video cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
– [MOV] video with bit rate of 800 Mbps or more
– [Apple ProRes] video with resolution other than FHD
– Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with image compression system
ALL-Intra
134
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.

The image qualities you can select depend on the recording mode,
[System Frequency], and [Rec. File Format] settings.
The [Image Area of Video] setting items you can select depend on the [Rec
Quality] settings.
[Rec Quality] settings can also be made using [Filtering] ([Filtering]: 146)
to display only items that meet your conditions and [add to list] ([add to
list]: 147) to register recording qualities you use often.
6K (3:2)/Full
5.9K (16:9)/Full
5.8K (17:9)/Full
C4K30p/25p/24p (17:9)/Full
4K30p/25p/24p, FHD (16:9)/Full
3.3K(4:3)/APS-C
C4K (17:9)/APS-C
4K/FHD (16:9)/APS-C
• The above shows some of the recording qualities available.
135
[ ][ ]  Select [Rec Quality]
• To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, you require an SD card with the
corresponding Speed Class.
• Video with a bit rate of 800 Mbps or more cannot be recorded to an SD card. You will
need a commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an External
SSD (Commercially Available): 481)
• [Apple ProRes] video with a resolution other than FHD cannot be recorded to an SD
card. You will need a commercially available external SSD for recording. (Using an
External SSD (Commercially Available): 481)
• For information about the cards that can be used (SD Cards That Can Be Used
with This Camera: 26)
136
 [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]

• YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [10bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [8bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 8 bit, Long GOP
• Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate

(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]

[Image Area of Video]
Aspect
[Rec Quality] Resolution (A) (B) (C)
FULL APS-C ratio
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]   3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC

[4K/10bit/72M/30p]    3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]    3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]    3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]    3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 20 AVC
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 24 AVC
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]

Aspect
FULL APS-C ratio
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]   3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC

[4K/10bit/72M/25p]    3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]    3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 20 AVC
137
 [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]

• YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [422/10-I] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, ALL-Intra
– [422/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [420/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
• Audio format: LPCM (4ch)*1
*1 Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks
of the video.
: Only available in Creative Video mode.

(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[6K/30p/420/10-L]*2   5952×3968 3:2 29.97p 200 HEVC

[6K/24p/420/10-L]   5952×3968 3:2 23.98p 200 HEVC
[6K/30p/420/10-L]*2   5952×3136 17:9 29.97p 200 HEVC
[6K/24p/420/10-L]   5952×3136 17:9 23.98p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]*2   5888×3312 16:9 29.97p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]   5888×3312 16:9 23.98p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 47.95p 800 AVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 47.95p 600 AVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 47.95p 200 AVC
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 47.95p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/30p/422/10-I]   3328×2496 4:3 29.97p 400 AVC
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 29.97p 150 AVC
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 29.97p 150 HEVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I]   3328×2496 4:3 23.98p 400 AVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 23.98p 150 AVC
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 23.98p 150 HEVC
138
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 800 AVC

[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 600 AVC
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 800 AVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 600 AVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]    4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 400 AVC
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]    4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 400 AVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 800 AVC
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 600 AVC
[4K/60p/422/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[4K/60p/420/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 800 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 600 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[4K/48p/420/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[4K/30p/422/10-I]    3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 400 AVC
[4K/30p/422/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[4K/30p/420/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-I]    3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 400 AVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 400 AVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 AVC
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 119.88p 150 HEVC
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 200 AVC
139
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 100 AVC

[FHD/60p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 100 AVC
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 47.95p 100 HEVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 200 AVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 100 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 200 AVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 100 HEVC

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[6K/25p/420/10-L]*2   5952×3968 3:2 25.00p 200 HEVC

[6K/25p/420/10-L]*2   5952×3136 17:9 25.00p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]*2   5888×3312 16:9 25.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 800 AVC
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 600 AVC
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 200 AVC
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/25p/422/10-I]   3328×2496 4:3 25.00p 400 AVC
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 25.00p 150 AVC
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 25.00p 150 HEVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 800 AVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 600 AVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]    4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 400 AVC
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 150 AVC
140
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 150 HEVC

[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 800 AVC
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 600 AVC
[4K/50p/422/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[4K/50p/420/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[4K/25p/422/10-I]    3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 400 AVC
[4K/25p/422/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 150 AVC
[4K/25p/420/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 25.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/100p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 400 AVC
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 AVC
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 100.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 100 HEVC
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[6K/24p/420/10-L]   5952×3968 3:2 24.00p 200 HEVC

[6K/24p/420/10-L]   5952×3136 17:9 24.00p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]   5888×3312 16:9 24.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 48.00p 800 AVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3328×2496 4:3 48.00p 600 AVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 48.00p 200 AVC
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 48.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I]   3328×2496 4:3 24.00p 400 AVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 24.00p 150 AVC
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]   3328×2496 4:3 24.00p 150 HEVC
141
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 48.00p 800 AVC

[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   4096×2160 17:9 48.00p 600 AVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 48.00p 200 AVC
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]   4096×2160 17:9 48.00p 200 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]    4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 400 AVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]    4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 48.00p 800 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]*3   3840×2160 16:9 48.00p 600 AVC
[4K/48p/422/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 48.00p 200 AVC
[4K/48p/420/10-L]   3840×2160 16:9 48.00p 200 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-I]    3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 400 AVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L]    3840×2160 16:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 48.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 48.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 48.00p 100 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]    1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 200 AVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]    1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 100 HEVC
*2 When [Thermal Management] is set to [STANDARD], recording stops once the

continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes. ([Thermal Management]: 613)
*3 [Rec Quality] [(H)] indicates a bit rate of 800 Mbps and [(L)] indicates a bit rate of
600 Mbps.
[(H)] video cannot be recorded to SD cards.
142
 [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]

• Audio format: LPCM (4ch)*1
*1 Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks
of the video.
: Only available in Creative Video mode.

(B) Bit rate
(C) Video compression format (422 HQ: Apple ProRes 422 HQ, 422: Apple ProRes
422)

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[5.8K/30p/422 HQ]*2   5776×3056 17:9 29.97p 1.9 Gbps 422 HQ

[5.8K/30p/422]*2   5776×3056 17:9 29.97p 1.3 Gbps 422
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ]   5776×3056 17:9 23.98p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ
[5.8K/24p/422]   5776×3056 17:9 23.98p 1.0 Gbps 422
[3.3K/30p/422 HQ]   3328×2496 4:3 29.97p 913 Mbps 422 HQ
[3.3K/30p/422]   3328×2496 4:3 29.97p 609 Mbps 422
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ]   3328×2496 4:3 23.98p 730 Mbps 422 HQ
[3.3K/24p/422]   3328×2496 4:3 23.98p 487 Mbps 422
[C4K/60p/422 HQ]*2   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 1.9 Gbps 422 HQ
[C4K/60p/422]*2   4096×2160 17:9 59.94p 1.3 Gbps 422
[C4K/30p/422 HQ]    4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 972 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/30p/422]    4096×2160 17:9 29.97p 648 Mbps 422
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]    4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 778 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/24p/422]    4096×2160 17:9 23.98p 519 Mbps 422
[FHD/60p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 454 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/60p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 59.94p 302 Mbps 422
[FHD/30p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 227 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/30p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 29.97p 151 Mbps 422
143
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 181 Mbps 422 HQ

[FHD/24p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 23.98p 121 Mbps 422

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[5.8K/25p/422 HQ]*2   5776×3056 17:9 25.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ

[5.8K/25p/422]*2   5776×3056 17:9 25.00p 1.1 Gbps 422
[3.3K/50p/422 HQ]   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 1.5 Gbps 422 HQ
[3.3K/50p/422]   3328×2496 4:3 50.00p 1.0 Gbps 422
[3.3K/25p/422 HQ]   3328×2496 4:3 25.00p 761 Mbps 422 HQ
[3.3K/25p/422]   3328×2496 4:3 25.00p 508 Mbps 422
[C4K/50p/422 HQ]*2   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ
[C4K/50p/422]*2   4096×2160 17:9 50.00p 1.1 Gbps 422
[C4K/25p/422 HQ]    4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 811 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/25p/422]    4096×2160 17:9 25.00p 541 Mbps 422
[FHD/50p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 378 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/50p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 50.00p 252 Mbps 422
[FHD/25p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 189 Mbps 422 HQ
[FHD/25p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 25.00p 126 Mbps 422

[Image Area of
Video] Aspect
ratio
FULL APS-C
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ]   5776×3056 17:9 24.00p 1.6 Gbps 422 HQ

[5.8K/24p/422]   5776×3056 17:9 24.00p 1.0 Gbps 422
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ]   3328×2496 4:3 24.00p 731 Mbps 422 HQ
[3.3K/24p/422]   3328×2496 4:3 24.00p 487 Mbps 422
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]    4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 779 Mbps 422 HQ
[C4K/24p/422]    4096×2160 17:9 24.00p 519 Mbps 422
144
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]    1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 182 Mbps 422 HQ

[FHD/24p/422]    1920×1080 16:9 24.00p 121 Mbps 422
*2 When [Thermal Management] is set to [STANDARD], recording stops once the

continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes. ([Thermal Management]: 613)
• In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:

– 6K (5952×3968) video: 6K video
– 5.9K (5888×3312) video: 5.9K video
– 5.8K (5776×3056) video: 5.8K video
– 3.3K (3328×2496) video: 3.3K video
– C4K (4096×2160) video: C4K video
– 4K (3840×2160) video: 4K video
– Full High Definition (1920×1080) video: FHD video
• Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording
time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
• Videos in ALL-Intra and 4:2:2 10-bit formats and videos whose [Rec. File Format]
is [Apple ProRes] are intended for editing on a PC used for video production.
• You can register a combination of [System Frequency], [Rec. File Format],

[Image Area of Video], and [Rec Quality] to My List. ([add to list]: 147)
145
 [Filtering]
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], you can
specify items such as frame rate, number of pixels (resolution), and
compression format (YUV, bit value, image compression), and just display
recording qualities that meet those conditions.
1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.].
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .

• Settings: [Frame Rate]/[Resolution]/[Codec]
3 Press 34 to select the filtering conditions and then press or .
4 Press [DISP.] to confirm the setting.
• You are returned to the [Rec Quality] setting screen.
Clearing the filtering conditions

Select [ANY] in Step 3.
• The filtering conditions are also cleared when you do the following:
– Change the [Rec. File Format]
– Change the [System Frequency]
– Select a recording quality from [Rec Quality (My List)]
• When you change recording quality using a filter, the current filtering conditions
are stored.
146
 [add to list]
Select a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality
you register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)].
In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q].

• The following settings are also registered at the same time:
– [System Frequency]
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Image Area of Video]
Setting or deleting in My List

1 Select [Rec Quality (My List)].
• [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality (My List)]
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press or .
• You cannot select setting items that have different system frequencies.
• To delete from My List, select the item and press [Q].
147
Setting from the control panel

It is possible to display the My List of recording qualities from the control panel in
[ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] is set.
Touch the recording quality item.

• When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is
displayed.
When not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed.
• [Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.]
button.
• The next time the setting screen is displayed, the screen last used is displayed.
FPS SHUTTER IRIS
30 1/60 F3.5
0 FULL TC
DF 00:00:00.00
MOV 420/10-L 24m59s OFF
4K 29.97p 24m59s
48kHz/24bit -36 -24 -12 -6 0
CH1 -2
CH2 -6
ISO PHOTO STYLE WB

AUTO
100 AWB
• Up to 12 types of recording quality can be registered.
148
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs
depending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to
achieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration.
[ ][ ]  Select [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
Records using a range corresponding to the full-frame lens image circle.
[APS-C]
Records using a range corresponding to the APS-C lens image circle.
[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Records with one pixel on the sensor, which is equal to one pixel of the video.
Records a range corresponding to the resolution range in [Rec Quality]. ([Rec
Quality]: 135)
149
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
• The [Image Area of Video] settings you can select differ depending on the [Rec
Quality] setting. ([Rec Quality]: 135)
• It is not possible to set to [FULL] in the following case.
– When using APS-C lenses
Image area (Ex.: FHD video)
FULL
APS-C
PIXEL/PIXEL
FULL APS-C PIXEL/PIXEL
(A) (B)
(A) Angle of view: Wide/Telescopic effect: Not possible

(B) Angle of view: Narrow/Telescopic effect: Possible
150
Focus / Zoom
Smoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode
most suited to the recording conditions and the subject.
• This camera supports phase detection AF and contrast AF.
≥ Selecting the Focus Mode: 152

≥ Using AF: 154
≥ Selecting the AF Mode: 170
≥ AF Area Operations: 186
≥ Record Using MF: 195
≥ Recording with Zoom: 202
151
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
Selecting the Focus Mode
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.

It is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC]. ([AF
Custom Setting(Photo)]: 159)
Set the focus mode lever.
[S] ([AFS])
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[C] ([AFC])
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly adjusted according
to the movement of the subject.
• This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement
prediction)
152
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid activating AF.
(Record Using MF: 195)
• In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is
pressed halfway:
–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– During video recording
– In low light situations
• When the following functions are being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
153
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
Using AF
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 159
≥ [Focus Limiter]: 162
≥ [AF Assist Light]: 164
≥ [1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment]: 166
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.

Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and
scene.
1 Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].

≥Set the focus mode lever. (Selecting the Focus Mode: 152)
2 Select the AF mode.

≥Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen, and set
using or . (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
• In [iA] mode, each press of [ ] switches between [ ] and [ ]. (AF

Mode: 106)
154
3 Press the shutter button halfway.

≥The AF operates.
(A) (B)
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus icon (A) Lights Blinking
AF area (B) Green Red
AF beep Two beeps —
155
Low illumination AF
• In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon
LOW
is indicated as [ ].
• Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then
Starlight AF will be activated.
STAR
When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ ], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
• Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
 [AF ON] button

You can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].
156
• Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF

mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
• When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may
take some time for the camera to focus:
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
• If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
157
• You can restrict the range for AF to work:

([Focus Limiter]: 162)
• When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
([Quick AF]: 577)
• You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter
button is pressed halfway:
([Half-Press Shutter]: 577)
• The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:
([Beep]: 617)
• You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects
close by to an Fn button.
This function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the background:
([AF-ON : Near Shift]: 543)
• You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects far
away to an Fn button.
This function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:
([AF-ON : Far Shift]: 543)
158
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
You can select features of AF operation when taking pictures with [AFC]
that are appropriate for the subject and scene.
Each of these features can be further customized.
1 Set the focus mode to [AFC].

2 Set [AF Custom Setting(Photo)].

≥ [ ][ ]  [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1]
Basic general-purpose setting.
[Set 2]
Suggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant speed in one
direction.
[Set 3]
Suggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects may be in the
scene.
[Set 4]
Suggested for situations where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
159
 Adjusting AF Custom Settings

1 Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.
2 Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.
• A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
• To reset settings to the default, press [Q].
3 Press or .
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.

When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
[+] the camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can
bring different subjects into focus one after another.
[AF Sensitivity] When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera waits for a short period of time before
[−] re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the
focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for
example, an object moves across the image.
Sets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject
movement.
(When AF mode is set to Full Area AF)
[AF Area When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
Switching [+] immediately switches the AF area to keep the subject in
Sensitivity] focus.
The camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace.
[−] Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or by
obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
160
Sets the tracking method for changes in the speed of subject

movement.
• At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by
responding even to sudden movements of the subject.
[Moving Subject However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight
Prediction] movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.
This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in
[0]
speed.
[+1]
These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
[+2]
161
[Focus Limiter]
You can restrict the range for AF to work.

The focusing speed of AF increases when you limit the range where AF
works.
1 Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].

2 Set [Focus Limiter].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Focus Limiter]
[ON]
Enables the following settings.
[OFF]
Disables the following settings.
162
[SET]
1 Use the same procedure as MF (Record Using MF: 195) to check the
focus, then press [WB] or [ISO] to set the range of operation for AF.
• This can also be set by touching [Limit1]/[Limit2].
• [Limit1]/[Limit2] can be set from either.
1 2
WB Limit1
ISO Limit2 (m)∞10 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
2 Press or to confirm the setting.

• Press [DISP.] to return the operation range to the default setting.
• This can be set when using an L-Mount lens with a focus ring.
• It cannot be set if the focusing distance range selector switch of the lens has
been used to limit the operation range.
• The setting values are reset when the lens is replaced.
• When [Focus Limiter] is working, [ ]/[ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When the following function is being used, [Focus Limiter] is not available:
– [AF+MF]
163
[AF Assist Light]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when
you press the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to
focus.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [AF Assist Light]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is attached.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• Remove the lens hood.
• The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus
when a lens with large diameter is used.
164
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [1-Area AF Moving Speed]
Settings: [FAST]/[NORMAL]
165
[AF Micro Adjustment]
You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with
phase detection AF.
• There is normally no need to adjust the focus point. Adjust only when necessary.
If you adjust on a lens that has a correct focus point, there is a risk that the
camera will not be able to record with the appropriate focus point.
166
[ ][ ]  Select [AF Micro Adjustment]
[ALL]
Adjust uniformly for all lenses.
Used in cases such as when you have attached lenses that are not registered in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
[ADJUST BY LENS]
Adjust each lens separately and register the adjustment values on the camera.
When a registered lens is attached, the adjusted value is recalled when it is set in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
• When using a zoom lens, you can adjust the focus point individually at the
wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
• If the lens has already been registered, the adjustment value is overwritten.
[OFF]
167
 Registering the Adjusted Value

1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [DISP.].
2 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Register the lens.
• Press [DISP.] and select [Yes] to register.
• If the lens is already registered, the screen moves to the one in Step 3.
3 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Select [Wide Adjustment] or [Tele
Adjustment].
• Press 34 to select, and then press or .
• When using a prime lens, [Adjustment] is displayed.
4 Adjust the focus point.

• Press 21 to adjust the focus point and then press or .
• You can also adjust by rotating , , or .
• The focus point is moved backward when adjusted with the [+] side. The focus
point is moved forward when adjusted with the [−] side.
5 Record and repeat Step 4 until the suitable focus point is reached.
• Check the set focus point in an image recorded with [AFC] of the [Focus/
Shutter Priority] set to [FOCUS] and with the focus mode set to [AFC].
([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 573)
168
• We recommend making the adjustments in the same environment that will be

used for recording.
• We recommend using a tripod when adjusting.
• You can register a maximum of 40 lenses in [ADJUST BY LENS]. When the

upper limit is exceeded, already registered lens information is overwritten.
• When a teleconverter is used when adjusted with [ADJUST BY LENS], the
combination of the lens and teleconverter is registered.
• The focus point for the wide-angle end and the telephoto end cannot be
individually adjusted in [ALL].
• The registration numbers and lens names registered in [ADJUST BY LENS] are
entered automatically and cannot be changed.
 Initializing
Registered lens information and adjusted values are initialized.
1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [Q].

2 Select [Yes] to initialize.
• Irrespective of the [ALL]/[ADJUST BY LENS] selection, all of the registered lens

information and adjusted values in [AF Micro Adjustment] are initialized.
169
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
Selecting the AF Mode

≥ Automatic Detection: 173
≥ [Tracking]: 176
≥ [Full Area AF]: 177
≥ [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone]: 180
≥ [1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 182
≥ [Pinpoint]: 184
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
In an AF mode other than Pinpoint, you can automatically focus by
detecting humans and animals.
1 Press [ ].
≥The AF mode selection screen appears.
170
2 Select the AF mode.

≥Press 21 to select an item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ ].
[Tracking]
([Tracking]: 176)
[Full Area AF]

([Full Area AF]: 177)
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
([Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]: 180)
[Zone]
([Zone]: 181)
[1-Area+]
([1-Area+]: 182)
[1-Area]
([1-Area]: 182)
[Pinpoint]
([Pinpoint]: 184)
171
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:

• When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [Live Cropping]
• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
• You can set the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection
screen:
([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 575)
172
Automatic Detection
When automatic detection is enabled, humans and animals are detected
and the camera automatically focuses.
You can set the target for detection.
1 Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [AF Detection Setting]  [ON]
• You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
2 Select [Detecting Subject].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Detecting Subject]
• It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection

screen.
[HUMAN]
Detects human faces, eyes, and bodies.
• [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[FACE/EYE]
Detects only human faces and eyes.
•[ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[ANIMAL+HUMAN]
Detects humans and animals.
Animals that can be detected are birds, canines (including wolves, etc.), and
felines (including lions, etc.).
173
 When [ ]
When the camera detects a person’s face (A)/(B) or body or an animal’s
body (C), an AF area is displayed.
If multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and
you can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.
(B)
(A) (C)
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this automatically.
• Eye detection works only for the eyes inside the yellow frame (A).
White
Displayed when multiple subjects are detected.
174
 When [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
If even part of a human or animal enters the AF area, these are
automatically detected and focused.
• If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (D) works.
It is not possible to change the eye to focus on.
(D)
• [AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].

• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
• The camera can detect a combined total of up to 3 human and animal bodies.
• When the following function is being used, [Detecting Subject] is fixed to [FACE/
EYE]:
– [Live Cropping]
• You can make it so the metering range for automatic exposure is not prioritized
on the face and eyes when automatic detection works:
([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 569)
• You can make the cross for face/eye detection disappear:
([Eye Detection Display]: 576)
175
[Tracking]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of
the subject, maintaining focusing.
Start tracking.
≥ Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed
halfway or pressed fully.
• If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.

• When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.
• How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 186)
• In [ ]/[S&Q] mode and while recording video, tracking will continue even if
the shutter button is released.
To cancel tracking, press or , or touch [ ].
Tracking is also available with [AFS].
• When automatic detection is working, the detected subject is tracked.

• Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
176
[Full Area AF]

The camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought
into focus.
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can ensure that the focus stays
on the subject by recording while keeping the subject within the Full Area
AF area.
 Specify the Person, Animal, or Eye to Bring into Focus

When automatic detection is [ON], multiple subjects are detected.
When the person or animal to be brought into focus is shown using the
white AF area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.
177
≥ Touch operations
Touch the person, animal or eye indicated with the white AF area.
• The AF area will change to yellow.
• To cancel the setting, touch [ ].
≥ Operations with the joystick

Tilt the joystick to 3421.
• Each tilt to 3421 switches the person, animal or eye to be brought into focus.
• To cancel the setting, press .
≥ Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
3 When the white AF area changes to yellow, press .

• To cancel the setting, press .
178
 Setting the AF Area in Any Position

The [ ] AF area can be set in any position.
≥ Touch operations
Touch any position on the recording screen and then touch [Set].
• Touch [ ] to return to [ ].
≥ Operations with the joystick

Press and hold the joystick.
• The [ ] AF area is set in the center of the screen.
• Either press and hold the joystick again or press to return to [ ].
≥ Button operations
2 Press 3421 to move the AF area, and then press to confirm.
• Press again to return to [ ].
• You can move and change the size of the set AF area:
(AF Area Operations: 186)
179
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/ [Zone]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
Within the full area, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
Horizontal pattern
Vertical pattern
• To switch between the horizontal pattern and vertical pattern, press 3421 in the
AF area setting screen.
180
[Zone]
Within the full area, a central oval zone can be focused.
•[ ] changes to [ ] in the following cases:

–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
181
[1-Area+]/ [1-Area]
[1-Area+]
Emphasis within a single AF area can be focused.
Even when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject
remains focused in a supplementary AF area (E).
• Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [ ].
(E)
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
182
A dot (F) is displayed on the recording screen when a single AF area is

reduced to the minimum size. The AF area can be set on the location
where the dot is displayed.
(F)
• It is not possible to reduce a single AF area to the minimum when using the
following function:
–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
• Change the movement speed of a single AF area:

([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165)
183
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on a small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the
focus will be enlarged.
• The enlarged screen is displayed when you set an AF area.

• When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.

• Automatic detection does not work in [ ].
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:

–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
184
Operations on the Magnification Window
Button Touch
Description of operation
operations operations
Moves [+].
3421 Touch • Positions can be moved to the diagonal
directions using the joystick.
Pinch out/
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
pinch in
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset] Quits the enlarged display.
• You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.

• You can also take a picture by touching [ ].
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:

([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 576)
185
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
AF Area Operations
≥ Move the Position of the AF Area: 186
≥ Changing the Size of the AF Area: 189
≥ Resetting the AF Area: 190
≥ Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 191
≥ Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad: 192
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 194
Move the Position of the AF Area

 Touch operations
With the default settings, focus is on the point touched when you touch the
screen. ([Touch Settings]: 579)
Touch the recording screen.

• The AF area setting screen is displayed.
The AF area is set when you either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway.
• You can optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position. (Focus on
and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 191)
• You can focus on the touched position and release the shutter. (Touch AF/
Touch Shutter: 108)
186
 Operations with the joystick

With the default settings, the AF area can be manipulated with the joystick.
([Joystick Setting]: 583)
Tilt the joystick in the recording screen.

The AF area is set when you either press or press the shutter button halfway.
• Pressing enables switching between the default and set AF area positions.
In [ ], this operation displays the enlarged screen.
187
 Button operations
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
• The AF area is set when you either press or press the shutter button
halfway.
• When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with the
AF area.
• You can set the AF area to loop when moved:

([Looped Focus Frame]: 578)
• You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 543)
188
Changing the Size of the AF Area

Pinch out/pinch in the AF area in the AF area setting screen.
• Either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
 Dial Operations
Rotate , , or .
• Either press or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
• In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be changed.
189
Resetting the AF Area

Touch [Reset] in the AF area setting screen.
• The first touch returns the AF area position to the center. The second touch returns
the AF area size to the default.
 Button operations
Press [DISP.] in the AF area setting screen.
• The first press returns the AF area position to the center. The second press returns
the AF area size to the default.
190
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched

Position ([AF+AE])
1 Set [Touch AF].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Touch Settings]  [Touch AF]  [AF+AE]
2 Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the

brightness.
≥At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as
[ ] is displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF
area.
3 Touch [Set].
≥The [AF+AE] setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] or
[ ] is set: [ ]) on the recording screen.
191
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad

During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position
and size of the AF area.
1 Set [Touch Pad AF].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Touch Settings]  [Touch Pad AF] 
[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]
2 Move the position of the AF area.

≥During viewfinder display, touch the monitor.

192
 Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])

[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder by touching a desired position on the touch pad.
[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4]

(lower right)/[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/[OFFSET7] (lower left)
Moves the AF area of the viewfinder according to the distance you drag your finger on
the touch pad.
Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
[OFF]
193
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]

Memorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is
vertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned.
Two vertical orientations, left and right, are available.
[ ][ ]  Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations.
[OFF]
Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.
• In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
194
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
Record Using MF
≥ [Focus Peaking]: 200
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.

Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1 Set the focus mode to [MF].

2 Select the focus point.

≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus point.
• To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.].
195

≥Press .
≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
4 Adjust the focus.

≥Rotate the focus ring.
• This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)
• A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide)
(A) (B)
(m)∞10 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
AF
(C) (D)
(A) MF Assist (enlarged screen)

(B) Focus Peaking
(C) Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
(D) MF Guide
196
5 Close the MF Assist screen.

≥This operation can also be performed by pressing .
6 Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
 Operations on the MF Assist Screen

Button Touch
Moves the enlarged display position.
3421 Drag • Positions can be moved to the diagonal
Pinch out/
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
pinch in
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the

center.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
[AF ON] AF The AF operates.
• You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
197
• On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist
screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen
will be exited a short time after you cease the operation.
• You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [ ].
• During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.
• The MF Assist screen can also be displayed during video recording.
• The recording distance reference mark indicates the position of the imaging
surface. This becomes the reference when measuring the recording distance.
• During video recording using the following functions, the MF Assist screen
cannot be displayed:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– [Live Cropping]
198
• You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
([Focus Peaking]: 200)
• You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal
orientations:
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 194)
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
([MF Assist]: 574)
• You can change the MF Guide display units:
([MF Guide]: 575)
• You can disable focus ring operation:
([Focus Ring Lock]: 575)
• You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
([Looped Focus Frame]: 578)
• The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
([Lens Focus Resume]: 602)
• The amount of focus movement can be set:
([Focus Ring Control]: 603)
• You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 543)
199
[Focus Peaking]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear
outlines) are highlighted with color.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Focus Peaking]
[ON] Focus Peaking display is performed.

[OFF] —
If adjusted to the negative direction, portions
[Focus Peaking
to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you
Sensitivity]
to achieve a more precise focus.
You can set the display color of the in-focus
[Display Color]
portion.
When set to [ON], the Focus Peaking
[Display During display is also possible when the shutter
AFS] button is pressed halfway in the [AFS] focus
mode.
[SET]
[While In Live View]: Focus Peaking is
displayed in the recording screen.
[While Live View Is Enlarged]: Focus
Peaking is displayed in the MF Assist screen
[Display During
and the video enlarged display of live view
MF]
screen.
[When Shutter Is Pressed]: When set to
[OFF], Focus Peaking is hidden when the
shutter is pressed.
200
• You can display the Touch Tab ([Touch Settings]: 579) and then touch [ ]
in [ ] to switch [ON]/[OFF].
• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Focus Peaking] is not available.
201
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
Recording with Zoom

≥ Extended Tele Conversion: 204
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.

When taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect
without image deterioration.
When recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same
telescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].
• For details about [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
Rotate the zoom ring.

(T): Telephoto
(W): Wide-angle
(W) (T)
202
≥ The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.
35mm
• The focal length display can be hidden:

([Focal Length]: 591)
203
Extended Tele Conversion
[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in
image quality.
• The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture
Size] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.
– Set to [ M]: 1.4×
– Set to [ S]: 2.0× (1.9× when using APS-C lenses)
1 Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Picture Size]  [M]/[S]
2 Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[TELE CONV.]
Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF]
204
• When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button,
pressing [DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting.
• When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
205
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer
This chapter describes functions for recording in drive mode and the image
stabilizer function.
≥ Selecting the Drive Mode: 207

≥ Taking Burst Pictures: 209
≥ High Resolution mode: 216
≥ Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221
≥ Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 228
≥ Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 232
≥ Recording Using the Self-timer: 234
≥ Bracket Recording: 238
≥ [Live View Composite]: 246
≥ [Silent Mode]: 250
≥ [Shutter Type]: 252
≥ Image Stabilizer: 259
206
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
Selecting the Drive Mode
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording
conditions.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
[ ] (Single)
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed.
[ ]/[ ] (Burst) (Taking Burst Pictures: 209)

Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
[ ] (High Resolution mode) (High Resolution mode: 216)

This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
[ ] (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation) (Recording with Time Lapse

Shot: 221, Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 228)
Takes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation.
[ ] (Self-timer) (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)

Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the shutter button is pressed.
207
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
• The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn
button:
[ ][ ]  [Fn Button Set]  [Setting in REC mode]  [Drive Mode
Setting]
208
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
Taking Burst Pictures
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
You can select burst recording settings to suit the recording conditions,
including [H], [M], and [L] which enable burst recording with high image
quality, and SH burst recording which takes burst pictures at ultra high
speeds using an electronic shutter.
1 Set the drive mode to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst

Shot 2).
≥Set the drive mode dial. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)
• Configure the burst settings for each of [ ] and [ ].
2 Select the burst rate.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Burst Shot Setting]  [Burst Shot 1
Setting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]
• With the default settings, [H] is set for [ ] and [SH] is set for [ ].
209
[SH]
Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed with the electronic shutter, 30 frames/
second.
[H]
Takes high-speed burst pictures.
[M]
Takes medium-speed burst pictures.
[L]
Takes low-speed burst pictures.
3 Close the menu.

4 Start recording.
• Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.
210
 Burst Rate
Mechanical Live View when
shutter, electronic Electronic shutter taking burst
front curtain pictures
[SH] — 30 frames/second None
9 frames/second 9 frames/second
[H] ([AFS]/[MF]) ([AFS]/[MF]) None ([AFS]/[MF])
(High speed) 7 frames/second 8 frames/second Available ([AFC])
([AFC]) ([AFC])
[M]
5 frames/second Available
(Medium speed)
[L]
2 frames/second Available
(Low speed)
• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
211
 Maximum Number of Frames Recordable

[Picture Quality]
[RAW+FINE]/
[FINE]/[STD.] [RAW]
[RAW+STD.]
*1
[SH] 200 frames
[H]
(High speed)
[M] 300 frames or
200 frames or more*2
(Medium speed) more*2
[L]
(Low speed)
• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.

Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
*1 Recording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.
*2 The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
212
 Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously

When you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can
be taken continuously will appear on the recording screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
ISO100 r20
• Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
– During [H]/[M]/[L] burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
– During SH burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst recording stops.
• When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst
pictures.
213
 Focus when Taking Burst Pictures

[Focus/
Shutter
Priority]
Focus mode [SH] [H] [M]/[L]
([Focus/
Shutter
Priority]: 573)
[FOCUS]
[AFS] [BALANCE] Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[RELEASE]
[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus
[AFC] [BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
• When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
• With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
214
 Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures

Focus mode [SH] [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame The exposure is
[AFC] The exposure is adjusted for each frame adjusted for each
[MF] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame frame
• It may take a while to save burst pictures.

If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum
number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
• Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following function:
Notes on SH burst recording

• [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ELEC.].
• There are limits on the shutter speed you can set during SH burst recording.
– [SH]: To a minimum of 1/30
• The aperture will be fixed during burst recording.
• The images recorded will be saved as a set of burst group pictures. (Group
Images: 507)
215
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
High Resolution mode
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
This function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move.
The picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format.
• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.

• The image stabilization function is automatically turned off.
1 Set the drive mode to [ ] (High resolution).

2 Set the recording settings.

≥ [ ][ ]  [High Resolution Mode Setting]
216
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAW+FINE]/[RAW]
• When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same settings as [Picture
Quality] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to
[FINE].)
[Picture Size]
Sets the image size after merging.
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [4:3].
[XL] (85 M): 10656×8000
[LL] (42.5 M): 7552×5664
[XL] (96 M): 12000×8000
[LL] (48 M): 8496×5664
[XL] (81 M): 12000×6736
[LL] (40.5 M): 8496×4784
[XL] (64 M): 8000×8000
[LL] (32 M): 5664×5664
• RAW images are always recorded in the [3:2] (12000×8000) aspect ratio.
217
[Simul Record Normal Shot]

Simultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when [ON] is set. The first
picture will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [L].
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is
released.
[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8
SEC]/[Off]
[Motion Blur Processing]

Sets the correction method to use when the subject moved.
[MODE1]: This gives priority to High Resolution mode, therefore subject blur
appears as an afterimage in the picture.
[MODE2]: This reduces afterimage from subject blur, but cannot obtain the
same High Resolution mode effect in the corrected range.
218
3 Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in

place.
• If blurring is detected, the High Resolution mode icon (A) blinks.
(A)
4 Start recording.
• With the default settings, [Shutter Delay] is activated, so there will be a gap in
time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released.
• The screen goes dark during recording.
• The recording state indication (red) (B) blinks.
Do not move the camera while it is blinking.
• You can continue recording when the merging process ends.
(B)
219
• In High Resolution mode, recording will be performed using the following

settings:
– [Shutter Type]: Fixed to [ELEC.]
– Minimum aperture value: F16
– Shutter speed: 1 second to 1/8000 of a second
– ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [3200]
– Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF]
• When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may change
or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• Devices other than this camera may not be able to play back images recorded
using High Resolution mode.
• When using APS-C lenses, recording in High Resolution Mode is not possible.
• When the following function is being used, High Resolution Mode is not
available:
220
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.

This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects
such as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video. (Group Images: 507)
• Check that the clock is set correctly. (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for
the First Time): 69)
• For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to
[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
1 Set the drive mode to [ ].

2 Set [Mode] to [Time Lapse Shot].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Time Lapse/Animation]  [Mode]  [Time
Lapse Shot]
221
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Shooting Interval Setting]

[ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place.
[OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully.
[After 2 Seconds]: Starts recording 2 seconds after the shutter button is
pressed fully.
[Start Time Set]: Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/[Shooting Interval]

Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken.
The number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken can be
automatically calculated and set. (Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot
Recording: 224)
• [Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to
[OFF].
[Exposure Leveling]
Adjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large changes in brightness
between adjacent frames.
[Create New Folder At Rec]

[Create a New Folder]: When set to [ON], a new folder is created each time
that Time Lapse Shot recording is started.
[File Number Reset]: When set to [ON], the file number is reset each time a
new folder is created.
222
4 Close the menu.

5 Start recording.
• When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the
start time is reached.
• During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain period of time.
• The recording will stop automatically.
6 Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion

Animation Videos: 232)
• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Time Lapse Video]: 528)
223
 Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot Recording

When [DISP.] is pressed in the [Image Count]/[Shooting Interval] setting
screen, [Image Count] and [Shooting Interval] can be set by automatically
calculating them from the frame rate, time, and recording duration of the
video to be created.
1 Press 34 to select the item and then press or .
[Production Frame Rate]

Sets the frame rate of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 1 fps and 99 fps.
[Video Length]
Sets the playback time of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
[Time Lapse Shooting Duration]

Sets the Time Lapse Shot duration.
It can be set in the range between 00h00m01s and 99h59m59s.
2 Press [DISP.] to confirm.

• The settings are reflected when you select [Yes].
224
• [Image Count] can be set in the range between 1 and 9999.

• [Shooting Interval] is set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
Decimal places are rounded down if the number is not evenly divisible.
• When the setting is one where recording is not possible, [Image Count] or
[Shooting Interval] is displayed in red letters.
• When [Shooting Interval Setting] is [OFF], the Time Lapse Shot settings cannot
be automatically calculated.
225
 Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording

Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
• You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot
recording.
[Continue]
Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause]
Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
• You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End]
Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
226
• Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
• Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully to
resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
• [Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO]
in [M] mode.
• [Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following function:
227
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.

The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video. (Group Images: 507)

2 Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Time Lapse/Animation]  [Mode]  [Stop
Motion Animation]
228
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Add to Picture Group]

Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have
already been recorded.
• Select an image and proceed to Step . 5
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
4 Close the menu.

229
5 Start recording.
≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little.
• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them
as reference for the amount of movement.
• You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [ ] during
recording.
Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
6 Stop recording.
≥Press and then select [Time Lapse/Animation] from the
[Photo] menu to stop recording.
230
7 Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion

Animation Videos: 232)
• After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Stop Motion Video]: 528)
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.

• If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the recording
is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one
that was taken.
• [Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following function:
231
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation

Videos
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can
• Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
– Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221
– Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 228
• You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 528) or
[Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 528) in the [Playback] menu.
1 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen that appears

after recording.
2 Set the options for creating a video.
232
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
3 Select [OK].
≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format.
[OK]
Creates a video.
[Rec Quality]
Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
• Videos cannot be created when the [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz

(CINEMA)].
• Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
• In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set
233
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
Recording Using the Self-timer

2 Set the self-timer time. (Setting the Self-timer Time:

236)
• When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer
Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON].
3 Close the menu.

4 Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.

• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
234
5 Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.
≥After the self-timer light blinks, shooting or video recording starts.
235
 Setting the Self-timer Time

Picture: [ ][ ]  Select [Self Timer]
Video: [ ][ ]  [Self Timer Setting]  Select [Self Timer]*
* This can be set by setting [Self Timer For Video] to [ON] in [Self Timer Setting] in
the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu.
[ ] Takes a picture after 10 seconds.

Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.
[ ] (When recording video, it will be the same operation with
[ ].)
Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
[ ] • This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake
caused by pressing the shutter button.
[ ] to [ ]
Takes a picture after the time selected with [Custom Time].
(Custom)
Sets the time until recording starts.
[Custom Time] [10SEC]/[9SEC]/[8SEC]/[7SEC]/[6SEC]/
[SET] [5SEC]/[4SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]
[Display A countdown is displayed on the recording
Countdown] screen when the self-timer is Custom.
236
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
• [Self Timer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu and [Self Timer] in the [Self
Timer Setting] ([Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu) work together.
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])
– [Bracketing]
237
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
Bracket Recording
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
• Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:

– [A] mode
– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
• White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white
balance is set to [ 1 ], [ 2 ], [ 3 ], or [ 4 ].
1 Set [Bracketing Type].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Bracketing]  [Bracketing Type]
238
2 Set [More Settings].

≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3 Close the menu.

4 Focus on the subject and then take pictures.
239
 Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])

[ ] (Exposure Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the exposure.
([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 242)
[ ] (Aperture Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the aperture
value. ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 243)
[ ] (Focus Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the focus
point. ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 244)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket)

When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance adjustment values. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket): 245)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature))

When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance color temperatures. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)): 245)
[OFF]
 How to Cancel Bracketing

Select [OFF] in Step . 1
240
• When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [65:24]/[2:1], only the Exposure Bracket can be
used.
• White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not
available when using the following functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
• Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:
– SH burst recording
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
241
 [More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)

[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record 7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence]
Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot Setting]

[ ]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is pressed.
[ ]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter button is pressed once.
• The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is taken.
• When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected exposure
compensation value.
242
 [More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)

[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately setting the aperture value
in the sequence of one before and then one after using the initial aperture value as the
reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0 (S-R2060)

(6) (4) (2) (1) (3) (5) (7)
2.8 4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16 22

(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image, (3) 3rd image ... (7) 7th image
243
 [More Settings] (Focus Bracket)

[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
• The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if the initial focus point
is close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
• This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/−/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the sequence of forward
and then backward using the initial focus point as the reference.
[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side using the initial focus
point as the reference.
Example when [Sequence]: [0/−/+] is set

(A) (B)
・
・・(4) (2) (1) (3) (5)・
・・
Example when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set
(A) (B)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)・
・・
(A) Focus: closer
(B) Focus: more distant
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image ... (5) 5th image ...
• When [Focus Limiter] is set, recording is within the set range where AF works.
• Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
(Group Images: 507)
244
 [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)

Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press
or .
Rotate to the right:

Horizontal direction ([A] - [B])
Rotate to the left:
Vertical direction ([G] - [M])
• The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
G
A B
 [More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color

Temperature))
Rotate , or to set the correction step and then press
or .
• The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ].
5500K
±300K
245
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Live View Composite]
[Live View Composite]
Images are recorded over several times and only the parts that change to
become brighter form part of the composition.
The images composed by recording at a set exposure time (shutter speed)
are displayed, allowing the images to be confirmed as recording proceeds.
This allows you to reduce the overall brightness for recording, so it is
convenient for recording the light trails of stars or fireworks against a bright
nightscape.
1 Set the recording mode to [M].

2 Set [Live View Composite].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Live View Composite]
3 Start Live View Composite recording.

≥Select [Start] and then press or .
246

place.
5 Set the shutter speed and ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate to set the shutter speed.
≥Press [ISO], then rotate , , or to set the ISO sensitivity.
• The shutter speed can be set in the range between 60 seconds

and 1/1.6 of a second.
• The ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [100] and
[3200] ([50] and [3200] when [Extended ISO] is set).
6 Get the image to use for noise reduction.

7 Start recording.
5
• Recording is done according to the settings in Step , and images
processed with noise reduction are merged a frame at a time.
(A) Histogram display
(B) Shutter speed × Number of images merged
(C) Elapsed time
LC
5 sec. x 1200
1h40m00s
(A)(B) (C)
247
8 Stop recording.
• A maximum of 3 hours can be recorded with one Live View

Composite recording.
(Recording automatically ends when the time exceeds 3 hours.)
9 End [Live View Composite].

≥Press [Q].
 Setting Items ([Live View Composite])

[Start]
Starts Live View Composite recording.
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is
released.
[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[OFF]
248
• [Long Exposure NR] will be [ON].

• When recording with the flash, the flash fires only in the first frame.
• Some menus are not displayed after getting the noise reduction image.
• The image for noise reduction is discarded when you do the following. Do Step 6
again.
– Modify the shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
– Switch the playback mode
• When pressing the shutter button fully to end recording, the last image may not
be merged.
• During Live View Composite recording, audio is not output to an external device
connected by HDMI.
• [Live View Composite] is not available when using the following functions:
– [ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR] ([Shutter Type])
– [Silent Mode]
249
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
[Silent Mode]
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.

The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist
light will be set to forced off mode.
• The following settings are fixed:
– [Flash Mode]: [ ] (Forced Flash Off)
– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [AF Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
Picture: [ ][ ]  Select [Silent Mode]

Video: [ ][ ]  Select [Silent Mode]
250
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:

– Charging light/Network connection light
– Card access lights
– Self-timer light
• [Silent Mode] is not available when using the following function:
• Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy,
portrait, and other rights of subjects.
251
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Type]
[Shutter Type]
≥ [Long Exposure NR]: 256
≥ [Min. Shutter Speed]: 257
≥ [Shutter Delay]: 258
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
[ ][ ]  Select [Shutter Type]
252
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording conditions and
shutter speed.
[MECH.]
Records with the mechanical shutter type.
[EFC]
Records with the electronic front curtain type.
[ELEC.]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
[ELEC.+NR]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
When pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is closed after recording
to perform long shutter noise reduction.
253
Mechanical Electronic front Electronic shutter

shutter type curtain type type
This type starts
This type starts and
exposure This type starts and
ends exposure with
Mechanism electronically and ends exposure
the mechanical
ends it with the electronically.
shutter.
mechanical shutter.
Flash   —
[B] (Bulb, max. [B] (Bulb, max. [B] (Bulb, max.
Shutter speed approx. approx. approx.
(sec.) 30 minutes)*1, 30 minutes)*1, 60 seconds)*1,
60 to 1/8000 60 to 1/2000 60 to 1/8000
Mechanical shutter Mechanical shutter Electronic shutter
Shutter sound
sound sound sound*2
*1 This setting is available only in [M] mode.

*2 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in
[Beep] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. ([Beep]: 617)
• The electronic front curtain type reduces blur caused by the shutter because the
amount of vibration from the shutter is small compared to the mechanical shutter
type.
• The electronic shutter type allows you to record without vibration from the shutter.
254
• To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few seconds
after the shutter button is pressed:
([Shutter Delay]: 258)
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic

shutter type.
• When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject may
appear distorted in the picture.
• When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a case, lowering the
shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• When using APS-C lenses, the electronic front curtain is not available.
255
[Long Exposure NR]
The camera automatically removes noise generated when recording

images with a slow shutter speed.
[ ][ ]  Select [Long Exposure NR]
• Recording is not possible during noise reduction.

• When the following functions are being used, [Long Exposure NR] is not
available:
– Video recording/SH burst recording
– [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.+NR])/[Silent Mode]
256
[Min. Shutter Speed]
Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
[ ][ ]  Select [Min. Shutter Speed]
[AUTO]
The camera automatically sets the minimum shutter speed.
[1/8000] to [1/1]
• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations
where correct exposure cannot be achieved.
257
[Shutter Delay]
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released

after the specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.
[ ][ ]  Select [Shutter Delay]
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
• When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Delay] is not available:
258
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
Image Stabilizer
≥ Image Stabilizer Settings: 262
This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens
image stabilizer.
It is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination
of the 2 image stabilizers.
Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
259
Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of April 2023)

Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached
lens.
Available image
Attached lens Example of icon
stabilizer
Panasonic lenses with image Body+Lens
stabilization function (Dual I.S.2)
Other manufacturers’ lenses
with image stabilization Body or Lens /
function
Lenses without image
Body
stabilizer function
Lenses without function to
communicate with this Body
camera
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 262) can be used
with any lenses.
260
 Using the Image Stabilizer

• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].
• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera,
after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens
information is displayed.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be
set to match the attached lens.
Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.
This can also be set using the menu. ([Lens Information]: 267)
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon [ ]
may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the Shutter
Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
• We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
• The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
• When the following function is being used, the image stabilizer function is not
available:
• When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this
camera, you can hide the message asking for confirmation of the lens
information that is displayed after turning on the camera:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 604)
• You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:
([I.S. Status Scope]: 593)
261
Image Stabilizer Settings

Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
Picture: [ ][ ]  Select [Image Stabilizer]

Video: [ ][ ]  Select [Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal,
panning). ([Operation Mode]: 264)
[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)]
[ ] ([Body]): The in-body image stabilizer corrects for vertical, horizontal, and
rotational shake.
[ ] ([Lens + Body (Roll)]): The in-lens image stabilizer corrects for vertical and
horizontal shake, while the in-body image stabilizer corrects for rotational shake.
• This can be set when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an image stabilization
function.
[When to Activate]
[ALWAYS]: The image stabilizer is always operating.
[HALF-SHUTTER]: The image stabilizer operates when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
Camera shake during video recording is corrected along the vertical, horizontal, roll,
pitch, and yaw axes through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic
image stabilizers. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
• The [ ] on the recording screen changes to [ ] while [E-Stabilization (Video)]
is functioning.
• The angle of view may become narrower if set to [ON].
262
[Boost I.S. (Video)]

Increases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to perform recording
from a fixed perspective. ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 265)
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording. ([Anamorphic
(Video)]: 266)
[Lens Information]
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera. ([Lens Information]: 267)
• When the following functions are being used, [When to Activate] is fixed to
[ALWAYS]:
–[ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording
• When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] mode
– [Live Cropping]
263
 [Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning (Auto)]
Automatically detects the panning direction, and corrects vertical and horizontal
camera shake.
This function is suitable for panning.
[Panning (Left/Right)]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[Panning (Up/Down)]
Corrects horizontal camera shake.
This is suitable for vertical panning.
[OFF]
Turns the image stabilization function OFF.
• Operation modes that can be used will differ depending on the used lenses and on
[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] settings.
• [Panning (Auto)] is not displayed when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an
image stabilization function with [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] set to [ ]. Set to
either [Panning (Left/Right)] or [Panning (Up/Down)] to suit the panning direction.
• When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].
• When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording
264
 [Boost I.S. (Video)]

Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to
perform recording from a fixed perspective.
• When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

• To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the
camera.
To set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 536)
• Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.
• When [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] is set to [ ], [Boost I.S. (Video)] is not

available.
265
 [Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
Settings:
[ ]([2.0×])/[ ]([1.8×])/[ ]([1.5×])/[ ]([1.33×])/[ ]([1.30×])/
[OFF]
• Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
• While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the
image stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [ ] and [ ].
• When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.

• When the following function is being used, [Anamorphic (Video)] is fixed to
[OFF]:
–[ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
• Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the image
stabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.
266
 [Lens Information]
Register the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the
camera.
Match the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you
register.
Press 34 to select the lens information to use and then press or

.
• In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of between
24 mm and 135 mm is registered.
The lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.
Registering, modifying, and deleting lens information

1 Press 34 to select the lens information and then press [DISP.].
• If lens information that has not been registered is selected, press or
to proceed to Step 3.
2 Press 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete] and then press or .
• You can change the display order of lens information by selecting [Sorting].
• The lens information is deleted when you select [Delete].
• You cannot delete the lens information for a lens that is being used.
3 Enter the lens Information.
• The lens information changes if the lens information has already been
registered.
4 (If lens information that has not been registered is selected) Press [DISP.] to
register the lens information.
267
[Focal Length]
Enter the focal length.
• The live view images can be enlarged for display when you rotate .
[I.S. Area]
You can set the range of stabilisation for the image stabiliser so that vignetting does
not occur due to the image stabiliser.
[70%]/[80%]/[90%]/[100%]
• Rotate to select the range of stabilisation, then press or to confirm.
• When the four edges are selected by pressing 3421, the in-body image stabiliser
works and you can see if there is any vignetting. If vignetting has occurred, set again
to a smaller range.
[Lens Name]
Register the lens.
• How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 101)
• Up to a maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
268
Metering / Exposure / ISO
Sensitivity
This chapter describes recording modes for determining exposure and ISO
sensitivity.
≥ [Metering Mode]: 270

≥ Program AE Mode: 272
≥ Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 276
≥ Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 279
≥ Manual Exposure Mode: 282
≥ Preview Mode: 287
≥ Exposure Compensation: 289
≥ Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293
≥ ISO Sensitivity: 295
269
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
[Metering Mode]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Metering Mode]
[ ] (Multi-metering)
Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured by judging the allocation of
brightness on the whole screen.
[ ] (Center-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the center of the screen.
[ ] (Spot)
Method used to measure the extremely small part around the spot-metering target (A).
• When you move the AF area, the spot metering target also moves to match.
(A)
270
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
[ ] (Highlight-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the highlighted parts of the
screen to prevent overexposure.
This is suitable for theatre photography, etc.
• The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:

([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 569)
• You can assign the function that records with the metering mode set to [ ]
(Spot) once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot Spot Metering]: 542)
271
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
Program AE Mode
≥ Program Shift: 274
In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1 Set the recording mode to [P].


≥This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the
recording screen.
272
• If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value (A) and shutter
speed (B) blink red.
60 F3.5
(B) (A)
3 Start recording.
273
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by
decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.

• This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
2 Rotate or while the values are displayed.

• This displays the Program Shift icon (C) on the recording screen.
30 F5.6
(C)
3 Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift

• Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
• Rotate or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
274
• Program Shift is not available when using the following function:

– Flash
• You can customize dial operations:

([Dial Set.]: 582)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 591)
275
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
Smaller aperture values

It becomes easier to defocus the background.
Larger aperture values

It becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.
276
1 Set the recording mode to [A].

2 Set the aperture value.

≥Rotate or .
F8.0
3 Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
277
 Depth of Field Characteristics

Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Shallow (narrow) Deep (wide)
Depth of field Example: When you want Example: When you want
(area in sharp focus) to take a image with a to take a image with focus
defocused background. as far as the background.
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
287)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A] mode
to check the depth of field while recording:
([Constant Preview]: 585)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.

([Dial Set.]: 582)
278
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Slower shutter speeds

It becomes easier to capture motion
Faster shutter speeds

It becomes easier to freeze motion
279
1 Set the recording mode to [S].

2 Set the shutter speed.

≥Rotate or .
250
3 Start recording.
280
recording screen.
287)
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 345)

([Dial Set.]: 582)
281
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
Manual Exposure Mode

≥ Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.): 285
≥ [B] (Bulb): 286
In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can record by manually setting
the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1 Set the recording mode to [M].

282
2 Set the aperture value and shutter speed.

≥Rotate to set the aperture value (A), and to set the shutter
speed (B).
30 F5.6
(B) (A)
3 Start recording.
283
 Manual Exposure Assist

When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
standard exposure (±0) measured by the camera.
• Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
284
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)

• [MECH.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000
• [EFC]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000
• [ELEC.]
[B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/8000
recording screen.
287)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to
constantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of the
subject while recording:
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when recording
using a flash. (Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes: 345)

([Dial Set.]: 582)
285
[B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the
shutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes)
The shutter closes when the shutter button is released.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
• We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2:

optional) during bulb recording.
• Bulb recording may create noticeable noise.
If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Exposure
NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 256) to [ON] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu
before recording.
• Bulb is not available when using the following functions:

– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])
– [Bracketing]
286
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
Preview Mode
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by

physically closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set
for actual recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Preview]. (Fn Buttons: 536)
Press the preview button.
• Each press of the button switches between the effect preview screens.
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect: OFF

Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: OFF

Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: ON
287
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
• It is possible to record in preview mode.

• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second.
• Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that
cannot be displayed.
• You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in
[A]/[M] mode:
• You can assign the function that enables you to view the aperture effect just
while the button is being pressed to an Fn button:
([Preview Aperture Effect]: 546)
288
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
Exposure Compensation
≥ [i.Dynamic Range]: 292
You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure

determined by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.
When recording videos, the range changes to ±3 EV.
1 Press [ ].
289
2 Compensate the exposure.

≥Rotate , , or .
+1
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

290
• In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to
[AUTO].
• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
• The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.
• The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:

([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 569)
• You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is
turned off:
([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 571)
• You can change the operation of the [ ] button:
([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 581)
• Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the exposure
compensation screen:
([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 581)
• You can assign the function that matches the aperture value and shutter speed
to the standard exposure to an Fn button:
([One Push AE]: 542)
291
[i.Dynamic Range]
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference

between the background and subject is great.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [i.Dynamic Range]
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording

conditions.
• When the following functions are being used, [i.Dynamic Range] is not available:
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full
Range] ([Photo Style])
292
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1 Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the

Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 536)
• These cannot be registered to [Fn3] to [Fn7].
[AE LOCK]
The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK]
The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
293
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
2 Lock focus and exposure.

≥Press and hold the Fn button.
≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon (A) will be displayed.
≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon (B) will be displayed.
(A)
AFL
AEL
(B)
3 Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and

then perform recording.
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
• You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 573)
• You can make fine manual adjustments to the focus during AF Lock:
([AF+MF]: 574)
294
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
ISO Sensitivity
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 300
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).

With the default settings, you can set 100 to 51200 in 1/3 EV increments.
This camera supports Dual Native ISO which enables recording at high
sensitivity with reduced noise by switching the base sensitivity.
The base sensitivity can also be fixed as necessary.
1 Press [ISO].
295
2 Select ISO sensitivity.

≥Rotate , , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [ISO].
AUTO 100 200 40

Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity

By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places
to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also
increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
296
 Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)

[AUTO]
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness.
• Taking picture: Maximum [6400]*1
• Video recording: Maximum [6400]*2
[100] to [51200]
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
• The available ISO sensitivity range changes according to the setting of [Dual Native
ISO Setting] in the [Photo]/[Video] ([Image Quality]) menu. ([Dual Native ISO
Setting]: 299)
• You can extend the ISO sensitivity range in between a lower limit of [50] and an
upper limit of [204800] by setting [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 568) to [ON] in
the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu.
*1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].
*2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– High Resolution mode: Up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [Filter Settings]: Up to an upper limit of [6400]
– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [200]
(The lower limit changes to [100] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [100]
– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [640], up to an
upper limit of [51200]
– [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit
of [400]
– [Live View Composite]: Down to a lower limit of [100], up to an upper limit of [3200]
297
• You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 300, [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 376)
• You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
([ISO Increments]: 568)
• The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:
([Extended ISO]: 568)
• You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
([Min. Shutter Speed]: 257)
• You can change the operation of the [ISO] button:
• You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:
([ISO Displayed Setting]: 581)
• You can change the units for sensitivity to dB when recording video:
([SS/Gain Operation]: 404)
298
[Dual Native ISO Setting]
You can set whether to switch the base sensitivity automatically or to fix it.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Dual Native ISO Setting]
[AUTO]
The base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.
• ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:
– [AUTO] / [100] to [51200]
– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [50] to [204800]
[LOW]
Sets the base sensitivity for low sensitivity.
– [AUTO] / [100] to [800]
[HIGH]
The base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.
– [AUTO] / [640] to [51200]
• [Dual Native ISO Setting] is fixed to [AUTO] in the following cases:

– [iA] mode
– High Resolution Mode (When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT])
– [Live View Composite] (When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT])
299
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
[ ][ ]  Select [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]

Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set in the range between [100] and [25600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]

Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].
• When the following function is being used, [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not
available:
300
White Balance / Image Quality
This chapter describes functions that enable you to record images how you
imagine them, such as white balance and Photo Style.
≥ White Balance (WB): 302

≥ [Photo Style]: 310
≥ [Filter Settings]: 323
≥ [LUT Library]: 329
≥ Lens Compensation: 332
301
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
White Balance (WB)

≥ Adjusting the White Balance: 308
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1 Press [WB].
302
2 Select the white balance.

≥Rotate , or .
≥Selection is also possible by pressing [WB].
WB AWB AWBc AWBw

303
 Setting Items (White Balance)

[AWB]
Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[ ]
Clear sky
[ ]
Cloudy sky
[ ]
Shade under a clear sky
[ ]
Incandescent light
[ ]*
Flash
[ 1
] to [ 4
]
Set mode 1 to 4 (Registering the White Set: 307)
[ 1 ] to [ 4 ]
Color temperatures 1 to 4 (Color Temperature Setting: 307)
* It operates as [AWB] during video recording.
304
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) (5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) [AWB] will work within this range.

(2) Blue sky
(3) Cloudy sky (Rain)
(4) Shade
(5) Sunlight
(6) White fluorescent light
(7) Incandescent light bulb
(8) Sunrise and sunset
(9) Candlelight
K=Kelvin Color Temperature
305
• Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ 1
] to [ 4
].
• The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
• It is possible to temporarily lock auto white balance:

([AWB Lock Setting]: 570)
• You can change the operation of the [WB] button:
306
 Registering the White Set

Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ 1

] to [ 4
].
2 Press 3.
3 Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center
of the screen and then press or .
• This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
 Color Temperature Setting

Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
1 Press [WB] and then select any value from [ 1 ] to [ 4 ].

2 Press 3.
• The color temperature setting screen is displayed.
3 Press 34 to select the color temperature and then press or .
• You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating ,
or . ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)):
245)
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].

• In [ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] in the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu is set to [ON], the kelvin values are displayed on the
recording screen.
307
Adjusting the White Balance

You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is
not produced by the selected white balance.
1 Press [WB].
2 Select the white balance and then press 4.
≥The adjustment screen is displayed.
3 Adjust the coloring.

2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
• You can also make adjustments in diagonal directions by using the joystick.
• You can also touch the graph to make adjustments.
• Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.
• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating , or .
([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 245)
G
A B
308

• When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M] side
will display [−].
309
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
[Photo Style]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
You can also apply the LUT file you have loaded in the camera and record
pictures and videos.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Photo Style]
[Standard]
The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality with higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with lower contrast.
[L.ClassicNeo]
A setting for a film-like effect that has a nostalgic, soft coloring.
310
[Flat]
A setting that produces a flatter image quality with lower saturation and contrast.
[Landscape]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
[Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic impression with enhanced highlights
and shadows.
[L.Monochrome S]
A setting for a monochrome effect with a gentle touch suited to portraits.
[Cinelike D2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve and gives priority
to the dynamic range.
• This function is suitable for video editing processes.
[Cinelike V2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve that gives priority
to the contrast.
311
[Like709]
A setting that minimizes overexposure by applying a gamma curve correction
equivalent to Rec.709 to perform compression (knee adjustment) of high-luminance
areas. (Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 374)
• Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high-definition broadcasting.
[V-Log]
A gamma curve setting intended for post-production processing. (Log Recording:
438)
• It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post-production editing.
[REAL TIME LUT]

A setting for recording images with a LUT file applied to the [V-Log] Photo Style.
• You can apply the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]:
329)
• [Vlog_709] is applied in the default setting.
•[ ] is displayed on the recording screen when a LUT file has not been applied.
Selecting the LUT file to apply
1 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
2 Press 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
3 Press the shutter button or video rec. button to start recording.
312
[Like2100(HLG)]*1
A setting used to record HLG format video. (HLG Videos: 443)
• [Luminance Level] is fixed to [64-940].
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]*1, 2

A setting used to record HLG format video. (HLG Videos: 443)
• [Luminance Level] is fixed to [0-1023].
[MY PHOTO STYLE 1]*2 to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]*2

Adjusts the image quality of Photo Style items to your preferred settings and registers
these as My Photo Style items. (Registering Settings in My Photo Style: 322)
• Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings.
Applying a LUT file
With image quality adjustments, you can apply a LUT file registered in [LUT Library].
([LUT Library]: 329)
• With My Photo Style, you can also apply LUT files to [Photo Style] other than
[V-Log].
When applying a LUT file created with image editing software, select the [Photo
Style] that is the same as the Photo Style used as the base when creating it.
When you select a different [Photo Style], the images may not be displayed or
recorded correctly.
•[ ] switches to [ ] when [LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality
adjustments.
*1 Can only be selected when in the [ ] mode and set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality].
([Rec Quality]: 135)
*2 You can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in
[Photo Style Settings]. ([Photo Style Settings]: 567)
313
• In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.

– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another
recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
• The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to
the following (Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity): 297):
– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/[Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/
[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
[Dual Native ISO Setting].
Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
• You can set the knee mode with [Like709]. (Recording While Controlling
Overexposure (Knee): 374)
• When [LUT] is set to [OFF] in the image quality adjustments of [REAL TIME
LUT], the [Photo Style] will operate the same as [V-Log].
• When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
• You can make detailed Photo Style settings:

([My Photo Style Settings]: 567)
314
 Adjusting Image Quality

1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
• Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
6WDQGDUG
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
-5 0 +5
3 Press or .
• When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation]
Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone]
Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
315
[Hue]
Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the hue toward violet/magenta or
yellow/green to adjust the coloring of the entire image.
[Filter Effect]
[Yellow]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak) Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium) Records the sky with a darker
blue.
[Red]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong) Records the sky with a much darker
blue.
[Green]: Skin and lips of people appear in natural tones. Green leaves appear brighter
and more enhanced.
[Off]
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/[Standard]/[High]: Sets the grain effect level.
[Off]
[Color Noise]
[On]: Adds color to the grain effect.
[Off]
S [Sharpness]
Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
• Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture resolution.
316
[Dual Native ISO Setting]*3

Sets the Dual Native ISO. ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
[Sensitivity]*3
Sets the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
[White Balance]*3
Sets the white balance. (White Balance (WB): 302)
• While [WB] is selected, press [ ] to display the white balance setting screen.
Press [ ] again to return to the original screen.
[LUT]
Applies the preset ([Vlog_709]) or the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library].
1 Select either [REAL TIME LUT] or one of [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] in [Photo Style].
2 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [ ].
3 Press 34 to select the LUT file to apply, then press or .
*3 Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] are selected:
[ ][ ]  [Photo Style Settings]  [My Photo Style Settings]  [Add
Effects]  [Sensitivity]/[White Balance]  [ON]
317
• The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
  
  
  
  
([Saturation])

([Color Tone])
  
 
*4
S      
     
*5 *5 *5 *5 *5 
*4 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].

*5 Can be set when [Photo Style] is My Photo Style.
318
• The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the
recording screen.
• [LUT] cannot be applied to RAW images. When [Picture Quality] is set to [RAW]
for recording, a LUT file can be applied only to the live view and thumbnail
displays in the playback screen.
• [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] are not available when using the following
function:
– Video recording
319
 Range Properties When Recording with a LUT File

Applied
The following table shows the range properties for videos recorded with
LUT files applied in Photo Style:
LUT file
[Photo Style] [Luminance Level] Range property
applied
[REAL TIME LUT]/ Fixed to [16-255]
[Vlog_709] Video range
when [V-Log] is ([64-1023])
selected in My Other than Fixed to [0-255]
Full range
Photo Style [Vlog_709] ([0-1023])
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
[Vlog_709] [16-235] ([64-940])/
When other than Video range
[16-255] ([64-1023])
[V-Log] is selected
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
in My Photo Style Other than
[16-235] ([64-940])/
[Vlog_709] Video range
[16-255] ([64-1023])
320
• When editing video with image editing software, we recommend using LUT files
for full range.
• When recording video with a LUT file applied with My Photo Style, we
recommend setting [Luminance Level] to [0-255] ([0-1023]).
• Use LUT files for full range when recording pictures.
If you record with a LUT file for video range applied, it may not be possible to
properly display or record the images.
• If there is a difference between the range property of the applied LUT file and the
range property of the video file, it may not be possible to generate the images
properly in the image editing software.
When loading the video files into the image editing software, select the correct
range setting for each video file.
• The results of recording images with LUT files applied with this camera and the
results of applying LUT files with image editing software will not match
completely.
321
 Registering Settings in My Photo Style
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.

2 Adjust the image quality.
• My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality
adjustment.
Select the base Photo Style.
3 Press [DISP.].
4 (When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)
Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press or .
5 Press 34 to select the registration destination number and then press or
.
• A confirmation screen will be displayed.
On the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.
Up to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 101)
 Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style

1 Select any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10].
2 Press [DISP.] and then set the item.
[Load Preset Setting]
[Save Current Setting]
[Edit Title]
[Restore to Default]
322
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
[Filter Settings]
≥ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 328
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).

You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
1 Set the [Filter Effect].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Filter Settings]  [Filter Effect] 
[SET]
323
2 Select the filter.

≥Press 34 to select, and then press or .
≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample
picture.
• Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display and guide
display.
The guide display shows the description of each filter.
1/3
324
 Adjusting the Filter Effect

You can adjust the filter effect.
1 Select the filter.

2 On the recording screen, press [WB].
3 Rotate , or to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [WB] again.
• When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [¢].
Filter Items that can be adjusted

[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
325
 Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
• The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item to set.
[ ]: Filter on/off
[ ]: Filter
[ ]: Filter effect adjustment
EXPS
EXPS
326
• White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [ ] (Forced
Flash Off).
• The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [6400].
• Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
• [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following function:
– [Live Cropping]
• When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
327
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  [Filter Settings]  Select

[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
• [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– Burst recording
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Bracketing]
328
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
[LUT Library]
Register LUT files to the camera to use with Photo Style and LUT View
Assist.
• The following LUT file can be used:

– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM
3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– The “.cube” format
• The “.cube” format LUT files are compatible with 2-point to 33-point 3D LUT.
• We recommend loading LUT files for full range onto the camera. If the range
property is different, the images may not be displayed or recorded correctly.
• The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on
the file system of the card.
(Use alphanumeric characters for the file name)
FAT32 (SD memory card/SDHC memory card): Up to 8 characters (excluding
extension).
exFAT (SDXC memory card): Up to 255 characters (including extension).
• Save the LUT file with a file extension of “.vlt” or “.cube” in the root directory of
the card (the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).
329
1 Insert a card on which a LUT file is saved into the

camera.
2 Select [LUT Library].
≥ [ ][ ]  [LUT Library]
3 Select the registration destination.

≥If you select a registered item, the LUT file will be registered by
overwriting.
4 Select [Load].
≥Press or .
≥The registered LUT file is deleted when you select [Delete].
330
5 Select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].

≥Press or .
6 Select the LUT file to load.

• [Vlog_709] is registered in the default setting.

• Up to 10 LUT files can be registered.
331
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
Lens Compensation
≥ [Vignetting Comp.]: 332
≥ [Color Shading Compensation]: 333
≥ [Diffraction Compensation]: 337
[Vignetting Comp.]
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics,

you can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Vignetting Comp.]

conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
332
[Color Shading Compensation]
Compensate for the coloring that occurs around the screen (color shading)
due to the characteristics of the lens.
 When using an L-Mount lens

The color shading is automatically compensated, but it is also possible to
make manual fine adjustments.
1 Select [Color Shading Compensation].
• [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Color Shading Compensation]
2 Adjust the red tint and blue tint.
• Press 34 to select [Red Tint]/[Blue Tint], then press 21 to adjust.
• You can also adjust by rotating , , or .
±0

• The adjusted value is not recorded.
333
 When Using Other Than an L-Mount Lens

You can compensate for the color shading for other than L-Mount lenses
and register the compensation details.
Select [Color Shading Compensation].

• [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Color Shading Compensation]
[MANUAL]
Compensate for the color shading of the attached lens.
1 Press 34 to select [MANUAL] and then press or .
2 Press [DISP.] to execute color shading compensation.
• Execute while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation,
such as a white or gray one.
• If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.
• The compensation value and adjusted value are not recorded. To record them,
press [DISP.] in the adjustment screen and make a preset registration.
[PRESET]
Compensate for the color shading of the attached lens and make a preset registration.
(Registering presets: 335)
You can also call up presets that have already been registered.
[OFF]
The color shading compensation is not applied.
[ADJUST]
Fine-adjust the red tint and blue tint.
• The adjusted value is not recorded.
• If a compensation value already registered in [PRESET] is adjusted, [¢] is displayed
next to [PRESET].
334
• When [Color Shading Compensation] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the

recording screen.
• If you adjust a compensation value already registered in [PRESET], [¢] is
displayed next to [ ].
• Compensation values and adjusted values that have not been registered as
presets are cleared when you do the following:
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Replacing the lens
Registering presets
You can register up to 12 sets of compensation settings.
1 Select [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].

• [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Color Shading Compensation]  [PRESET]
2 Select any of [SET1] to [SET12] and press or .
3 Select [Compensate/Adjust] and then press or .
4 Press [DISP.] while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation,
such as a white or gray one.
• Color shading compensation is executed. Press or .
• If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.
5 Select [Focal Length]/[Aperture] and then press or .
• Press 21 to select the item and then press 34 to enter the value.
6 Select [Note] and then press or .
• You can enter any information, such as a lens name, etc.
Up to 26 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
7 Press [DISP.] to register the compensation settings.
335
Changing and deleting presets

1 Select [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].
• [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Color Shading Compensation]  [PRESET]
2 Press 34 to select a registered preset, then press [DISP.].
3 Press 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete], and then press or .
• You can change the details in the registered preset when you select [Edit].
(Registering presets: 335)
• You can change the display order of the presets by selecting [Sorting].
• The preset is deleted when you select [Delete]. You cannot delete the preset
that is being used.
• If you execute [Compensate/Adjust] from [Edit], the compensation value and

adjusted value are reset and you can redo color shading compensation again.
• The information registered in [PRESET] is returned to the default settings when
setup and custom settings are reset.
336
[Diffraction Compensation]
The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness

caused by diffraction when the aperture is closed.
[ ]/[ ][ ]  Select [Diffraction Compensation]
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]

conditions.
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
337
Flash
If you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash.
Furthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash
recording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position
separate from the camera.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the Flash.
≥ Using an External Flash (Optional): 339

≥ Setting Flash: 342
≥ Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351
338
Flash – Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an External Flash (Optional)

≥ Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 340
• Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting.

• Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
339
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover

Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.
Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to
attach it.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction

indicated by arrow (2) while pressing it in the direction
indicated by arrow (1).
(1)
(2)
340
 Notes on Flash Recording
• Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to
deform or discolor.
• If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.
While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.
• When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only the
external flash. It may become detached.
• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with
reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the external flash for details.
341
Flash – Setting Flash
Setting Flash
≥ [Flash Mode]: 343
≥ [Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 346
≥ [Flash Adjust.]: 348
≥ [Flash Synchro]: 349
≥ [Auto Exposure Comp.]: 350
You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.
342
[Flash Mode]
Sets the flash mode.
[ ][ ]  Select [Flash Mode]
[ ] (Forced Flash On)/[ ] (Forced On/Red-Eye)

The flash fires every time regardless of the recording conditions.
This is suitable for recording when there is backlighting or under lighting such as
fluorescent lighting.
[ ] (Slow Sync.)/[ ] (Slow Sync./Red-Eye)

When recording images against a nightscape, this will slow the shutter speed when
the flash fires to make not only the subject but also the nightscape appear brighter.
• Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images. To avoid this, we recommend
using a tripod.
[ ] (Forced Flash Off)

The flash does not fire.
343
• The flash fires twice.

The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [ ] or [ ]
is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished.
•[ ] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the
external flash.
• The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject and
whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash is fired,
may not be very noticeable in some cases.
344
 Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode

The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
(: Available, —: Not available)
Recording
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
mode
[P]/[A]     
[S]/[M]   — — 
•[ ] and [ ] can be set in [iA] mode. In [ ], the flash mode switches to one
suited to the recording situation.
 Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes

[ ]/[ ]: 1/60 of a second*1 to 1/250 of a second*2
[ ]/[ ]: 1 second to 1/200 of a second
*1 In [S] mode, this will be 60 seconds and in [M] mode it will be [B] (Bulb).
*2 The maximum setting changes to 1/200 of a second in [P]/[A] modes.
• The guide number decreases when the shutter speed is set to 1/250 of a second.
345
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]

You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
• The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other
manufacturers are attached.
Set on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) is attached.
1 Set the [Firing Mode].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Firing Mode]
[TTL]
Sets flash output to be set automatically by the camera.
[MANUAL]
Sets the flash output manually.
• With [TTL], you can record the images you want even when recording dark
scenes where the flash output tends to become greater.
• The flash output ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
346
2 (When set to [MANUAL]) Select [Manual Flash Adjust.]

and then press or .
3 Press 21 to set the flash output and then press or
.
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
347
[Flash Adjust.]
You can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL
output mode.
1 Select [Flash Adjust.].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Flash Adjust.]
2 Press 21 to adjust the flash output and then press

or .
• It can be adjusted within the range of [−3 EV] to [+3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

• For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a wireless
flash ([Flash Adjust.]: 355)
• [Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
348
[Flash Synchro]
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,
a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a
trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately
before the shutter closes.
[ ][ ]  Select [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
This is the normal method for recording with the Flash.
[2ND]
The light source appears behind the subject and the picture becomes dynamic.
• When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.
• When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [1ST]:
– [Wireless]
• The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.
349
[Auto Exposure Comp.]

Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure
compensation value. (Exposure Compensation: 289)
[ ][ ]  Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]
350
Flash – Recording Using a Wireless Flash
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:

optional) to record using a wireless flash.
You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
351
 Placing a Wireless Flash

Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Placement example
When (C) is placed to erase the shadow in the background of the subject that the flash
groups (A) and (B) will create
(C)
(A)
(B)
Placement range
When DMW-FL360L is attached
(E)
30°
(D)
30° (E)
50°
50°
(D)
(D) 5 m (16 feet)

(E) 7 m (23 feet)
352
• The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera held
horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding environment.
• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
• If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lowering
the output with a diffuser or similar device. ([Communication Light]: 357)
1 Attach an external flash to the camera. (Removing the

Hot Shoe Cover: 340)
2 Set the wireless flashes to [RC] mode and then place

them.
• Set the channel and group for the wireless flashes.
353
3 Enable the wireless flash function of the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Wireless]  [ON]
4 Set [Wireless Channel].

• Select the same channel as on the wireless flash side.
5 Set [Wireless Setup].

• Set the firing mode and flash output.
• When [Wireless] is set, [WL] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
354
 Setting Items ([Wireless Setup])

• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the

flash output.
[AUTO]*2: Sets the flash output on the
external flash side.
[Firing Mode]
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
external flash manually.
[External [OFF]: The external flash outputs only
Flash]*1 communication light.
Adjusts the flash output of the external flash
[Flash Adjust.]
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
Sets the flash output of the external flash
[Manual Flash when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
Adjust.] • It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
355
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the

flash output.
[AUTO]*1: Sets the flash output on the
wireless flash side.
[Firing Mode]
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the
wireless flash manually.
[A Group]/
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified
[B Group]/
group will not fire.
[C Group]
Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash
[Flash Adjust.]
manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
Sets the flash output of the wireless flash
[Manual Flash when [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
Adjust.] • It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
*1 This cannot be selected when [Wireless FP] is set.

*2 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).
356
 [Wireless FP]
The external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the
flash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even
at fast shutter speeds.
[ ][ ]  Select [Wireless FP]
 [Communication Light]
Set the strength of communication light.
[ ][ ]  Select [Communication Light]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
357
Video Settings
This chapter describes recording modes especially for videos, such as the
Creative Video mode and the Slow & Quick mode, and settings available
when recording videos.
≥ Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 359

≥ Using AF (Video): 367
≥ Video Brightness and Coloring: 372
≥ Audio Settings: 377
≥ External Microphones (Optional): 386
≥ XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 391
≥ Headphones: 394
≥ Time Code: 398
≥ Main Assist Functions: 402
358
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
Recording Modes Specifically for Video

(Creative Video/S&Q)
≥ Displays Suited to Video Recording: 360
≥ Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 361
≥ Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 365
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
In the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video
recording with the shutter button.
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Settings such as exposure and white balance can be changed
independent of picture taking settings.
359
Displays Suited to Video Recording

In the recording screen, the following parts switch to displays suited to
video recording.
(1) (2) (3)
MP4 4K 420/8-L 29.97p FULL AFS
60 F3.5 ±0 100 24m59s

(4)
(1) Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 133)

(2) Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 135)/Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick
Video: 419)
(3) Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
(4) Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 813)
• Examples of displays at the time of purchase.

For information about the icons other than those described here (Monitor/
Viewfinder Displays: 753)
• Even in the [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode, you can
switch to the display suited to video recording:
([Video-Priority Display]: 599)
360
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos

1 Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
2 Set the exposure mode.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Exposure Mode]  [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
• You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
3 Close the menu.

4 Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).
(A)
(B)
5 Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button again.
361
• For information about recording slow motion video and quick motion video
(Slow & Quick Video: 419)
• You can disable the recording start/stop operations using the shutter button:
([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 577)
• You can assign the function that starts/ends video recording only in the [ ]
mode to an Fn button:
([Video Record(Creative Video)]: 545)
362
 Operations During Video Recording

Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.

1 Touch [ ] or [ ].
2 Touch an icon.
F Aperture value
SS Shutter speed
Exposure compensation
ISO GAIN ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB)

Sound recording level adjustment
([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 381)
• This setting is available only in [ ] mode.
Slow & Quick setting

(Slow & Quick Video: 419)
• This setting is available only in [S&Q] mode. (The setting cannot be changed
during recording)
363
3 Drag the slide bar to set the item.

[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
• If you touch icon (C), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.
(C)
364
Separating Settings for Recording Video and

Pictures
In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed

in [ ]/[S&Q] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/
[M] modes.
From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings
for video recording and for picture recording.
[ ][ ]  Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]/[White Balance]/[Photo Style]/[Metering Mode]/[AF

Mode]
[ ]: The recording settings are linked across recording modes.
[ ]: Recording settings can be separated by the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and the [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] mode.
365
• The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically,
so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made
with this function.
366
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
Using AF (Video)
≥ [Continuous AF]: 367
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 369
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 370
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
[ ][ ]  Select [Continuous AF]
[MODE1]
The camera continues to automatically focus only during recording.
[MODE2]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and
during recording.
• This is available in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
[OFF]
The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
367
• In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording
standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous
AF] set to [OFF].
• If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to
come into focus.
• [MODE1] switches to [MODE2] when outputting via HDMI in the [ ]/[S&Q]
mode.
• When set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster.
368
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
[ ][ ]  Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Enables the following settings.

[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[AF Speed]
[−] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[+] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera
[SET]
immediately readjusts the focus.
[AF Sensitivity]
[−] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera waits for a
little before readjusting the focus.
• A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
369
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
When the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ], or when recording with MF, the

focus point can be enlarged for display.
(When the AF mode is [ ] or [ ], the center of the screen is enlarged
for display.)
The focus point can also be enlarged for checking when recording videos.
1 Register [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] to the Fn

button. (Fn Buttons: 536)
2 Enlarge display of the focus point.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step . 1
• The operations on the enlarged display screen are the same as the MF Assist
screen operations. (Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 197)
370
• Depending on the lens used, the video enlarged display of live view screen may
not be displayed.
• During video recording using the following functions, the video enlarged display
of live view screen cannot be displayed:
60.00p
– [Live Cropping]
• You can change the display method of the enlarged display screen:
([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 578)
• You can set whether to output the enlarged display to an external device
connected via HDMI:
(Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 472)
371
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
Video Brightness and Coloring

≥ [Luminance Level]: 372
≥ [Master Pedestal Level]: 373
≥ Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 374
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 376
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255],
which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
[ ][ ]  Select [Luminance Level]
Settings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
• When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023], [64-940],
and [64-1023].
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], this is fixed to [0-255]
([0-1023]).
However, even if [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT] or Photo Style is set to
[V-Log] in My Photo Style, if the [Vlog_709] LUT file has been applied, this is
fixed to [16-255] ([64-1023]).
• When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG)], this is fixed to [64-940].
• When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG) Full Range], this is fixed to [0-1023].
372
[Master Pedestal Level]
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.

2 Select [Master Pedestal Level].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Master Pedestal Level]
3 Adjust master pedestal.

≥Rotate , or .
• Set in the range between −15 and +15.
+4
MPL -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
• [Master Pedestal Level] is not available when using the following function:
– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])
373
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that
recording can be performed with minimal overexposure.
1 Set [Photo Style] to [Like709].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Photo Style]  [Like709]
2 Press [Q].
3 Select a knee setting.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
$872
374
[AUTO]
Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically.
[MANUAL]
You can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and
the intensity of compression (knee master slope).
Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
[POINT]: Master knee point
[SLOPE]: Master knee slope
• Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and to adjust the knee
master slope.
• Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Master knee point: 80.0 to 107.0
– Master knee slope: 0 to 99
[Off]

≥Press or .
375
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].

2 Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)].

≥ [ ][ ]  [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
 Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])

[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set in the range between [100] and [25600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]

Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].
376
Video Settings – Audio Settings
Audio Settings
≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 378
≥ [Mute Sound Input]: 379
≥ [Sound Rec Gain Level]: 380
≥ [Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 381
≥ [Sound Rec Quality]: 382
≥ [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 383
≥ [Wind Noise Canceller]: 384
≥ [Audio Information]: 385
377
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[ON] Sound recording level displayed on the recording screen.

[OFF] —
Sets the display size of sound recording level.
[SET] [Displaying
[LARGE]/[SMALL]
Size]
• When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed
to [ON].
378
[Mute Sound Input]

This mutes audio input.
[ ][ ]  Select [Mute Sound Input]
379
[Sound Rec Gain Level]

This switches the gain of audio input.
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Rec Gain Level]
[STANDARD]
This is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB)
[LOW]
Audio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud noises. (−12 dB)
• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording gain of CH3/CH4 can be
adjusted. ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
• [Sound Rec Gain Level] is not available when [Mic Socket] is set to [ ] and
an external audio device is connected.
380
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

Manually adjust the sound recording level.
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]

• Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press or .
Settings: [MUTE]/[−18dB] to [+12dB]
• You can adjust by 1 dB increments.

• This can also be set during video recording.
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
• When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], the sound recording level of CH3/CH4 can
be adjusted. ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
381
[Sound Rec Quality]

Sound quality for video can be set when the [Rec. File Format] is [MOV] or
[Apple ProRes].
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Rec Quality]
[96kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 96kHz/24bit high resolution audio.
• This can be set when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo
Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10:
optional) is connected. (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 391, External
Microphones (Optional): 386)
[48kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 48kHz/24bit high quality audio.
• The setting is fixed to [48kHz/16bit] in the following case:

– When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MP4]
382
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]

The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound
distortion (crackling noise).
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Rec Level Limiter]
383
[Wind Noise Canceller]

This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while
maintaining sound quality.
[ ][ ]  Select [Wind Noise Canceller]
[HIGH]
This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-pitched sound when a
strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]
This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering out only wind noise.
[OFF]
Turns the function off.
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
(Reduction of Wind Noise: 390)
384
[Audio Information]
This screen enables you to view audio settings and the status of recording
all at once.
You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
• The operations on the audio information display screen are the same as the control
panel operations. (Control Panel: 92)
1 Register [Audio Information] to the Fn button. (Fn

Buttons: 536)
2 Display the audio information.
• You can also display it by touching the audio display area on the control panel
(Creative Video mode/Slow & Quick mode).
• For information about the screen (Audio Information Display: 767)
385
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
External Microphones (Optional)

≥ Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 389
≥ Reduction of Wind Noise: 390
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo

Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality high
resolution audio compared to the built-in microphone.
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
1 Set the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be

connected.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Mic Socket]
386
([Mic Input (Plug-in Power)])

When connecting an external microphone that requires a power supply from the
camera [MIC] socket.
([Mic Input])
When connecting an external microphone that does not require a power supply
from the camera [MIC] socket.
([Line Input])
When connecting an external audio device for line output.
• The setting will be fixed to [ ] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone

(DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.
• When using [ ], if you connect an external microphone that does not
require power supply, the connected external microphone may malfunction.
Check the device before connecting.
387
3 Connect the external microphone to the camera and

then turn on the camera.
• If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe (A), remove the
hot shoe cover. (Removing the Hot Shoe Cover: 340)
(A)
4 Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be

recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]:
382).
• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or
more.
• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding
the external microphone. It may become detached.
• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
388
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:

Optional)
When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you
can set the microphone sound pickup range.
[ ][ ]  Select [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Picks up sound over a wide area.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific
direction.
389
Reduction of Wind Noise

This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
[ ][ ]  Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
390
Video Settings – XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)

≥ [4ch Mic Input]: 393
By attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), you can

use a commercially available XLR microphone to enable the recording of
superior-quality high-res audio and 4-channel audio. ([4ch Mic Input]:
393)
(A)
(B)
(A) Hot shoe

(B) Commercially available XLR microphone
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover. (Removing the Hot Shoe
Cover: 340)
391
1 Attach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe,

and then turn on the camera.
≥ [ ][ ]  [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
automatically turns [ON].
[ON]
Records audio using the XLR microphone.
[OFF]
Records audio using the built-in microphone of the camera.
2 Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be

recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]:
382).
• While an XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

• When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF], the
following settings are fixed:
– [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: [OFF]
– [Wind Noise Canceller]: [OFF]
– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]
• When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON] and [4ch Mic Input] is [OFF],
[Sound Rec Gain Level] and [Sound Rec Level Adj.] are not available.
• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
• When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, do not carry the camera by
holding the XLR Microphone Adaptor. It may become detached.
• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the XLR Microphone Adaptor.
392
[4ch Mic Input]

To record 4-channel audio, use a commercially available XLR microphone
connected to an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) together
with the built-in microphone.
By combining a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or a
Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) instead of using the built-in
microphone, it is also possible to record 4-channel 96 kHz/24-bit
high-resolution audio. (External Microphones (Optional): 386)
[ ][ ]  Select [4ch Mic Input]
• When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [ON], it is displayed as [4ch] on the screen.
• The audio from the XLR microphone is recorded to CH1/CH2, and the audio from
the built-in microphone or external microphone is recorded to CH3/CH4.
• 4-channel audio is output to external devices connected via HDMI when [4ch Mic
Input] is set to [ON].
• This cannot be set when [Rec. File Format] is [MP4].
• This cannot be set when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is [OFF].
393
Video Settings – Headphones
Headphones
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396
You can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting

commercially available headphones to the camera.
• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
• When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter
sounds are muted.
394
 Switching the Sound Output Method

[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Output]
[REALTIME]
Audio without time lag.
It may differ from the sound recorded in videos.
[REC SOUND]
Audio to be recorded in videos.
Output sound may be delayed from actual sound.
• The setting is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following case:

– When using an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)
(When [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF])
 Adjusting the Headphone Volume

Connect the headphones and rotate .
: Reduces the volume.
: Increases the volume.
To adjust the volume using the menu:

1 Select [Headphone Volume].
• [ ][ ]  [Headphone Volume]
2 Press 34 to adjust the headphone volume and then press or .
• It can be adjusted in a range of [0] to [LEVEL15].
395
[Sound Monitoring Channel]

You can set the audio channel output to the headphones when recording.
For information about the audio channel settings during playback
([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 618)
[ ][ ]  Select [Sound Monitoring Channel]
[CH1/CH2]
Outputs CH1 (L)/CH2 (R).
[CH3/CH4]
Outputs CH3 (L)/CH4 (R).
[CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4]
Outputs CH1+CH2 (L)/CH3+CH4 (R).
[CH1]
Outputs CH1.
[CH2]
Outputs CH2.
[CH3]
Outputs CH3.
[CH4]
Outputs CH4.
[CH1+CH2]
Outputs a mix of CH1 and CH2.
[CH3+CH4]
Outputs a mix of CH3 and CH4.
[CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]
Outputs a mix of CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4.
396
• This can also be set during video recording.
397
Video Settings – Time Code
Time Code
≥ Setting the Time Code: 399
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], the time code
is automatically recorded during video recording. If [MP4], the time code is
not recorded.
398
Setting the Time Code

Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
1 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]  [MOV]/[Apple
ProRes]
2 Select [Time Code].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Time Code]
[Time Code Display]

Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
• During video recording using the following function, the time code count
cannot be displayed on the recording screen:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
• While you are using the following functions, the time code count cannot be
displayed on the recording screen:
– HDMI output
– Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone
– Tethered recording
[Count Up]
[REC RUN]: Counts the time code only when recording videos.
[FREE RUN]: Counts the time code also when video recording is stopped and
when the camera is turned off.
• When the following function is being used, [Count Up] is fixed to [REC RUN]:
– [S&Q] mode
399
[Time Code Value]

[Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)
[Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.
[Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame
to 00.
[Time Code Mode]

[DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time
and time code.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.
• Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)
• When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode] is fixed to
[NDF]:
– [50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] ([Synchro Scan])
– 47.95p or 23.98p [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time Code Output]

Time code information is added to images output via HDMI when recording with
the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
• The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode dial to
[ ]/[S&Q] during playback. In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, set [Output
Resolution(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] to [AUTO]. ([Output
Resolution(Playback)]: 621)
• The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.
400
• When using the following functions, updating of the information display on the
screen may get slower due to the load being placed on the internal processing in
the camera, but this is not a malfunction and there will be no change to the
images recorded:
60.00p
– HDMI output
– [Streaming]
401
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
Main Assist Functions

≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 403
≥ [SS/Gain Operation]: 404
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope]: 406
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter]: 410
≥ [Zebra Pattern]: 412
≥ [Frame Marker]: 414
≥ Color Bars/Test Tone: 416
• The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions
such as the center marker and safety zone marker:
([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 596)
402
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video.
[ ][ ]  Select [Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]
[OFF]
• This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON]. ([Auto Exposure in
P/A/S/M]: 571)
403
[SS/Gain Operation]
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity)
values.
[ ][ ]  Select [SS/Gain Operation]
[SEC/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.
[ANGLE/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.
• The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 358°.
(when [Synchro Scan] is set to [OFF])
[SEC/dB]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.
• 0 dB corresponds to either of the following ISO sensitivity values.
– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [AUTO] or [LOW]: [100]
– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [HIGH]: [640]
404
• When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown

below:
– [Dual Native ISO Setting]  [Dual Native Gain Setting]
– [ISO Sensitivity (video)]  [Gain Setting]
– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]  [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]
– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]  [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]
– [Extended ISO]  [Extended Gain Setting]
– [ISO Displayed Setting]  [Gain Displayed Setting]
 Setting Range for Gain (Sensitivity)

When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], gain (sensitivity) can be set
in the following ranges.
[Dual Native Gain [Extended Gain Setting Range for Gain

Setting] Setting] (Sensitivity)
[OFF] [AUTO], [0dB] to [+54dB]
[AUTO]
[ON] [AUTO], [−6dB] to [+66dB]
[LOW]
[HIGH]
405
[WFM/Vector Scope]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording
screen. You can change the size of the waveform display.

2 Set [WFM/Vector Scope].

≥ [ ][ ]  [WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE]
Displays a waveform.
[VECTOR]
Displays the vector scope.
[OFF]
406
3 Select the position to display.

≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .
• Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.

• You can also move using touch operations.
• You can rotate to change the size of the waveform.
• To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press
[DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the
default setting.
407
 Screen Displays
Waveform
• The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on
the conversions below:
0 % (IRE*): Luminance value 16 (8 bit)
100 % (IRE*): Luminance value 235 (8 bit)
* IRE: Institute of Radio Engineers
(A)
(B)
(F) (C)
(D)
(E)
(A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line)

(B) 100 % (IRE)
(C) 50 % (IRE)
(D) 0 % (IRE)
(E) −4 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.
Display example)
408
Vector scope
(G) (J)
(H) (K)
(I) (L)
(G) R (Red)
(H) YL (Yellow)
(I) G (Green)
(J) MG (Magenta)
(K) B (Blue)
(L) CY (Cyan)
Display example)
• When you assign the function to an Fn button, you can switch between
displaying and hiding these during recording of video. (Fn Buttons: 536)
• You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.
• The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.
409
[Luminance Spot Meter]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small
area.
1 Set [Luminance Spot Meter].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Luminance Spot Meter]  [ON]
2 Select the position where you want to measure the

luminance.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press or .

• You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording
screen.
• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
65%
(M)
(M) Luminance value
410
 Measurement Range
Measuring is possible in the range −7 % to 109 % (IRE).
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], this can be measured with
“Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
411
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
You can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the
stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you
specify.
[ZEBRA1]
[ZEBRA2]
[ZEBRA1+2]
412
[ ][ ]  Select [Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA1]
[ZEBRA1] stripes.
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA2]
[ZEBRA2] stripes.
[ZEBRA1+2] Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.
[OFF] —
Sets the base brightness.
[SET] [Zebra 1] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
[Zebra 2] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
 When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]

Centered on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness
in the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.
≥ [Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).
≥ [Range] can be set in the range between ±1 % and ±10 % (IRE).
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT], these are set at “Stop” units.
• [ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].
413
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This
allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved
with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
[ ][ ]  Select [Frame Marker]
[ON] Displays the Video Frame Marker on the recording screen.

[OFF] —
Sets the aspect ratio of the Video Frame
Marker.
[Frame Aspect]
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/
[4:3]/[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]/[CUSTOM]
[SET]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the Video Frame Marker.
Sets the opacity of the outside of the Video
[Frame Mask] Frame Marker.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
414
 When [CUSTOM] Is Selected with [Frame Aspect] in [SET]

You can freely set the aspect ratio of the frame.
≥ Press 3421 to move the center position.

• You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen.
≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ ].
• You can also pinch out/pinch in the frame to change the size.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
13%
13%
(N) (O)
(N) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)

(O) Height and width of the frame
• The aspect ratio can be set in the range between 1 % to 100 %.

• The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
415
Color Bars/Test Tone
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.

A test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed.
[ ][ ]  Select [Color Bars]
Settings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]
• To end the display, press .
[SMPTE]
[EBU]
[ARIB]
416
 Adjusting the Test Tone

There are 4 levels ([−12dB], [−18dB], [−20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone to
select.
Rotate , or to select the test tone level.
• The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is
started while the color bars are being displayed.
• The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor or viewfinder
may differ from those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
417
Special Video Recording
This chapter describes advanced video recording applications such as
slow motion/quick motion video and Log recording.
≥ Slow & Quick Video: 419

≥ High Frame Rate Video: 426
≥ [Focus Transition]: 428
≥ [Live Cropping]: 433
≥ Log Recording: 438
≥ HLG Videos: 443
≥ Anamorphic Recording: 447
≥ [Synchro Scan]: 451
≥ [Loop Recording (video)]: 453
≥ [Segmented File Recording]: 455
≥ List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
456
418
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
Slow & Quick Video
In the [S&Q] mode, the camera records at a different frame rate to the
recording frame rate, enabling the creation of slow motion video and quick
motion video in the MOV format.
Slow Motion Video (Overcrank Recording)

Set a number of frames that is higher than the recording frame rate of the [Rec
Quality].
For example: When recording at 60 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is halved.
Quick Motion Video (Undercrank Recording)

Set a number of frames that is lower than the recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 15 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is doubled.
• Slow & Quick video with a recording quality with the ALL-Intra image
compression system cannot be recorded to SD cards. You will need a
419
1 Set the recording mode to [S&Q].

• [Rec. File Format] changes to [MOV].
2 Select a recording quality with which you can record

Slow & Quick video.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• Items available for recording with Slow & Quick video are indicated as [S&Q
available].
• Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video ( List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 456)
420
3 Set the frame rate.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Slow & Quick Setting]
≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
• You can set a frame rate in the following ranges:

– C4K/4K video: 1 fps to 60 fps
– FHD video: 1 fps to 180 fps
421
 Frame Rate Combinations and Playback Speeds

Frame
C4K/29.97p C4K/23.98p
rate FHD/59.94p FHD/29.97p FHD/23.98p
4K/29.97p 4K/23.98p
1 fps 30× Quick 24× Quick 60× Quick 30× Quick 24× Quick
2 fps 15× Quick 12× Quick 30× Quick 15× Quick 12× Quick
5 fps 6× Quick 4.8× Quick 12× Quick 6× Quick 4.8× Quick
30 fps 1× Normal 1.25× Slow 2× Quick 1× Normal 1.25× Slow
60 fps 2× Slow 2.5× Slow 1× Normal 2× Slow 2.5× Slow
100 fps 1.67× Slow 3.33× Slow 4.17× Slow
120 fps 2× Slow 4× Slow 5× Slow
150 fps 2.5× Slow 5× Slow 6.25× Slow
180 fps 3× Slow 6× Slow 7.5× Slow
422

Frame
C4K/25.00p
rate FHD/50.00p FHD/25.00p
4K/25.00p
1 fps 25× Quick 50× Quick 25× Quick
2 fps 12.5× Quick 25× Quick 12.5× Quick
5 fps 5× Quick 10× Quick 5× Quick
10 fps 2.5× Quick 5× Quick 2.5× Quick
15 fps 1.67× Quick 3.33× Quick 1.67× Quick
30 fps 1.2× Slow 1.67× Quick 1.2× Slow
60 fps 2.4× Slow 1.2× Slow 2.4× Slow
100 fps 2× Slow 4× Slow
120 fps 2.4× Slow 4.8× Slow
150 fps 3× Slow 6× Slow
423

Frame
C4K/24.00p
rate FHD/24.00p
4K/24.00p
1 fps 24× Quick 24× Quick
2 fps 12× Quick 12× Quick
5 fps 4.8× Quick 4.8× Quick
30 fps 1.25× Slow 1.25× Slow
100 fps 4.17× Slow
120 fps 5× Slow
150 fps 6.25× Slow
180 fps 7.5× Slow
424
 Shutter Speeds When Recording Slow & Quick Video

When recording Slow & Quick video, the minimum shutter speed changes
depending on the frame rate of [Slow & Quick Setting].
Minimum shutter speed

Frame rate
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
1 fps 1 second
2 fps 1/2 of a second
1/30 of a second
60 fps 1/60 of a second 1/60 of a second
• Audio will not be recorded during Slow & Quick recording.

• When the resolution is set to C4K/4K [Rec Quality], [Image Area of Video] is fixed
to [APS-C].
• When the resolution is set to FHD [Rec Quality], [PIXEL/PIXEL] in [Image Area of
Video] cannot be selected.
• The mode switches to MF when you set to a frame rate of 150 fps or more.
(The camera automatically focuses when [AF ON] is pressed, but only before
starting recording.)
• The angle of view is reduced when you set the frame rate to 180 fps.
425
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
High Frame Rate Video
[MOV] video with high frame rates can be recorded to cards. By converting
it with the compatible software, it is possible to produce slow motion video.
Audio recording, not possible in the Slow & Quick mode, also becomes
possible.
1 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]  [MOV]
2 Select a recording quality for high frame rate video.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:

of 60.00p
• By filtering the [Rec Quality] by the frame rate, you can display just those
recording qualities that match the frame rate conditions. ([Filtering]: 146)
• Recording Qualities for High Frame Rate Video (List of Recording Qualities
That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 456)
426
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
 Shutter Speeds When Recording High Frame Rate Video

When recording high frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed
changes depending on the recording frame rate of the video.
Minimum shutter speed

Recording frame rate of the video
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
47.95p 1/30 of a second
1/2 of a second*
* Can be set in [M] mode ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is set to [OFF]) or [ ] mode
([Exposure Mode] is set to [M])
• When outputting via HDMI, the resolution and frame rate may be
down-converted for output.
427
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
[Focus Transition]
Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a

position registered in advance.
1 Set the recording mode to [ ].

2 Select [Focus Transition].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Focus Transition]
• If the [Please set the focus position.] message is displayed, press either
or .
428
3 Set focus positions.

≥Check the focus using the same procedure as MF (Record
Using MF: 195), and then press [WB], [ISO], and [ ] to set focus
positions.
≥You can also touch [POS1] to [POS3] to set focus positions.
POS1
POS2 1 2 3
POS3 (m)∞10 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
4 Register the focus positions.

≥Press or to register the focus positions.
5 Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
• The advanced setting screen is displayed when you press [DISP.] before
recording. (Setting Items ([Focus Transition]): 431)
• If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus Transition will start when
you start recording a video.
429
6 Start Focus Transition.

≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press or .
• When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time
has elapsed.
1
(m)∞10 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1 1 2 3
(A) (B)
(A) Current focus position

(B) Registered focus position
7 End Focus Transition.

≥Press [Q].
8 Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button once again.
430
 Setting Items ([Focus Transition])

[Focus Position Setting]
Registers focus positions.
[Focus Transition Speed]

Sets the moving speed of focus.
• Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)
[Focus Transition Rec]

Starts Focus Transition when recording starts.
• Select the position registered with [Focus Position Setting].
[Focus Transition Wait]

Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
• The recording screen is displayed when you press [ ].
431
• Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting focus positions.
• The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.
• The moving speed of focus slows as it approaches the closest focusing distance
of the lens or infinity.
• While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than
one of the registered focus positions.
• Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Zoom operation
– Switching the focus mode
– Switching the recording mode
– Replacing the lens
• When the following function is being used, [Focus Transition] is not available:
– [Live Cropping]
• [Focus Transition] cannot be used when using an interchangeable lens that does
not support the focus mode [AFC].
432
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
[Live Cropping]
By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view, it
is possible to record 4K/FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming
with the camera staying in a fixed position.
Pan
Zoom in
433
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MP4] or [MOV].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]  [MP4]/[MOV]

[Live Cropping] video.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• A recording quality with which you can record [Live Cropping] video ( List of
4 Set the time for panning or zooming.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Live Cropping]  [40SEC]/[20SEC]
• If you have selected a recording quality where Live Cropping recording is not
available, the camera switches to a recording quality where recording is
possible.
434
5 Set the cropping start frame.

≥Select the range to be cropped and press or .
(A)
(A) Cropping start frame
6 Set the cropping end frame.

≥Select the range to be cropped and press or .
• To redo the settings for the position and size of the start frame and the end
frame, press 2.
(B)
(B) Cropping end frame
435
7 Start Live Cropping recording.

≥Press the video rec. button.
• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the video rec. button again.
(C)
7s 20s
(D)
(C) Elapsed recording time

(D) Set operating time
436
 Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame

Button Touch
operation operation
3421 Touch Moves the frame.
Pinch out/
/ Enlarges/reduces the frame in small steps.
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the frame.
Start frame: Returns the frame position and size
to the default settings.
[DISP.] [Reset]
End frame: Cancels the settings for the position
and size of the frame.
/ [Set] Confirms the frame position and size.
• The AF mode switches to [ ] and automatic detection (face/eye detection)

starts working. (You cannot specify the face or eye to bring into focus)
• Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping frame.
To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus mode to
[MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (multi-metering).
• [Image Area of Video] is fixed to [FULL]. However, the setting is fixed to [APS-C]
in the following case:
– When a 59.94p or 50.00p [Rec Quality] is set
• A 4K [Rec Quality] cannot be set when using an APS-C lens.
437
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
Log Recording
≥ [V-Log View Assist]: 442
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording.

Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production
processing.
[ ][ ]  [Photo Style]  Select [V-Log]

9/RJ
• Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).

You can download LUT file from the following support site:
(English only)
438
 ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log] Is Set

The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is
set: [320]), and the upper limit is [51200].
• The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
• Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
439
 Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set

The [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard
exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE
42 %.
（10 bit code value）

1024
960
896
832
768
704
640
576
(2)
512
448
384 (1)
320
256
192
128
64
0
-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
（Stop）
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]

Reflectance ratio 10 bit code 12 bit code
IRE (%) Stop
(%) value value
0 7.3 — 128 512
(1) 18 42 0.0 433 1732
(2) 90 61 2.3 602 2408
• When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 %

to “0 Stop”.
440
• Luminance can be checked by “Stop” units:

([Luminance Spot Meter]: 410, [Zebra Pattern]: 412)
441
[V-Log View Assist]

When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. Using [V-Log View Assist] means you can
show images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output
them via HDMI.
[ ][ ]  Select [V-Log View Assist]
[LUT Select]
Selects the LUT file to apply from a preset ([Vlog_709]) or LUT files registered in [LUT
Library]. ([LUT Library]: 329)
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]

Displays the images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]

Applies LUT file to images output over HDMI.
• When applying the LUT file, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.
• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)]/[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] are not available when
[LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality adjustments.
442
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
HLG Videos
≥ [HLG View Assist]: 446
Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can
record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas
where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you
can see with your naked eye.
You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices
(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on
supporting devices.
• “HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR
format.
443


HLG video.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available].
• Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (List of
3 Set [Photo Style] to [Like2100(HLG)] or [Like2100(HLG)

Full Range].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Photo Style]  [Like2100(HLG)]/
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
/LNH +/*
±0
±0
444
• The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG format
images.
With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor/
viewfinder of this camera. ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
• HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for monitoring.
([HLG View Assist]: 446)
 ISO Sensitivity When [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG)

Full Range] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
• The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
• Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
445
[HLG View Assist]

At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted
color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs
these over HDMI.
[ ][ ]  [HLG View Assist]  [Monitor] or

[HDMI]
[AUTO]*
Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while applying the effect of
[MODE2]. This conversion setting works only when the camera is connected to a
device that does not support HDR (HLG format).
[MODE1]
Converts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.
• [MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.
[MODE2]
Converts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.
• [MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF]
Displays without converting color gamut and brightness.
• HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the HLG format.
* Can only be set while [HDMI] is selected.
446
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
Anamorphic Recording
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 449
From a variety of different video formats (recording qualities), you can

select and record with a recording quality that suits anamorphic recording.
During anamorphic recording, it is also possible to display desqueezed
images and the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. It is
also possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording.
• For information about image stabilizers suited to anamorphic recording
([Anamorphic (Video)]: 266)
447
1 Set [Rec. File Format].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]
2 Select a recording quality suited to anamorphic

recording.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:

– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K
of 60.00p
• When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV] or [Apple ProRes], by filtering [Rec
Quality] by the number of pixels, you can display just those recording qualities
with resolutions and aspect ratios that meet the conditions. ([Filtering]: 146)
• This camera is not compatible with desqueeze editing of video recorded with
anamorphic recording. Use compatible software.
448
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
Display the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the

anamorphic lens on this camera.
Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the
frame of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing.

2 Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[ ] ([2.0×])
[ ] ([1.8×])
[ ] ([1.5×])
[ ] ([1.33×])
[ ] ([1.30×])
[OFF]
• Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
449
3 Set [Frame Marker].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 414)
• Images output via HDMI are not desqueezed.
450
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]
[Synchro Scan]
Fine-adjust the shutter speed to reduce flickering and horizontal stripes.

The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the
shutter speed used for normal recording.
In the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter
speed for normal recording and adjust it.

2 Set the exposure mode to [S] or [M].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Exposure Mode]  [S]/[M]
3 Set [Synchro Scan].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Synchro Scan]  [ON]
451
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan]
4 Set the shutter speed.

≥Rotate , or to select a numeric value, then press
or .
• You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing
[DISP.].
• Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and
horizontal stripes will be minimized.
60.1
ュリヴヱハ &XUUHQWVKXWWHUVSHHG
• When you set [Synchro Scan] to [ON], the available shutter speed range
becomes narrower.
452
Special Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)]
[Loop Recording (video)]
Recording continues until the card becomes full, while dividing videos into
short periods.
When the card becomes full, recording continues while deleting the old
data.
This is a convenient function for recording over long periods that might
exceed the capacity of the card.
• Recording and deleting occur at the same time, so you will need a card with a
writing speed equivalent to double the bit rate of the recording quality used for
recording.
If the writing speed on the card is insufficient, recording may stop.
453
Special Video Recording – [Loop Recording (video)]

2 Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]  [MOV]
3 Set [Loop Recording (video)].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Loop Recording (video)]  [ON]
•[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

• When the recording fills the card to capacity, loop recording starts and video
recording time is no longer displayed.
• Make sure the camera does not turn off during recording.
• Loop recording cannot start if there is insufficient available capacity on the card.
• When the recording time exceeds 12 hours, recording continues with data being
deleted in order from the point where recording started.
• When the following functions are being used, [Loop Recording (video)] is not
available:
– [Rec Quality] with a bit rate of 400 Mbps or more
– [Live Cropping]
454
Special Video Recording – [Segmented File Recording]
[Segmented File Recording]
To avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply,

recorded video is segmented at set intervals while being recorded.
• The segmented videos are saved as one group image. (Group Images: 507)

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]  [MOV]/[Apple
ProRes]
2 Set [Segmented File Recording].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Segmented File Recording]  [10MIN.]/
[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]
• When the following function is being used, [Segmented File Recording] is not
available:
– [Loop Recording (video)]
455
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
List of Recording Qualities That Enable

Special Videos to be Recorded
S&Q : Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video
HFR : Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video
Live Crop : Recording qualities that enable use of [Live Cropping]
HLG : Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
 [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]

[Rec Quality] S&Q HFR Live Crop HLG
[4K/10bit/100M/60p] 
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]  
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 
[4K/10bit/72M/24p] 
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
456
[4K/10bit/100M/50p] 
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]  
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 
 [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]

[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2) 
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2) 
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9) 
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9) 
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L] 
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L] 
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]  
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]  
[3.3K/30p/422/10-I] 
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L] 
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L] 
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I] 
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L] 
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L] 
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)] 
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)] 
457
[C4K/60p/422/10-L] 
[C4K/60p/420/10-L] 
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]  
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]  
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]  
[C4K/30p/422/10-L] 
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]  
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]  
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]  
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)] 
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)] 
[4K/60p/422/10-L] 
[4K/60p/420/10-L] 
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[4K/48p/422/10-L]  
[4K/48p/420/10-L]  
[4K/30p/422/10-I]  
[4K/30p/422/10-L]  
[4K/30p/420/10-L]   
[4K/24p/422/10-I]  
[4K/24p/422/10-L]  
[4K/24p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]  
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]  
458
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]  
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]   
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2) 
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9) 
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L] 
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(H)] 
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(L)] 
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L] 
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L] 
[3.3K/25p/422/10-I] 
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L] 
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L] 
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] 
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] 
[C4K/50p/422/10-L] 
[C4K/50p/420/10-L] 
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]  
[C4K/25p/422/10-L] 
459
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]  
[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] 
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] 
[4K/50p/422/10-L] 
[4K/50p/420/10-L] 
[4K/25p/422/10-I]  
[4K/25p/422/10-L]  
[4K/25p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/100p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]  
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]   
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2) 
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9) 
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L] 
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]  
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]  
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I] 
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L] 
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L] 
460
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]  
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]  
[C4K/24p/422/10-I]  
[C4K/24p/422/10-L] 
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]  
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]  
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]  
[4K/48p/422/10-L]  
[4K/48p/420/10-L]  
[4K/24p/422/10-I]  
[4K/24p/422/10-L]  
[4K/24p/420/10-L]   
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]  
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]  
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]  
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]   
 [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]

[5.8K/30p/422 HQ] 
[5.8K/30p/422] 
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ] 
[5.8K/24p/422] 
[3.3K/30p/422 HQ] 
461
[3.3K/30p/422] 
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ] 
[3.3K/24p/422] 
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/60p/422] 
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/30p/422] 
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/24p/422] 
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/60p/422] 
[FHD/30p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/30p/422] 
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/24p/422] 
[5.8K/25p/422 HQ] 
[5.8K/25p/422] 
[3.3K/50p/422 HQ] 
[3.3K/50p/422] 
[3.3K/25p/422 HQ] 
[3.3K/25p/422] 
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/50p/422] 
[C4K/25p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/25p/422] 
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/50p/422] 
462
[FHD/25p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/25p/422] 
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ] 
[5.8K/24p/422] 
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ] 
[3.3K/24p/422] 
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 
[C4K/24p/422] 
[FHD/24p/422 HQ] 
[FHD/24p/422] 
463
HDMI Output (Video)
You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor
or external recorder connected with an HDMI cable.
• HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
For HDMI output settings during playback ([HDMI Connection]: 621)
≥ Connecting HDMI Devices: 465

≥ HDMI Output Image Quality: 466
≥ HDMI Output Settings: 469
≥ Output of RAW Video Data: 473
464
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices
Connecting HDMI Devices
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
Connect the camera and an external monitor or external

recorder with a commercially available HDMI cable.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(A) HDMI socket (Type A)

(B) External monitor
(C) External recorder
• Use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m
(4.9 feet) long).
465
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
HDMI Output Image Quality

≥ Images Output via HDMI: 466
Images Output via HDMI

The images output via HDMI during recording differ depending on the
recording mode.
 [ ]/[S&Q] Mode
Aspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec
Quality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.
The YUV and bit value are output with YUV changed to 4:2:2 as shown
below.
If the connected device is not compatible with the output system, output
changes to match the connected device.
Recording to card HDMI output

4:2:2 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 8 bit 4:2:2 8 bit
• Video with a resolution exceeding 4K is output as C4K/4K resolution.

• When set to a [Rec Quality] for high frame rate video, the resolution and frame rate
may be down-converted for output.
466
• When set to a [Rec Quality] other than 16:9 or 17:9, bands are added to the
images and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
 [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode
Output is the same as [ ]/[S&Q] mode during video recording.
Output is with a 16:9 aspect ratio during recording standby. Resolution,
frame rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.
• When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the images
and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
467
 Notice Regarding HDMI Output

• It may take some time for the output method to change.
• When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a
time lag.
• Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI
output.
• When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the
microphone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV,
producing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).
If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.
• Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
• For information about the high temperature display (For information about
the high temperature display: 129)
468
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
HDMI Output Settings

≥ Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI: 470
≥ Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder: 471
≥ Outputting Audio via HDMI: 472
≥ Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 472
469
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI

Output the camera information display to an external device connected by
HDMI.
[ ][ ]  [HDMI Rec Output]  Select [Info

Display]
• There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display]
is set to [ON]:
– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.
– [Touch Tab] is not available.
• There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display]
is set to [ON] and then a Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone or tethered
recording is attempted:
– Information is not displayed on the recording screen of the camera.
– Some information is not displayed on the recording screens output to external
devices.
– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]/[Touch Tab]/[Histogram]/[Luminance Spot Meter]/
[WFM/Vector Scope] are not available.
470
Outputting Control Information to an External

Recorder
Recording start and stop control information is output to an external
recorder connected by HDMI.
[ ][ ]  [HDMI Rec Output]  Select [HDMI

Recording Control]
• [HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON]
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode. ([HDMI Time Code Output]: 400)
• Control information is output when pressing the video rec. button or shutter button,
even if the video cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into the
camera).
• Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
471
Outputting Audio via HDMI

Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI.
[ ][ ]  [HDMI Rec Output]  Select [Sound

Output (HDMI)]
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via

HDMI
Output the enlarged screens from [MF Assist] or [Enlarged Live
Display(Video)] to an external device connected by HDMI.
[ ][ ]  [HDMI Rec Output]  Select [Enlarged

Live Display]
[MODE1]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording.
[MODE2]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording and during
video recording.
• The resolution and frame rate of the video output via HDMI will be FHD/60p or less.
[OFF]
Enlarged display of live view is not output.
• When the monitor/viewfinder of the camera is displaying the enlarged display, the
camera information display is not output via HDMI.
472
HDMI Output (Video) – Output of RAW Video Data
Output of RAW Video Data

≥ Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI: 475
≥ Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data: 480
12-bit RAW video data with a maximum resolution of 5.9K can be output
via HDMI to a compatible external recorder.
5.9K(16:9)/FULL
29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
4.1K(17:9)/APS-C
59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
3.5K(4:3)/APS-C
50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
HDMI
(B)
(A)
(A) RAW Video

(B) External recorder
• Recording of the RAW Video Data of this camera has been confirmed on the
following external recorders. (As of April 2023)
– ATOMOS HDMI field monitor/recorder “Ninja V+”/“Ninja V”
– Blackmagic Design “Blackmagic Video Assist 5q 12G HDR” and “Blackmagic
Video Assist 7q 12G HDR”
• For external recorder firmware versions that support recording of RAW Video Data,
check the following site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
• For details about external recorders, contact either ATOMOS or Blackmagic Design.
• This does not guarantee all of the capabilities that the compatible external recorder
may have.
473
• You will need compatible software to edit the RAW Video Data recorded with the
external recorder.
• When editing RAW video data that was recorded with an ATOMOS recorder, in order
to match the coloring with the V-Log/V-Gamut, download the LUT (Look-Up Table)
file from the following support site and load it into the software.
• Visit the following site to download LUT file or view the latest support information:
(English only)
• Video cannot be recorded to cards while RAW Video Data is being output via
HDMI.
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], RAW Video Data
cannot be output via HDMI.
474
Outputting RAW Video Data via HDMI

The image quality for the output images is set in [Rec Quality].
Getting started:
1 Turn off the camera and the external recorder.
2 Connect the camera and the external recorder with a commercially available
HDMI cable.
(4.9 feet) long).
3 Turn on the camera and the external recorder.

2 Set [HDMI RAW Data Output].

≥ [ ][ ]  [HDMI RAW Data Output]  [ON]
• [HDMI RAW] is displayed on the recording screen.
475
3 Select [Rec Quality].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
4 Set the HDMI input on the external recorder.

• When the connection is complete, images will be displayed on the screen of
the external recorder.
There are differences from normal HDMI output operation.

• [HDMI Rec Output] in the [Custom] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
– [Info Display] is not available. You cannot output the camera information
display to an external recorder connected by HDMI.
476
 [Rec Quality] (When [HDMI RAW Data Output] is selected)

[System [Image Area
[Rec Quality] Resolution Frame rate
Frequency] of Video]
[5.9K/30p/16:9] [FULL] 5888×3312 29.97p
[5.9K/24p/16:9] [FULL] 5888×3312 23.98p
[4.1K/60p/17:9] [APS-C] 4128×2176 59.94p
[59.94Hz
[4.1K/30p/17:9] [APS-C] 4128×2176 29.97p
(NTSC)]
[4.1K/24p/17:9] [APS-C] 4128×2176 23.98p
[3.5K/30p/4:3] [APS-C] 3536×2656 29.97p
[3.5K/24p/4:3] [APS-C] 3536×2656 23.98p
[5.9K/25p/16:9] [FULL] 5888×3312 25.00p
[4.1K/50p/17:9] [APS-C] 4128×2176 50.00p
[4.1K/25p/17:9] [50.00Hz (PAL)] [APS-C] 4128×2176 25.00p
[3.5K/50p/4:3] [APS-C] 3536×2656 50.00p
[3.5K/25p/4:3] [APS-C] 3536×2656 25.00p
• Bit value: 12-bit

• Audio format: LPCM (4ch)
– When the XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) is connected, if [4ch
Mic Input] is set to [ON], 4-channel audio can be recorded.
– Even if [4ch Mic Input] is set to [OFF], 4 channels are recorded to the audio tracks
of the video.
• [Image Area of Video] is fixed to the image area according to the [Rec Quality]
setting.
• [Sound Rec Quality] can be set to [96kHz/24bit] when you have connected an XLR
Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional), Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional).
477
 Monitor/Viewfinder Display When Outputting RAW Video

Data
Images equivalent to those recorded when recording with V-Log are
displayed on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera for monitoring purposes.
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] with the [Vlog_709] preset applied can be used
for the [V-Log View Assist].
• The LUT for the monitor display cannot be changed.
• When you use [LUT View Assist (Monitor)], [709] is displayed on the screen and
[RAW] is displayed on the screen as a [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] item.
• [Luminance Spot Meter], and [BASE/RANGE] of [Zebra Pattern] are set at “Stop”
units.
Notes on displayed images

• The images displayed on the camera do not affect the RAW Video Data that is
output.
• The images displayed on the external recorder are images that suit the external
recorder specifications. This means that there may be differences between the
images displayed on the camera and the images displayed on the external recorder.
• The monitor/viewfinder of the camera shows images with the angle of view of the
RAW Video Data. There may be some difference with the angle of view of the data
recorded on the external recorder.
478
 [HDMI Time Code Output]/[HDMI Recording Control]

The time code of the camera can be added and output via HDMI to the
external recorder.
In addition, recording can be started and stopped on the external recorder
by using the video rec. button and shutter button of the camera.
1 Set [HDMI Time Code Output] to [ON].

• [ ][ ]  [Time Code]  [HDMI Time Code Output]  [ON]
2 Set [HDMI Recording Control] to [ON].
• [ ][ ]  [HDMI Rec Output]  [HDMI Recording Control] 
[ON]
• [HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to
[ON] in [ ] mode.
479
Notes When Outputting RAW Video Data

Operation is as follows when outputting RAW Video Data:
• The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is set:
[320]), and the upper limit is [51200].
The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
• [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] and [ ] cannot be used for white balance.
• [Photo Style] is fixed to [V-Log], and Image quality cannot be adjusted.
• [ ] of the AF mode is not available.
• Enlarging the display with [MF Assist] and [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] is not
possible.
• The following functions are not available:
– [Master Pedestal Level]
– [i.Dynamic Range]
– [Vignetting Comp.]
– [Diffraction Compensation]
– [Filtering] and [add to list] in [Rec Quality]
– [Rec Quality (My List)]
– [Luminance Level]
– [E-Stabilization (Video)] ([Image Stabilizer])
– [Segmented File Recording]
– [Live Cropping]
– [Color Bars]
– [Streaming]
480
Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available)
Pictures and videos can be recorded and played back with a commercially
available external SSD connected to the USB port of the camera.
There are recording qualities that can only be recorded to an external SSD.
≥ Compatible External SSDs: 482

≥ Connecting the External SSD: 483
≥ Formatting the External SSD: 486
≥ Notes About External SSDs: 487
481
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Compatible External SSDs
Compatible External SSDs

This section describes the external SSDs that can be used with this
camera. (As of April 2023)
External SSD compatible with USB Type-C® (no more than 2 TB in size)
• This camera is compatible with SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2).
• We recommend using an external SSD whose operation has been confirmed by
Panasonic.
Note beforehand that this is not a guarantee of operation on all devices.
• For the latest information about external SSDs, check the following support site:
(English only)
• This does not guarantee all of the capabilities that the external SSD whose operation
has been verified may have.
• Perform trial recording in advance to check that operation is correct.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external SSD.
482
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Connecting the External SSD
Connecting the External SSD

Be sure to follow the below steps when connecting and removing the
external SSD.
If you do not perform the steps as shown, the external SSD may not be
recognized or the external SSD or recording data may be corrupted.
1 Set [USB-SSD] to [ON].

≥ [ ][ ]  [USB-SSD]  [ON]
483
2 Connect the camera and external SSD with the USB

connection cable.
• Use the USB connection cable supplied with the external SSD.
≥The USB-SSD icon is displayed on the screen when the camera

recognizes the external SSD.
484
 Removing the External SSD

1 Set [USB-SSD] to [OFF].
• [ ][ ]  [USB-SSD]  [OFF]
2 Confirm that the USB-SSD icon on the screen changes to the card icon, then
unplug the USB connection cable from the camera.
• It may take a while for the external SSD to be recognized.

• When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], you cannot use a card even if a card has been
inserted. To use a card, set [USB-SSD] to [OFF].
• [ ] is displayed on the screen while writing to the external SSD.
• While the USB-SSD icon is being displayed on the screen, do not perform any of
the following operations.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the external SSD and recorded images
may be damaged.
– Disconnect the USB connection cable.
– Remove the battery or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera or external SSD to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
485
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Formatting the External SSD
Formatting the External SSD

Format the external SSD with this camera before use.
[ ][ ]  [USB-SSD Format]
• When an external SSD is formatted, all of the data stored in the external
SSD is erased and cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the external SSD.
• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
• If the external SSD has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again
with the camera.
486
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Notes About External SSDs
Notes About External SSDs

• When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], the following functions are not available:
– Recording to cards, playing back pictures/videos recorded to cards
– [Double Card Slot Function]
– [Streaming] ([USB Tethering]/[LAN] in [Connection Method])
– [USB]
– [Firmware Update] ([Firmware Version])
– [Copy]
• If you want to automatically transfer pictures to a smartphone as they are taken while
using an external SSD, set [USB-SSD] to [ON], then set [Auto Transfer] in
[Bluetooth] to [ON]. ([Auto Transfer]: 672)
• When an external SSD is connected, power is supplied from the camera, so the
battery will be consumed faster. It is recommended to either have a backup battery
ready, or to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional).
• When not using the external SSD, turn [USB-SSD] [OFF].
When set to [ON], power is supplied from the battery of this camera to the connected
device, so the battery will be consumed faster.
• Depending on the external SSD connected, a message indicating that it cannot be
used may be displayed on the screen due to insufficient power and it may not
operate.
– We recommend using an external SSD whose operation has been confirmed by
Panasonic.
– Perform trial recording in advance to check that operation is correct.
487
Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) – Notes About External SSDs
• When the temperature of the camera rises when recording over long periods to an
external SSD, for example, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to
use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed
on the screen and recording, HDMI output, and the streaming function will be
stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that the
camera can be used again. When the message indicating that it can be used again
is displayed, turn the camera off then on again.
• The camera cannot access the external SSD if the external SSD is protected by a
password, etc. Check the settings of the external SSD before use.
• Do not use USB extension cables, USB conversion adaptors, or USB hubs.
488
Playing Back and Editing of Images
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
You can also develop pictures recorded in the RAW format and repair
video files that cannot be played back.
• Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or edited
correctly on this camera.
≥ Playing Back Pictures: 490

≥ Playing Back Videos: 492
≥ Switching the Display Mode: 501
≥ Group Images: 507
≥ Deleting Images: 509
≥ [RAW Processing]: 511
≥ [Video Repair]: 520
≥ [Playback] Menu: 523
489
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
Playing Back Pictures
1 Display the playback screen.

≥Press [ ].
2 Select a picture.
≥Select the pictures by pressing 21.
≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and
holding 21.
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally.
(A)
1/999
(A) Card slot
490
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
3 Stop playback.
≥You can also stop playback by pressing [ ].
 Switching the Card to Display

You can switch the card displayed just by pressing [ ] during playback.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Card Slot Change]. (Fn Buttons: 536)
1 Press [ ].
2 Press 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2] and then press or .
• This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and
“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).
The camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.
Exif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be
added.
• You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn

button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 545, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 548)
491
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
Playing Back Videos

≥ Video Repeat Playback: 496
≥ Extracting a Picture: 498
≥ [Video Divide]: 499

≥Press [ ].
2 Select a video.
• For information about how to select images (Playing Back Pictures: 490)
• The [ ] video icon is displayed for a video.
• The video recording time is displayed on the screen.
Example) When 8 minutes 30 seconds: 8m30s
• h: hour, m: minute, s: second
(A)
8m30s
(A) Video recording time
492
3 Play back the video.

≥Press 3.
≥You can also start playback by touching [ ] at the center of the
screen.
00:05:50 00:08:30
(B) (C)
(B) Elapsed playback time

(C) Playback bar
4 Stop playback.
≥Press 4.
493
 Operations During Video Playback

Button Touch
3 / Plays/pauses.
4 — Stops.
Performs fast-rewind playback.
• If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed
2 — increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while
paused).
Performs fast-forward playback.
• If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed
1 — increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
— Selects the frame to display.
Extracts a picture (while paused). (Extracting a
/ 6DYH Picture: 498)
Reduces the volume.

—
Increases the volume.
494
• The camera can play back videos in MP4, MOV, and Apple ProRes formats.
• Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current
one cannot be played back.
• If the reading speed of the card is slow, playback may pause or it may not be
possible to play back smoothly.
• You may be able to repair video files that cannot be played back.
([Video Repair]: 520)
• You can set the operation for when playback of video finishes:
([Behavior After Video Playback]: 527)
• You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn
button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 545, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 548)
495
Video Repeat Playback

You can play back a part of a video repeatedly.
1 Display the screen for setting the part to repeat.

≥Press [Q] while paused.
≥The screen for setting the part to repeat is also displayed when you
touch [Repeat Playback] while paused.
2 Set the position to start the repeat.

≥Press 21 to select the start position and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
≥You can also select the start position by touching the playback bar.
3 Set the position to end the repeat.

≥Set using the same procedure as . 2
• The position cannot be set if the position to start the repeat and the position to
end the repeat are too close.
00:05:50 00:08:30
496
4 Start playback.
• The operations during repeat playback are the same as “Operations During
Video Playback”. (Operations During Video Playback: 494)
• End repeat playback by pressing 4 to stop playback or by pressing [Q] while
paused.
• Repeat playback is not possible if the recording time is short.

• The positions set for the repeated part may shift from the position where the
video is paused.
497
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1 Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a

picture.
≥Press 3.
• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward

frame-by-frame).
00:06:10 00:08:30
2 Save the picture.

≥Press or .
≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save].
• The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec Quality].
• The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than normal.
•[ ] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
• It is not possible to save pictures from video that was recorded when [Rec. File
Format] was [Apple ProRes].
498
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video into two.
• Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided.
Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
• Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process.
The images may be lost.
1 Select [Video Divide].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Video Divide]
2 Select and play the image.

≥Press 21 to select an image and then press or .
3 Pause playback at the position you wish to divide.

≥Press 3.
• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (frame-by-frame rewind or

frame-by-frame forward).
00:06:10 00:08:30
499
4 Divide the video.

≥Press or .
≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].
• It is not possible to divide video that was recorded when [Rec. File Format] was
[Apple ProRes].
• Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
• Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
• [Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File
Recording].
500
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
Switching the Display Mode

≥ Enlarged Display: 502
≥ Thumbnail Screen: 504
≥ Calendar Playback: 506
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once
(multi-playback).
You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected
recording date.
501
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
Enlarging the playback screen.

≥ Rotate to the right.
≥ The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2× 4× 8×
16×.
• Rotating to the left returns to the previous display size.

• Enlarged display to 16× is not possible with FHD video or with pictures extracted
from FHD video.
2.0X
502
 Operations During Enlarged Display

Button Touch
Pinch out/
— Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
pinch in
Moves the enlarged display position.
3421 Drag Positions can be moved to the diagonal
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining
/ —
the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
• You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from that
point:
([Magnify from AF Point]: 526)
503
Thumbnail Screen
1 Switch to thumbnail display.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen
30-image screen.
• Rotating to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar

display. (Calendar Playback: 506)
• Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
• You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
[ ]: 1-image screen
[ ]: 12-image screen
[ ]: 30-image screen
[ CAL ]: Calendar (Calendar Playback: 506)
(A)
1/999
(A) Card slot
2 Select an image.
504
• When you press [ ] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch to
the card being displayed.
• You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
• Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
505
Calendar Playback
1 Switch to calendar playback.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen
(12 images) Thumbnail screen (30 images) Calendar
playback.
• Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

1 1 2
2023 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
2 Select the recording date.

≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press or .
3 Select an image.
• Rotating to the left returns to calendar playback.
• The card to display cannot be switched during calendar display.

• The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
506
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
Group Images
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are
handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on
a group basis.
(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are
deleted.)
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
 Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera

1/999
SLF
Group images recorded with SH burst recording.
Group images recorded with Focus Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop Motion Shooting.
Group images recorded with [Segmented File Recording].
507
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
 Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One

Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
1 Select the group image in the playback state. (Playing Back Pictures: 490)
2 Press 4 to display the images in the group.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
3 Press 21 to select an image.
• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 or touch [ ] again.
508
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
Deleting Images
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
• You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot.
• If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
1 Press [ ] in playback state.
509
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
2 Press 34 to select the deletion method and then press

or .
[Delete Single]
Deletes the selected image.
[Delete Multi]
Selecting and deleting multiple images.
1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and then press or .
• [ ] is displayed for the selected image.
• If you press or again, the selection is canceled.
• Up to 100 images can be selected.
2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
• To switch the card selected for deleting images, press [ ] and then select the
card slot.
• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to

delete them.
• You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation screen
when deleting:
([Delete Confirmation]: 534)
• All images on the card can be deleted:
([Delete All Images]: 534)
510
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
[RAW Processing]
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
1 Select [RAW Processing].

≥ [ ][ ]  [RAW Processing]
2 Select the RAW image.

• When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the
group.
Press 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.
• The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.
511

4 Change the setting.

≥Rotate , , or .
• The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
DISP.
-2 -1 0 +1 +2
5 Confirm the setting.

≥Press or .
≥The screen of Step reappears. 3
To set another item, repeat Steps 3 to 5.
512
6 Save the image.

≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press or
.
513
 Setting Items ([RAW Processing])

[Begin Processing]
Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with the same setting as at the time
of recording.
• If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection screen, the white balance adjustment
screen appears. (Adjusting the White Balance: 308)
• If you press 3 while [ 1 ] to [ 4 ] is selected, the color temperature setting
screen appears. (Color Temperature Setting: 307)
[Brightness correction]
Corrects the brightness.
• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation
during recording.
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 310)

Selects a Photo Style.
• If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee setting screen appears.
(Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 374)
• You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded with [V-Log]. You cannot select
[V-Log] for images not recorded with [V-Log].
• You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images
recorded with [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select [Cinelike D2] or
[Cinelike V2] for images not recorded with Photo Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2].
• [REAL TIME LUT] cannot be selected. The Photo Style is fixed to [V-Log] for images
recorded with [REAL TIME LUT].
514
[i.Dynamic Range]
Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color Tone]
Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Hue]
Adjusts the hue.
[Filter Effect]
Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect]
Selects a grain effect setting.
[Color Noise]
Adds color to the grain effect.
[Noise Reduction]
Sets noise reduction.
S [Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness.
515
[LUT]
Selects the LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]: 329)
[More Settings]
[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones from the time of recording.
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]. ([Color
Space]: 571)
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
[Destination Card Slot]: You can select the card slot to which to save images
processed with RAW. When [AUTO] is selected, the image is saved to the same card
slot as the RAW format image to be processed.
516
• The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
    
    
   
  
  
  
  
  
([Saturation])

([Color Tone])
  
 
*

    
S     
    
* Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
517
 Displaying a Comparison Screen

You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
1 Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step 4.

• The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center.
• Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it.
Touching [ ] returns to the original display.
• A comparison screen cannot be displayed while [Noise Reduction] or
[Sharpness] is selected.
DISP.
(A)
2 Rotate , , or to change the setting.

518
• It may take a while for the comparison screen to be displayed.

• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size of
[3:2].
(However, RAW images recorded in High Resolution mode are recorded in the
[XL] size of [3:2])
• With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of
view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording.
• [Picture Quality] is processed as [FINE] with this function.
• The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
• RAW processing is not possible while you are using the following function:
– HDMI output
519
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
[Video Repair]
When the recording of a video could not be completed normally, a video file
that cannot be played back may be generated (extension “.mdt”).
You can repair the “.mdt” file with this function to make it playable.
• Possible causes for the generation of “.mdt” files are:
– Power turns off during video recording (battery is removed, AC cable is unplugged,
power outage while using the AC adaptor, etc.)
– Card removed during video recording
– Card removed while writing to card after video recording
– When an unexpected freeze occurs during video recording/while writing to the
card
• Videos that can be repaired are those videos recorded with the [Rec. File
Format] being either [MOV] or [Apple ProRes].
Video recorded in [MP4] cannot be repaired.
• As repairs can take some time, use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10:
optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-DCC17: optional) or supply with power during
the operation. (Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying
Power/Charging): 50)
1 Select [Video Repair].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Video Repair]
520
2 Select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2].

• Video files that can be repaired are filtered.
3 Select the video file to repair.

≥Press 21 to select a file and then press or .
• Refer to the recording date and time (A), folder/file number (B), and video
recording time (C) to help with selecting the video file.
(A) (B) (C)
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/2

8m30s
4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.

• Video repair starts. Repair takes some time.
• The video file after repair is saved in the same folder as the file before repair.
 Canceling Video Repair

Even if you cancel video repair, the file is not deleted, so the procedure can
be done over again later if required.
1 Press either or in the video repair progress screen.

2 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
521
• It may not be possible to repair videos with a short recording time.

• It may not be possible to repair videos in some cases due to the state of the data.
• Video repair cannot be started if there is very limited free space on the card.
• Do not turn off the power or remove the card during repair.
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
• Do not perform other operations during the repair.
• You cannot repair videos recorded with devices other than this camera.
522
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
[Playback] Menu
≥ How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 523
≥ [Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 525
≥ [Playback] ([Process Image]): 528
≥ [Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 529
≥ [Playback] ([Edit Image]): 530
≥ [Playback] ([Others]): 534
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu

Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
• Images are displayed separately by card slot.
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
 When [Single] Has Been Selected

1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press or .
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when or is pressed again.
523
 When [Multi] Has Been Selected

When you press [ ], the card that is displayed is switched.
1 Press 3421 to select the image and then press or (repeat).

• The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
1 2 3
4 5 6
ュリヴヱハ 2.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
When [Protect] is selected

Press 3421 to select the image, and then press or to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when or is pressed again.
1 2 3
4 5 6
6HW&DQFHO
524
[Playback] ([Playback Mode])
: Default settings
[Playback Mode]
[Normal Play] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]

Filters the type of images to play back.
• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[Slide Show]
[All] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]

Selects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.
• When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.

[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
Operations during slide show

3: Plays/pauses (You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ] or
[ ])
2: Move to the previous image
1: Move to the next image
4: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume
• When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
525
[Rotate Disp.]
[ON] / [OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the
camera vertically.
[Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME] / [DATE/TIME]

This sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.

[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
• If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all data, therefore pictures
may not be displayed in the set order.
[Magnify from AF Point]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the point focused with AF.
Enlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.
• The center of the image is enlarged for RAW images recorded in the High
Resolution mode or when the image is not focused.
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
[ON] / [OFF]
When playing back images recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log], this displays
the images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder.
• This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] in [V-Log View Assist] in
the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([V-Log View Assist]: 442)
526
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]

At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
• This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom]
([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]

This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
• This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 449)
[Behavior After Video Playback]
[End Playback] / [Pause At Last Frame]

Sets the operation for when playback of video finishes.
[End Playback]: Ends video playback and returns to the image selection screen.
[Pause At Last Frame]: Does not end video playback, but pauses on the final
frame. To end video playback, press 4.
527
[Playback] ([Process Image])

[RAW Processing]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG
format.
([RAW Processing]: 511)
[Time Lapse Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot].
1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press or .

2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 232)
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Time Lapse Video] is

not available.
[Stop Motion Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop Motion Animation].
1 Press 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group and then press or
.
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 232)
• When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Stop Motion Video] is

not available.
528
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])

[Protect]
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]

You can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted.
• For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 523)
• Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than
this camera.
[Rating]
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]

If you set any of the five different rating levels for images, you can do the following:
• Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
• Use the file details view on a PC, etc., to check the rating level. (JPEG images
only)
1 Select an image. (How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 523)

2 Press 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then press or .
• When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
• To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
529
[Playback] ([Edit Image])
[Resize]
[Single] / [Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to
enable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments.
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images, press 34 to select the
size, then press or .
• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
• The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
• [Resize] is not available for images recorded using the following functions:
– Video recording
– Group images
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– Pictures created from [C4K] video
– [S] ([Picture Size])
530
[Rotate]
Rotate images manually in 90o steps.
[ ]: Rotates 90o clockwise.

[ ]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise.
• When [Rotate Disp.] is [OFF], [Rotate] is not available.
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video into two.

([Video Divide]: 499)
531
[Copy]
[Copy Direction] [ ]/[ ]

[Select Copy] / [Copy All in Folder] / [Copy All in Card]
You can copy the images in one of the cards to the other card.
• Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
[Select Copy]: Copies selected images.

1 Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2 Select the images. (How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 523)
[Copy All in Folder]: Copies all images in a folder.

1 Select the folder to copy.
2 Check the images to be copied and then press or to execute
copying.
[Copy All in Card]: Copies all images in the card.
Using the Fn button to copy images

If you press the Fn button with [Copy] assigned while playing back images one at a
time, the image currently being played back will be copied to the other card. (Fn
Buttons: 536)
• Select the copy destination folder from the following options. In the case of group
images, [Create a New Folder] is selected automatically.
[Same Folder Number as Source]: Copies to a folder with the same name as the
folder of the image to be copied.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number
and then copies the image to it.
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder to store the image and then copies the image to
it.
• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy].
• The [Protect] setting is not copied.
• Copying may take a while.
• When using the following combinations of cards, video copying is not available:
– Copying from an SDXC memory card to an SD/SDHC memory card
532
[Video Repair]
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]

When recording does not finish normally for some reason, it is possible to repair the
video file. ([Video Repair]: 520)
533
[Playback] ([Others])
[Delete Confirmation]
["Yes" first] / ["No" first]

This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation
screen for deleting an image is displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.

["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
[Delete All Images]
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]

Deleting all images in a card.
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
• If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except those with a rating set are
deleted.
• [Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].
534
Camera Customization
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
It also describes the [Custom] menu where you can make advanced
settings for the camera operations and screen displays, and the [Setup]
menu where you can make basic settings for the camera.
≥ Fn Buttons: 536
≥ [Dial Operation Switch]: 551
≥ Quick Menu Customization: 554
≥ Custom Mode: 561
≥ [Custom] Menu: 566
≥ [Setup] Menu: 605
≥ My Menu: 629
535
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
Fn Buttons
≥ Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 539
≥ Use the Fn Buttons: 550
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you

can register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in
the same way as with the Fn buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
 Fn Button Default Settings

(1) (2)(3)(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(9) (10)
536
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]

(1) [Fn2] [Preview] [No Setting]
(2) [WB] [White Balance] [No Setting]
(3) [ISO] [Sensitivity] [No Setting]
(4) [ ] [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting]
Video rec.
(5) [Video Record] [Video Record]
button
(6) [LVF] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]
(7) [ ] [AF Mode] [Card Slot Change]
(8) [AF ON] [AF-ON] [Rating¿3]
(9) [Q] [Q.MENU] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
[Fn1]/[ ]/ • Cannot be used as Fn
(10) [Level Gauge]
[ ] buttons during playback.
537
Fn3
Fn4
Fn5
Fn6
OFF
Fn7
OFF
(11) (12) (13)
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]

[Fn3] [Wi-Fi]
[Fn4] [Histogram]
[Fn5] [Boost I.S. (Video)]
(11) [Off (Disable Press and
[Fn6]
Hold)]
[Off (Disable Press and
[Fn7]
Hold)]
Fn15
Fn13 • Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
(12) Fn12 [No Setting]
Fn16
Fn14
Fn8
Fn9
(13) [No Setting]
Fn10
Fn11
538
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
• With default settings, [Fn12] to [Fn16] on the joystick cannot be used.

When using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu to [Fn]. ([Joystick Setting]: 583)
1 Select [Fn Button Set].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Fn Button Set]  [Setting in REC mode]/
[Setting in PLAY mode]
2 Select the button.

≥Press 34 to select the button and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
• Press [DISP.] to change the page.
539
3 Find the function to register.

≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC
mode]): 542, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY
mode]): 548) and then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].
4 Register the function.

≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
• Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.

• Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.
540
• You can also touch [ Fn ] on the control panel (Control Panel: 761) to display
the screen in Step 2.
• You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step 4.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
• You can assign a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens:

([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 602)
541
 Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
• [Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 289)
• [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
• [Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
• [White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 302)
• [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 310)
• [Apply LUT]
– Applies the LUT file that was set in [LUT] with either [REAL TIME LUT] or [MY
PHOTO STYLE]. (Adjusting Image Quality: 315)
• [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 270)
• [Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 117)
• [Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 121)
• [Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 119)
• [1 Shot Spot Metering]
– Records with the metering mode set to [ ] (Spot metering) once only.
([Metering Mode]: 270)
• [Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 256)
• [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 257)
• [1 Shot RAW+JPG]
– Records a RAW image and a JPEG image simultaneously once only. ([Picture
Quality]: 121)
• [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 292)
• [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 333)
• [Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 323)
• [One Push AE]
– Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to the settings suited for the standard
exposure determined by the camera. (Exposure Compensation: 289)
• [Touch AE] (Touch AE: 111)
• [AWB Lock] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 570)
• [Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 361)
• [Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 451)
542
[Focus/Shutter]
• [AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
• [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 173)
• [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 173)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 159)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 369)
• [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
• [Focus Limiter Range Set] ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
• [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] ([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165)
• [Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 575)
• [AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
• [AF LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
• [AF/AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
• [AF-ON] ([AF ON] button: 156)
• [AF-ON : Near Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to close-up subjects. (Using AF: 154)
• [AF-ON : Far Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to distant subjects. (Using AF: 154)
• [Focus Area Set]
– Displays the AF area/MF Assist movement screens. (AF Area Operations: 186,
Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 197)
• [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 370)
[Flash]
• [Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 343)
• [Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 348)
• [Wireless Flash Setup] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351)
543
[Others (Photo)]
• [Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)
• [Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 238)
• [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 250)
• [Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 264)
• [Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 252)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 204)
• [Live View Composite] ([Live View Composite]: 246)
[2] tab
[Image Format]
• [Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 133)
• [Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 135)
• [Rec Quality (My List)] (Setting or deleting in My List: 147)
• [Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
• [Time Code Display] (Time Code: 398)
[Audio]
• [Audio Information] ([Audio Information]: 385)
• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 378)
• [Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 379)
• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 381)
• [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 382)
• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 383)
• [4ch Mic Input] ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 391)
• [Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396)
544
[Others (Video)]
• [E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 262)
• [Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 263)
• [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
• [Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 428)
• [Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 433)
[Operation]
• [Q.MENU] (Quick Menu: 90)
• [Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the playback screen. (Playing Back Pictures: 490, Playing Back
Videos: 492)
• [Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 124)
• [Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 361)
• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 84)
• [Operation Lock]
– A certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation to be disabled in
[Operation Lock Setup]. ([Operation Lock Setup]: 580)
• [Dial Operation Switch] (Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 553)
545
[Monitor / Display]
• [Preview] (Preview Mode: 287)
• [Preview Aperture Effect]
– The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed.
(Preview Mode: 287)
• [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 585)
• [Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 594)
• [Histogram] ([Histogram]: 586)
• [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 410)
• [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 414)
• [Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 587)
• [Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 587)
• [Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 597)
• [Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 588)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
– Switches the displayed monitor or viewfinder display style. ([LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]: 589)
• [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 599)
• [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 412)
• [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 442)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 442)
• [LUT Select] ([LUT Select]: 442)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
• [HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
• [Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 592)
• [I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 593)
• [WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 406)
• [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 449)
• [Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 416)
546
[3] tab
[Lens / Others]
• [Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 603)
• [AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 166)
• [Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 267)
[Card/File]
• [Destination Card Slot]
– Changes the priority of cards for recording. This can be used if [Double Card Slot
Function] ([Double Card Slot Function]: 607) is set to [Relay Rec].
[IN/OUT]
• [Streaming] (Streaming Function: 699)
• [Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 645)
• [Fan Mode] ([Fan Mode]: 601)
[Setting]
• [Save to Custom Mode] (Registering Instant Customization: 562)
[Others]
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
• [Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 536)
547
 Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])
[1] tab
[Playback Mode]
• [Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 526)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 527)
[Process Image]
• [RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 511)
[Add/Delete Info.]
• [Delete Single] (Deleting Images: 509)
• [Protect] ([Protect]: 529)
• [Rating¿1] ([Rating]: 529)
[Edit Image]
• [Copy] ([Copy]: 532)
[Operation]
• [Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the recording screen. (Basic Picture Operations: 114, Basic Video
Operations: 124)
• [LVF/Monitor Switch] (Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder: 84)
• [Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 124)
• [Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 361)
548
[Monitor / Display]
[Card/File]
• [Card Slot Change] (Switching the Card to Display: 491)
[IN/OUT]
• [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] ([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]: 618)
• [Send Image (Smartphone)] (Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations: 661)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([V-Log View Assist]: 442)
[2] tab
[Others]
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
• [Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
• [Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 536)
549
Use the Fn Buttons

During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the
functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1 Press the Fn button.

≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating , or .
• Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu
item.
 Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons)

During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
• With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON]
in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. ([Touch Settings]: 579)
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch one of [Fn3] to [Fn7].
Fn3
Fn4
Fn5
Fn6
OFF
Fn7
OFF
550
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
[Dial Operation Switch]

≥ Register Functions to the Dials: 551
≥ Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 553
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(rear dial).
Register Functions to the Dials

1 Select [Dial Operation Switch Setup].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Dial Set.]  [Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[ ]/[ ]
2 Register the function.

≥Press 34 to select a function and then press or .
551
 Functions That Can Be Registered

• [Sensitivity]*1 (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
• [White Balance]*2 (White Balance (WB): 302)
*1 default setting
*2 default setting
552
Temporarily Change Dial Operation

1 Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 536)
2 Switch dial operation.
≥A guide will display the functions registered to and .
• If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide

disappears.
WB
ISO
3 Set the registered function.

≥Rotate or while the guide is displayed.
ISO
WB AWB AWBc AWBw

553
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
Quick Menu Customization

≥ Register to the Quick Menu: 554
You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.
Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and
their order to suit your preferences.
For information about Quick menu operation methods (Quick Menu: 90)
Register to the Quick Menu

Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
These can be set separately for [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Video) and for other
recording modes (Photo).
1 Select [Q.MENU Settings].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Q.MENU Settings]  [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
2 Select the item position (1 to 12).

≥Press 3421 to select the position and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
≥Directions on the diagonal can also be selected using the joystick.
  
  
  
  
554
3 Find the function to register.

≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Menu Items That Can Be Registered: 556) and
then press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
4 Register menu items.

• Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.
555
 Menu Items That Can Be Registered
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
• [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
• [Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
• [White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 302)
• [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 270)
• [Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 121)
• [Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 119)
• [Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 256)
• [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 257)
• [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 333)
• [Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 361)
• [Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 451)
[Focus/Shutter]
• [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 173)
• [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 173)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 159)
• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 369)
• [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
• [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
• [1-Area AF Moving Speed] ([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165)
556
[Flash]
• [Wireless Flash Setup] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351)
[Others (Photo)]
• [Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)
• [Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 238)
• [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 250)
• [Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 252)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 204)
[Image Format]
• [Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 133)
• [Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 135)
• [Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 147)
• [Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
• [Time Code Display] (Time Code: 398)
[Audio]
• [Audio Information] ([Audio Information]: 385)
• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 378)
• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 381)
• [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 382)
• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 383)
• [4ch Mic Input] ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
• [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 391)
• [Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396)
557
[Others (Video)]
• [E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 262)
• [Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 263)
• [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
• [Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 428)
• [Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 433)
[2] tab
[Monitor / Display]
• [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 585)
• [Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 594)
• [Histogram] ([Histogram]: 586)
• [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 410)
• [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 414)
• [Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 587)
• [Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 587)
• [Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 597)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 589)
• [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 599)
• [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 412)
• [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 442)
• [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
• [Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 592)
• [I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 593)
• [WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 406)
• [Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 416)
558
[Lens / Others]
• [Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 603)
• [Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 267)
[Card/File]
• [Destination Card Slot] (Switching the Card to Display: 491)
[IN/OUT]
• [Streaming] (Streaming Function: 699)
[Others]
• [No Setting]
– Set when not using.
559
 Quick Menu Detailed Settings

Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of
during menu display.
[ ][ ]  Select [Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style]
Changes the appearance of the Quick menu.
[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu simultaneously.
[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.
[Front Dial Assignment]

Changes the operation of in the Quick menu.
[Item]: Selects menu items.
[Value]: Selects setting values.
[Item Customize (Photo)]

Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].
[Item Customize (Video)]

Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [ ]/[S&Q].
560
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
Custom Mode
≥ Register in Custom Mode: 562
≥ Using Custom Mode: 564
≥ Calling Up Settings: 565
Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be
registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching
the mode dial to [C1] to [C3] modes.
561
Register in Custom Mode

You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1 Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state

you wish to save.
2 Select [Save to Custom Mode].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Save to Custom Mode]
3 Register.
≥Select the save-to number and then press or .
• A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.] to change the Custom

mode name.
 Registering Instant Customization

When you press the Fn button registered with [Save to Custom Mode] in
the recording standby screen, you can quickly register the current
recording settings in the Custom mode. (Fn Buttons: 536)
• You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.
• List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 822)
562
 Custom Mode Detailed Settings

You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain
temporarily changed settings details.
[ ][ ]  Select [Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]

Sets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in [C3].
A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are available as default settings.
[Edit Title]
Changes the Custom mode name.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
[How to Reload Custom Mode]

Sets the timing at which to return the settings that were changed temporarily while the
Custom mode was being used to their registered settings.
[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep Mode]/[Turn the Power ON]
[Select Loading Details]

Sets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom Mode].
[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of aperture value, shutter speed, and
ISO sensitivity settings.
[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance settings.
563
Using Custom Mode

Set the recording mode to [C1] to [C3].
≥ Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
≥ If [C3], the last-used Custom mode will be called up.
 [C3] Custom Mode Selection

1 Set the recording mode to [C3].
2 Press .
• The Custom mode selection menu appears.
3 Press 34 to select the Custom mode and then press or .
• The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.
 Changing Registered Details

Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C3].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom
Mode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
564
Calling Up Settings
Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode
and overwrite the current settings with these.
1 Set to the recording mode to be used.

2 Select [Load Custom Mode].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Load Custom Mode]
3 Select the Custom mode to call up.

≥Select the Custom mode and then press or .
• Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] modes and those created from [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
565
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
[Custom] Menu
≥ [Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 567
≥ [Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 573
≥ [Custom] menu ([Operation]): 579
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 585
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 596
≥ [Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 600
≥ [Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 602
566
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])
[Photo Style Settings]
[Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] /

[Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] /
[L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] /
[L.Monochrome S] / [Cinelike D2] /
[Show/Hide Photo Style] [Cinelike V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log] /
[REAL TIME LUT] / [Like2100(HLG)] /
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] / [MY
PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
[Add Effects]
[My Photo Style Settings]
[Load Preset Setting]
Enables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My Photo Style.
[Add Effects]: Enables [Dual Native ISO Setting], [Sensitivity], and [White Balance]
settings in image quality adjustment.
[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image quality adjustment values
changed in My Photo Style are returned to their registered state.
[Reset Photo Style]
Returns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style Settings] to their default
settings.
567
[LUT Library]
[Vlog_709] / [Set1] to [Set10]

Registers LUT files to the camera.
[ISO Increments]
[1/3 EV] / [1 EV]

Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment values.
[Extended ISO]
[ON] / [OFF]
Extends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.
• The extendible range depends on the [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native
ISO Setting]: 299).
– When set to [AUTO]: Lower limit can be extended to [50] and the upper limit can
be extended to [204800]
– When set to [LOW]: Lower limit can be extended to [50]
– When set to [HIGH]: Lower limit can be extended to [320] and the upper limit can
be extended to [204800]
568
[Exposure Offset Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])

[Center Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Spot] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Highlight Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each setting item of
[Metering Mode].
Adds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure compensation value
(Exposure Compensation: 289) when recording.
• For video recording, it is not possible to add an adjustment value of a range that
exceeds ±3 EV.
[Face Priority In Multi Metering]
[ON] / [OFF]
When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi-metering), the metering range for
automatic exposure is prioritized on the face and eyes.
When set to [OFF], the change to exposure caused by the [FACE/EYE] automatic
detection function can be avoided.
569
[AWB Lock Setting]
[WHILE PRESSING] / [DURING BURST

[Operation Syncs With Shutter]
SHOOTING] / [OFF]
[Lock Hold With Fn Button] [ON] / [OFF]
Fixes the white balance while you are pressing the shutter button or the Fn button
when white balance is auto ([AWB]/[AWBc]/[AWBw]).
This prevents the white balance from changing unintentionally while pressing the
shutter button halfway, during burst recording, or while recording videos.
[Operation Syncs With Shutter]

[WHILE PRESSING]: Fixes white balance while pressing the shutter button
(including while pressing halfway or during burst recording).
[DURING BURST SHOOTING]: Fixes white balance during burst recording.
[OFF]: White balance is not fixed.
[Lock Hold With Fn Button]

[ON]: When you press the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white balance
is fixed. Press again to cancel the lock.
[OFF]: While you are pressing the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white
balance is fixed.
• [AWBL] is displayed on the screen while white balance is locked.

• [Operation Syncs With Shutter] does not work in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
570
[Color Space]
[sRGB] / [AdobeRGB]
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on
the screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.

[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as
professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than
sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.

• When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] ([Photo Style])
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
[ON] / [OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the recording mode or turn off the
camera.
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
[ON] / [OFF]
Selects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
when recording video in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.

[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
571
[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.] [ ]/[ ]

[White Balance] [ ]/[ ]
[Photo Style] [ ]/[ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]/[ ]
[AF Mode] [ ]/[ ]
Content set in [ ] mode can be separated from when taking pictures.
(Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 365)
572
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter])
[Focus/Shutter Priority]
[AFS] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]

[AFC] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.

[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing
and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON] / [OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF Assist) for when the
camera is held vertically and when it is held horizontally.
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 194)
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[ON] / [OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the button until it is pressed
again.
573
[AF+MF]
[ON] / [OFF]
When the focus mode is set to [AFS], you can fine-adjust the focus manually during
AF Lock.
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway

• When [AF ON] is pressed
• When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE LOCK]
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring]
(When an interchangeable lens with a [ON] / [OFF]
focus ring is attached)
[AF Mode] [ON] / [OFF]
[Press Joystick] [ON] / [OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the lens.

[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[Press Joystick]: Press the joystick to enlarge the display. (if [Joystick Setting] is
set to [D.FOCUS Movement]) ([Joystick Setting]: 583)
[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of
MF Assist (enlarged screen).
574
[MF Guide]
[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording distance, is displayed on
the screen. You can select from meters or feet for the display unit.
[Focus Ring Lock]
[ON] / [OFF]
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus.
• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.
[Show/Hide AF Mode]
[Tracking] [ON] / [OFF]

[Full Area AF] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone] [ON] / [OFF]
[1-Area+] [ON] / [OFF]
[Pinpoint] [ON] / [OFF]
Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.
575
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG] / [MID] / [SHORT]

[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode is [ ].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode)
of the enlarged screen.
[Shutter AF]
[ON] / [OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway.
[Eye Detection Display]
[ON] / [OFF]
When set to [OFF], you can make the cross for eye/face detection disappear when
focus is aligned by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.
576
[Half-Press Shutter]
[ON] / [OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.
[Assign REC to Shutter Button]
[ON] / [OFF]
Use the shutter button for the start/stop operation of video recording in the [ ]
mode.
The start/stop operation of video recording using the shutter button can be disabled
when set to [OFF].
[Quick AF]
[ON] / [OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically
adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
• The battery will drain faster than usual.

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
577
[Eye Sensor AF]
[ON] / [OFF]
When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor operates, then AF will
function.
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.
[Looped Focus Frame]
[ON] / [OFF]
When moving the AF area, MF Assist, or video enlarged display of live view, this
enables looping from one edge to the opposite edge of the screen.
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON] / [OFF]

[PIP Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Sets the operation of the function for enlarging the video live view ([Enlarged Live
Display(Video)]: 370).
[Keep Enlarged Display]

[ON]: Enlarges display after releasing the Fn button until the button is pressed
again.
[OFF]: Enlarges display just while the Fn button is being pressed.
[PIP Display]
Sets the way the enlarged screen is displayed (full screen mode/windowed mode).
578
[Custom] menu ([Operation])
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1] / [MODE2]

[Front Dial Assignment] [Item] / [Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)]
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu.
(Quick Menu Customization: 554)
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] [ON] / [OFF]

[Touch Tab] [ON] / [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF] / [AF+AE]
[EXACT] / [OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7] /
[Touch Pad AF]
[OFF]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.

[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a touched subject.
Alternatively, operation to optimize both the focus and brightness ([AF+AE]).
[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder display. (Moving the AF
Area Position with the Touch Pad: 192)
579
[Operation Lock Setup]
[Cursor] [ ]/[ ]
[Joystick] [ ]/[ ]
[Touch Screen] [ ]/[ ]
[Dial] [ ]/[ ]
[DISP. Button] [ ]/[ ]
This sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn button [Operation Lock].
(Only for recording screen)
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and

[Joystick]: Joystick
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]: , , and
[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode]

[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
(Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 539)
580
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]
[WHILE PRESSING] / [AFTER PRESSING1] / [AFTER PRESSING2]

This sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White balance), [ISO] (ISO
sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure compensation) is pressed.
[WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding
the button. Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the
recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings. Press the button again
to confirm the settings value, and to return to the recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING2]: Press the button to change settings. Each press of the
button switches the settings value. (Except that of exposure compensation) To
confirm your selection and return to the recording screen, press the shutter button
halfway.
[ISO Displayed Setting]
[ / ]/[ / ] / [OFF/ ]/
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ]/[ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [ ] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting].
[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)] [ ] / [OFF]

This sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[ / ]/[ / ] / [OFF/ ]/
[Front/Rear Dials]
[ / ]/[ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you adjust flash output.
581
[Dial Set.]
[SET1] / [SET2] / [SET3] / [SET4] /

[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
[SET5]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed

[P] [A] [S] [M]
F SS F
[SET1]
F SS SS
— F — F
[SET2]
— SS SS
— — SS SS
[SET3]
F — F
— — — F
[SET4]
F SS SS
F SS F
[SET5]
— — — SS
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]/[ ]

Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture value and shutter speed
adjustment.
[ ] ([Headphone Volume]) /
[ / ] ([Exposure / Aperture]) /
[Control Dial Assignment] [ ] ([Exposure Comp.]) /
[ ] ([Sensitivity]) /
[ ] ([Focus Frame Size])
Sets the function to be assigned to on the recording screen.
[ / ]: In [M] mode, this assigns the operation to adjust the aperture value. In
other than [M] mode, this assigns the operation of exposure compensation.
582
[Exposure Comp.] [ ]/[ ] / [OFF]

Assigns exposure compensation to or . (Except in [M] mode)
• The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.

[ ]
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[ ]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registerd
temporarily to or . (Register Functions to the Dials: 551)
[ ]/[ ]/
[Rotation (Menu Operation)]
[ ]/[ ]
Changes the rotational direction of the dials when operating menus.
[Joystick Setting]
[D.FOCUS Movement] / [Fn] / [MENU] / [OFF]

Sets the joystick movement on the recording screen.
[D.FOCUS Movement]: Moves the AF area and MF Assist. (AF Area Operations:
186, Record Using MF: 195)
[Fn]: Operates as Fn buttons.
[MENU]: Operates as . Operations that can be performed by moving the
joystick are disabled.
[OFF]: Disables the joystick.
583
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter Remote
Control (optional).
(Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 749)
• [Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
584
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)])
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [HOLD] / [5SEC] to [0.5SEC] / [OFF]

[Playback Operation Priority] [ON] / [OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the
playback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.
• If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image recorded stays displayed
until the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
[Constant Preview]
[ON] / [OFF]
[Effect]
[SET]
[Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in [A]/
[M] mode.
You can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time when in [M] mode.
• You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect in
[Effect].
• Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is
set to [ON].
• The preview of the shutter speed effect does not work when using a flash.
585
[Histogram]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press 3421 to set the position.
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
• You can also move the position by dragging the histogram on the recording
screen.
• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the
number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
(A) (B)
(A) Dark
(B) Bright
• When the recorded image and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the flash fires
– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in low light situations.
• When the following function is being used, the [Histogram] is not available:
– [WFM/Vector Scope]
• The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.
586
[Photo Grid Line]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]

Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen.
When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the position.
Positions can be moved to the diagonal directions using the joystick.
• When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines on the recording
screen to move the position.
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]

[SET] [P/A/S/M] / [M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions
even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.
• You can change the recording mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using
[SET].
• This mode does not affect recorded images.
• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.
• This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for
example)
– When recording a video
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant Preview]
587
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [ON] / [OFF]

[LVF] [ON] / [OFF]
Displays the monitor and viewfinder in red.
In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the
surroundings difficult to see.
You can also set the luminance of the red display.
1 Press 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or viewfinder (LVF).

2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
• Display the monitor to adjust the monitor, and display the viewfinder to adjust
the viewfinder.
3 Press 21 to adjust luminance and then press or .
• This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
588
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] [ ] / [ ]

[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ] / [ ]
Selects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to
display over the entire screen.
[ ]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the
images.
FINE
L AFS
±0 999
[ ]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.
FINE
L AFS
ISO
±0 AUTO 999
• You can assign the function that switches the currently displayed monitor or
viewfinder display style to an Fn button. ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 546)
589
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]

[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the
monitor during recording.
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]

[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which
the monitor is opened or closed.
[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]

[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according to the angle to which the
monitor is rotated.
[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
• The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
590
[Expo.Meter]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
SS 125 60 30 15 8
F 4.0 5.6 8.0 11
30 F5.6
• Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting
aperture, and setting shutter speed.
• If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter
disappears.
[Focal Length]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.
[Blinking Highlights]
[ON] / [OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking in black and white during Auto Review or
playback.
• The display without the highlights is added to the display shown when [DISP.] is
pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (Playback Screen: 89)
591
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON] / [OFF]
[Transparency]
[Image Select]
[SET]
[Reset at Power Off]
[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]
A picture that has been recorded or an image extracted from a video is overlayed on
the recording screen.
1 Use [Image Select] and select a picture or video to display.

• Press 21 to select a picture or video and then press or to
confirm.
2 (When a video is selected) Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
• Press 3 to pause playback.
• To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
3 (When a video is selected) Set a picture.
• Press or .
• If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while
the shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.
• The picture extracted from video is saved.
• When the following functions are being used, [Sheer Overlay] is not available:
– Video recording
592
[I.S. Status Scope]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays a reference point (C) on the recording screen in order to let you check for
camera shake.
(C)
• [I.S. Status Scope] does not work in the following cases:

– When [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]
– When the O.I.S. switch on the lens is [OFF]
• When the following function is being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is not available:
– Video recording
593
[Level Gauge]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt.
(D)
(E)
(F)
(D) Horizontal
(E) Vertical
(F) Green (no tilt)
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1o.
• When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge
may not be displayed correctly.
• You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge
Adjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 616)
594
[Luminance Spot Meter]
[ON] / [OFF]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area.
([Luminance Spot Meter]: 410)
[Framing Outline]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the outline for the live view.
[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]
[Control Panel] [ON] / [OFF]

[Black Screen] [ON] / [OFF]
Displays the control panel and black screen when switching between displays using
[DISP.] button. (Recording Screen: 87)
595
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
[V-Log View Assist]
[LUT Select]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [ON] / [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can show images with LUT file applied on the monitor/viewfinder, or output them
via HDMI.
([V-Log View Assist]: 442)
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]

[HDMI] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color
gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over
HDMI.
([HLG View Assist]: 446)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]

This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 449)
596
[Monochrome Live View]
[ON] / [OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be
displayed in black and white.
• [Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.
[Center Marker]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]

The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
The shape of the marker can be changed.
[Safety Zone Marker]
[ ]/[ ] / [OFF]
[95%]
[SET] [Size] [90%]
[80%]
This displays the safety zone, which shows a guide to the area that would be shown
on a household TV, on the recording screen.
597
[Frame Marker]
[ON] / [OFF]
[Frame Aspect]
[SET] [Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
[Frame Aspect] can also be customized.
([Frame Marker]: 414)
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / [ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]

[Zebra 1]
[SET]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
([Zebra Pattern]: 412)
[WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE] / [VECTOR] / [OFF]

This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen.
([WFM/Vector Scope]: 406)
598
[Color Bars]
[SMPTE] / [EBU] / [ARIB]

The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
(Color Bars/Test Tone: 416)
[Video-Priority Display]
[ON] / [OFF]
When in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the
control panel to suit video recording, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
The playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.
• When set to a setting where video recording is not available, [Video-Priority

Display] is fixed to [OFF].
• [Video-Priority Display] works only during video recording when using the following
functions:
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
[ON] / [OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being
recorded.
[Streaming Blue Frame Indicator]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays a blue frame on the screen during streaming.
599
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] (Outputting the Camera

[ON] / [OFF]
Information Display via HDMI: 470)
[HDMI Recording Control] (Outputting
Control Information to an External [ON] / [OFF]
Recorder: 471)
[Sound Output (HDMI)] (Outputting
[ON] / [OFF]
Audio via HDMI: 472)
[Enlarged Live Display] (Outputting the
Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
472)
Sets HDMI output during recording.
600
[Fan Mode]
[AUTO1] / [AUTO2] / [FAST] / [NORMAL] / [SLOW] / [OFF]

Sets fan operation.
[AUTO1]: The camera switches [SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according to the

temperature of the camera. This setting prioritizes controlling rises in temperature in
the camera.
[AUTO2]: The camera switches [OFF]/[SLOW]/[NORMAL] automatically according
to the temperature of the camera.
[FAST]: The fan operates constantly at fast speed.
[NORMAL]: The fan operates constantly at a standard speed.
[SLOW]: The fan operates constantly at low speed.
[OFF]: The fan does not operate.
• [OFF] can be set when in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] mode.

• When the following functions are being used, [SLOW] is not available.
When the following functions are used while set to [SLOW], the setting switches to
[AUTO1]:
60.00p
– [Slow & Quick Setting] exceeding a frame rate of 60 fps
601
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others])
[Lens Focus Resume]
[ON] / [OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [AF Detection Setting] / [Detecting Subject] / [Focus
Ring Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE LOCK] / [AF-ON] / [AF-ON : Near
Shift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [Focus Area Set] / [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] /
[Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture Effect] / [No Setting] / [Off (Disable
Press and Hold)] / [Restore to Default]
Register a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
• When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus button is being pressed.
• When using an interchangeable lens that has a switch for the image stabilizer
(normal/panning), [Image Stabilizer] in [Lens Fn Button Setting] is not available.
602
[Focus Ring Control]
[NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR]
[SET] [90°] to [1080°] ([300°]) / [Maximum]
Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using
supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the

focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of
the focus ring.
• When using lenses equipped with focus clutch mechanisms, set the lens to AF
and the camera to MF.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.
• Angles that cannot be set with the attached lens are not displayed.
[AF Micro Adjustment]
[ALL] / [ADJUST BY LENS] / [OFF]

You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with phase
detection AF.
([AF Micro Adjustment]: 166)
603
[Lens Information]
[Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])

When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera.
• This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo]
([Others (Photo)]) menu. ([Lens Information]: 267)
[Lens Info. Confirmation]
[ON] / [OFF]
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with
this camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed
when you turn on the camera.
[Vertical Position Info (Video)]
[ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording.
[ON]: Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the camera
held vertically will be automatically played back vertically on the PC, smartphone,
etc. during playback.
[OFF]: Does not record vertical orientation information.
• On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in
vertical orientation.
604
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
[Setup] Menu
≥ [Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 606
≥ [Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 612
≥ [Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 617
≥ [Setup] menu ([Setting]): 623
≥ [Setup] menu ([Others]): 625
605
[Setup] menu ([Card/File])
[Card Format]
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]

Formats the card (initialization).
Format the cards with the camera before use.
• When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and
cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the
camera.
• You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored on
the card. ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 624)
606
[Double Card Slot Function]
[Recording Method] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]

This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
[Relay Rec]: Selects the priority of card slots for recording.

[Destination Card Slot]: [ ]/[ ]
Relays recording to the card in the other card slot after the first card runs out of free
space.
• You can assign the function that changes the card which is prioritized for recording
to an Fn button. ([Destination Card Slot]: 547)
[Backup Rec]: Records the same images to both cards simultaneously.
[Allocation Rec]: Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for
different image formats.
[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/[Video Destination]
Notes about relay recording

• The following video cannot be continued to be recorded on another card:
Notes about Backup Recording

• We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
If the card Speed Class or capacity is insufficient when video recording, recording
to both cards stops.
• Backup recording is not available with the following video. They can only be
recorded on a single card:
• When using the following combinations of cards, backup recording for videos is
not available:
– SD/SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards
607
[USB-SSD]
[ON] / [OFF]
The commercially available external SSD that is connected to the USB port can be
used when this is set to [ON]. (Using an External SSD (Commercially Available):
481)
608
[Folder / File Settings]
[Select Folder] / [Create a New Folder] / [File Name Setting]

Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
Folder name
100ABCDE
(1) (2)
(1) Folder number (3 numeric characters, 100 to 999)

(2) 5-character user-defined segment
File name
PABC0001.JPG
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(3) Color space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)

(4) 3-character user-defined segment
(5) File number (4 numeric characters, 0001 to 9999)
(6) Extension
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder for storing images.

• When [Double Card Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (Slot
1)] and [Select Folder (Slot 2)] will be displayed.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the folder
number is displayed.
[OK]:
Increments the folder number without changing the 5-character user-defined
segment ((2) above).
[Change]:
Changes the 5-character user-defined segment ((2) above). This will also increment
the folder number.
609
[File Name Setting]

[Folder Number Link]:
Uses the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above) to set the folder number
((1) above).
[User Setting]:
Changes the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above).
• Follow the steps on “Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is
displayed. (Entering Characters: 101)
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]
• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file number
will be assigned.
• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be
created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the
way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
• [Select Folder] is not available when [Backup Rec] in [Double Card Slot Function]
is being used.
610
[File Number Reset]
[Card Slot 1] / [Card Slot 2]

Refresh the folder number within the DCIM folder and reset the file number to 0001.
• When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
• To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. ([Card Format]: 606)
2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
[Copyright Information]
[Artist] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]

[Copyright Holder] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]
[Display Copyright Info.]
Records the names of the artist and the copyright holder in the image Exif data.
• You can register names from [SET] in [Artist] and [Copyright Holder].
• Up to 63 characters may be entered.
• You can confirm registered copyright information in [Display Copyright Info.].
611
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])
[Power Save Mode]
[10MIN.] / [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] /

[Sleep Mode]
[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF]
[Time to Sleep]
[Power Save LVF Shooting]
[Method of Activation]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or
turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.
([Power Save Mode]: 54)
612
[Thermal Management]
[Recording Max Temperature] [HIGH] / [STANDARD]

This sets the temperature during video recording at which the camera automatically
stops recording.
When set to [HIGH], recording continues even if the camera temperature rises.
[Recording Max Temperature]

[HIGH]: Sets the temperature at which recording is stopped due to the camera
temperature rising to a higher temperature.
• You can record for a longer time, but the camera body will become hot.
Use a tripod, etc., because recording with a handheld camera for long periods can
cause low temperature burns.
[STANDARD]: Recording stops when the camera temperature rises.
• Set to [STANDARD] when recording with a handheld camera.
• When recording with the following recording qualities, recording stops once the
continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes:
– 6K/30p (6K/25p) or 5.9K/30p (5.9K/25p) [MOV] recording quality
– 5.8K/30p (5.8K/25p) or C4K/60p (C4K/50p) [Apple ProRes] recording quality
[Monitor Frame Rate]
[30fps] / [60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor when recording pictures.
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.

[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• When the following function is being used, [Monitor Frame Rate] is not available:
– HDMI output
613
[LVF Frame Rate]
[60fps] / [120fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when recording pictures.
[60fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[120fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• [LVF120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is displayed at [120fps].
• When set to [120fps], the images in the viewfinder will not be as smooth as with
[60fps], but there will be no change to the images recorded.
• When the following functions are being used, [LVF Frame Rate] is not available:
– HDMI output
– While connected to Wi-Fi
[AFC Live View]
[IMAGE PRIORITY] / [SPEED PRIORITY]

It switches the display speed in the live view on the monitor and viewfinder when the
focus mode is set to [AFC].
[IMAGE PRIORITY]: This setting prioritizes the image quality of the live view
display.
[SPEED PRIORITY]: The display speed increases in the live view while the shutter
is being pressed halfway.
• There may be a decrease in the image quality in the live view, but there will be no
change to the images recorded.
• The setting is fixed to [IMAGE PRIORITY] in the following cases:

– HDMI output
– While connected to Wi-Fi
614
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]
[Brightness] / [Contrast] / [Saturation] / [Red Tint] / [Blue Tint]

This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor/viewfinder.
1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust.

• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the
viewfinder is in use.
[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance]
[AUTO] / [−3] to [+3]

Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is

around the camera.
• Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the monitor, and the viewfinder
luminance when displaying the viewfinder.
• When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to positive side, the usage
period will shorten.
• When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] are not
available.
615
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] [HIGH] / [LOW]

This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic
[LVF/Monitor Switch] viewfinder/monitor switching) / [LVF]
(viewfinder) / [MON] (monitor)
This will set the method for switching between the viewfinder and monitor.
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will also
switch.
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press or . The level gauge
will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
616
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT])
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)

[AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[AF Beep Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 3)
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[E-Shutter Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.
[Headphone Volume]
[0] to [LEVEL15] ([LEVEL3])

Adjusts the volume when headphones are connected.
(Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 395)
• This functions in tandem with [Headphone Volume] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
617
[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]
[COMBINED WITH REC] / [CH1/CH2] / [CH3/CH4] / [CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4] /

[CH1] / [CH2] / [CH3] / [CH4] / [CH1+CH2] / [CH3+CH4] / [CH1+CH2+CH3+CH4]
During video playback, this selects the audio channel output to the speaker on the
camera or the headphones.
For information about output audio ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396)
[COMBINED WITH REC]: Outputs audio with the same settings as [Sound
Monitoring Channel] in the [Video] ([Audio]) menu.
• You cannot change settings during video playback.

• The L channel and R channel are mixed for audio output from the camera’s
speaker.
[Streaming]
[Streaming Function] (Streaming

[ON] / [OFF]
Settings: 713)
[Streaming Method] (Streaming
[Direct] / [Via PC Software]
Settings: 713)
[Connection Method] (Streaming
[Wi-Fi]*1 / [USB Tethering]*1 / [LAN]*2
Settings: 713)
[Streaming Quality]
[RTSP Port]*2
[Streaming Setup] (Streaming
[Streaming Address]*1
Settings: 713)
[Save/Load Streaming Address]*1
[Wi-Fi Connection Setting]*3
*1 Displayed when [Streaming Method] is set to [Direct].

*2 Displayed when [Streaming Method] is set to [Via PC Software].
*3 Displayed when [Connection Method] is set to [Wi-Fi].
618
[LAN / Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function] (Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 655, Wi-Fi

Connections: 684)
[LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] ([LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 696)
[Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth] (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 649)

[Send Image (Smartphone)] (Using the menu to transfer easily: 662)
[Remote Wakeup] ([Remote Wakeup]: 676)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]:
669)
[Auto Transfer] ([Auto Transfer]: 672)
[Location Logging] ([Location Logging]: 674)
[Auto Clock Set] ([Auto Clock Set]: 678)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point. Wireless access points
used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered automatically.
619
[USB]
[ ] [Select on connection] / [ ]
[USB Mode]
[PC(Storage)] / [ ] [PC(Tether)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is
connected.
[ ] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB communication

system when connecting to another device. (USB port: 725)
[ ] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
(Importing Images to a PC: 730)
[ ] [PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with
“LUMIX Tether”. (Tethered Recording: 736)
[USB Power Supply] [ON] / [OFF]
Provides power from the USB connection cable.
• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is
connected.
[Tether(USB ethernet adaptor)] [ON] / [OFF]
This enables connection to “LUMIX Tether” with a wired LAN connection.
[Battery Use Priority]
[BODY] / [BG]
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both the camera
and the Battery Grip.
(Selecting Battery Usage Priority: 747)
620
[HDMI Connection]
[AUTO] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/

30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/60p] /
[Output Resolution(Playback)] [4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] /
[1080/120p] / [1080/100p] / [1080p] /
[1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device. When
playing back pictures, output is at a maximum resolution of 8K.
• The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.
• If no image appears on the external device with [AUTO], switch to a setting other
than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your external device.
(Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external device.)
• It may not be possible to play back video, depending on the external device
connected.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
Images with LUT (Look-Up Table) file applied are output when you play back videos
recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log].
• This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [V-Log View Assist] under the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([V-Log View Assist]: 442)
621
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]

At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
• This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 446)
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected
to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable.
(Using VIERA Link: 728)
[Background Color(Playback)] [ ] / [ ]
Sets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of
images output on an external device.
• We recommend setting to [ ] to prevent burn-in on the screen of the output

destination.
[Photo Luminance Level] [0-255] / [16-255]
Sets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to external devices.
[Network Connection Light]
[ON] / [OFF]
This will turn on the network connection light.
622
[Setup] menu ([Setting])

[Save to Custom Mode]
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]

You can register the currently set information of the camera.
(Register in Custom Mode: 562)
[Load Custom Mode]
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]

Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and
overwrites the current settings with these.
(Calling Up Settings: 565)
[Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]

[Edit Title]
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the ease of use of Custom mode.
(Custom Mode Detailed Settings: 563)
623
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save] / [Load] / [Delete] / [Keep Settings While Format]

Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same
settings on multiple cameras.
[Save]: Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.

• If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an existing file, select
that existing file.
• When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name to save as is
displayed.
[OK]:
Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file name]:
Changes the file name and saves the file.
• Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, up to
8 characters
[Load]: Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the camera.
[Delete]: Deletes settings information on the card.
[Keep Settings While Format]: When formatting the card, formats the card while
keeping camera settings information stored on the card.
• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.

• Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.
• List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 822)
[Reset]
Returns the camera to its default settings.

([Reset]: 100)
624
[Setup] menu ([Others])

[Clock Set]
Sets the date and time.

(Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 69)
[Time Zone]
Sets the time zone.
Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or to confirm.
(A)
(B)
(A) Current time

(B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward
by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
625
[System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)] / [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]

* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back
with the camera.
([System Frequency]: 131)
[Pixel Refresh]
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
• The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is
purchased. Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get
recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
626
[Sensor Cleaning]
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the
image sensor is performed.
• You can use this function when the dust is particularly noticeable.
• Turn the camera off and on when finished.
[Language]
This set the language displayed on the screen.
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set
the desired language.
627
[Firmware Version]
[Firmware Update] / [Software info]

You can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens.
In addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera
software.
[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.

1 Download the firmware. (Firmware of Your Camera/Lens: 19)
2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears
when you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the
camera.
3 Select [Firmware Update], press or , and then select [Yes] to update
the firmware.
[Software info]: Displays information about the camera software.
• When a supported optional item (XLR Microphone Adaptor, etc.) is attached to the
camera, you can also check its firmware version.
[Approved Regulations]
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
628
Camera Customization – My Menu
My Menu
≥ Registration in My Menu: 629
≥ Edit My Menu: 630
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.

A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ].
Registration in My Menu
1 Select [Add].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Add]
2 Register.
≥Select the menu to register and then press or .
 Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
[ ][ ]/[ ]/[ ]  Registered menus
629
Camera Customization – My Menu
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
[ ]  Select [ ]
[Add]
Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My Menu]

Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
630
List of Menu
Camera customization and many function settings are performed with
menus on this camera.
This chapter introduces all of the menu items in a list format.
• For information about menu operation methods (Menu Operation Methods: 95)
• Refer to the “Materials” chapter for the following lists:
– List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 822
– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 847
≥ [Photo] menu: 632

≥ [Video] menu: 634
≥ [Custom] menu: 637
≥ [Setup] menu: 641
≥ [My Menu]: 643
≥ [Playback] menu: 644
631
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
[Photo] menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
[Image Quality]
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 310)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 270)
≥ [Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 117)
≥ [Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 121)
≥ [Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 119)
≥ [High Resolution Mode Setting] (High Resolution mode: 216)
≥ [Long Exposure NR] ([Long Exposure NR]: 256)
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] ([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 300)
≥ [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 257)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 292)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 332)
≥ [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 333)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 337)

≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 323)
[Focus]
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 173)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 173)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 159)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 164)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
≥ [1-Area AF Moving Speed] ([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165)
632
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
[Flash]
≥ [Flash Mode] ([Flash Mode]: 343)
≥ [Firing Mode] ([Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 346)
≥ [Flash Adjust.] ([Flash Adjust.]: 348)
≥ [Flash Synchro] ([Flash Synchro]: 349)
≥ [Manual Flash Adjust.] ([Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]: 346)
≥ [Auto Exposure Comp.] ([Auto Exposure Comp.]: 350)
≥ [Wireless] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351)
≥ [Wireless Channel] (Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351)
≥ [Wireless FP] ([Wireless FP]: 357)
≥ [Communication Light] ([Communication Light]: 357)
≥ [Wireless Setup] (Setting Items ([Wireless Setup]): 355)
[Others (Photo)]
≥ [Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 238)
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 250)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 259)
≥ [Burst Shot Setting] (Taking Burst Pictures: 209)
≥ [Shutter Type] ([Shutter Type]: 252)
≥ [Shutter Delay] ([Shutter Delay]: 258)
≥ [Ex. Tele Conv.] (Extended Tele Conversion: 204)
≥ [Time Lapse/Animation] (Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221,
Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 228)
≥ [Live View Composite] ([Live View Composite]: 246)
≥ [Self Timer] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)
633
List of Menu – [Video] menu
[Video] menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
[Image Quality]
≥ [Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 361)
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 310)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 270)
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ([ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 376)
≥ [Synchro Scan] ([Synchro Scan]: 451)
≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 403)
≥ [Master Pedestal Level] ([Master Pedestal Level]: 373)
≥ [SS/Gain Operation] ([SS/Gain Operation]: 404)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 292)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 332)
≥ [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 333)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 337)

≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 323)
[Image Format]
≥ [Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 133)
≥ [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
≥ [Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 135)
≥ [Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 147)
≥ [Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
≥ [Time Code] (Setting the Time Code: 399)
≥ [Luminance Level] ([Luminance Level]: 372)
≥ [HDMI RAW Data Output] (Output of RAW Video Data: 473)
634
[Focus]
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 173)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 173)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 369)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
≥ [Continuous AF] ([Continuous AF]: 367)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 164)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
≥ [1-Area AF Moving Speed] ([1-Area AF Moving Speed]: 165)
[Audio]
≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 378)
≥ [Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 379)
≥ [Sound Rec Gain Level] ([Sound Rec Gain Level]: 380)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 381)
≥ [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 382)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 383)
≥ [Wind Noise Canceller] ([Wind Noise Canceller]: 384)
≥ [Wind Cut] (Reduction of Wind Noise: 390)
≥ [Mic Socket] (External Microphones (Optional): 386)
≥ [Special Mic.] (Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:
Optional): 389)
≥ [4ch Mic Input] ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
≥ [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] (XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional): 391)
≥ [Sound Output] (Switching the Sound Output Method: 395)
≥ [Headphone Volume] (Adjusting the Headphone Volume: 395)
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel] ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396)
635
[Others (Video)]
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 250)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 259)
≥ [Self Timer Setting] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)
≥ [Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 428)
≥ [Loop Recording (video)] ([Loop Recording (video)]: 453)
≥ [Segmented File Recording] ([Segmented File Recording]: 455)
≥ [Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 433)
636
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
[Custom] menu
[Image Quality] ([Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 567)
≥ [Photo Style Settings] ([Photo Style Settings]: 567)
≥ [LUT Library] ([LUT Library]: 329)
≥ [ISO Increments] ([ISO Increments]: 568)
≥ [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 568)
≥ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] ([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 569)
≥ [Face Priority In Multi Metering] ([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 569)
≥ [AWB Lock Setting] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 570)
≥ [Color Space] ([Color Space]: 571)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Reset] ([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 571)
≥ [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 571)
≥ [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] ([CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 572)
637
[Focus/Shutter] ([Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 573)

≥ [Focus/Shutter Priority] ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 573)
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] ([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 573)
≥ [AF/AE Lock Hold] ([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 573)
≥ [AF+MF] ([AF+MF]: 574)
≥ [MF Assist] ([MF Assist]: 574)
≥ [MF Guide] ([MF Guide]: 575)
≥ [Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 575)
≥ [Show/Hide AF Mode] ([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 575)
≥ [Pinpoint AF Setting] ([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 576)
≥ [Shutter AF] ([Shutter AF]: 576)
≥ [Eye Detection Display] ([Eye Detection Display]: 576)
≥ [Half-Press Shutter] ([Half-Press Shutter]: 577)
≥ [Assign REC to Shutter Button] ([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 577)
≥ [Quick AF] ([Quick AF]: 577)
≥ [Eye Sensor AF] ([Eye Sensor AF]: 578)
≥ [Looped Focus Frame] ([Looped Focus Frame]: 578)
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 578)
638
[Operation] ([Custom] menu ([Operation]): 579)

≥ [Q.MENU Settings] ([Q.MENU Settings]: 579)
≥ [Touch Settings] ([Touch Settings]: 579)
≥ [Operation Lock Setup] ([Operation Lock Setup]: 580)
≥ [Fn Button Set] ([Fn Button Set]: 580)
≥ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] ([WB/ISO/Expo. Button]: 581)
≥ [ISO Displayed Setting] ([ISO Displayed Setting]: 581)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] ([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 581)
≥ [Dial Set.] ([Dial Set.]: 582)
≥ [Joystick Setting] ([Joystick Setting]: 583)
≥ [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] ([Video Rec. Button (Remote)]: 584)
[Monitor / Display (Photo)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display

(Photo)]): 585)
≥ [Auto Review] ([Auto Review]: 585)
≥ [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 585)
≥ [Histogram] ([Histogram]: 586)
≥ [Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 587)
≥ [Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 587)
≥ [Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 588)
≥ [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] ([LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]: 589)
≥ [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 591)
≥ [Focal Length] ([Focal Length]: 591)
≥ [Blinking Highlights] ([Blinking Highlights]: 591)
≥ [Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 592)
≥ [I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 593)
≥ [Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 594)
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 595)
≥ [Framing Outline] ([Framing Outline]: 595)
≥ [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] ([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 595)
639
[Monitor / Display (Video)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display

(Video)]): 596)
≥ [V-Log View Assist] ([V-Log View Assist]: 596)
≥ [HLG View Assist] ([HLG View Assist]: 596)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
596)
≥ [Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 597)
≥ [Center Marker] ([Center Marker]: 597)
≥ [Safety Zone Marker] ([Safety Zone Marker]: 597)
≥ [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 598)
≥ [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 598)
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 598)
≥ [Color Bars] ([Color Bars]: 599)
≥ [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 599)
≥ [Red REC Frame Indicator] ([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 599)
≥ [Streaming Blue Frame Indicator] ([Streaming Blue Frame Indicator]:
599)
[IN/OUT] ([Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 600)

≥ [HDMI Rec Output] ([HDMI Rec Output]: 600)
≥ [Fan Mode] ([Fan Mode]: 601)
[Lens / Others] ([Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 602)

≥ [Lens Focus Resume] ([Lens Focus Resume]: 602)
≥ [Lens Fn Button Setting] ([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 602)
≥ [Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 603)
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 166)
≥ [Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 604)
≥ [Lens Info. Confirmation] ([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 604)
≥ [Vertical Position Info (Video)] ([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 604)
640
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
[Setup] menu
[Card/File] ([Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 606)
≥ [Card Format] ([Card Format]: 606)
≥ [Double Card Slot Function] ([Double Card Slot Function]: 607)
≥ [USB-SSD] ([USB-SSD]: 608)
≥ [Folder / File Settings] ([Folder / File Settings]: 609)
≥ [File Number Reset] ([File Number Reset]: 611)
≥ [Copyright Information] ([Copyright Information]: 611)
[Monitor / Display] ([Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 612)

≥ [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save Mode]: 612)
≥ [Thermal Management] ([Thermal Management]: 613)
≥ [Monitor Frame Rate] ([Monitor Frame Rate]: 613)
≥ [LVF Frame Rate] ([LVF Frame Rate]: 614)
≥ [AFC Live View] ([AFC Live View]: 614)
≥ [Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] ([Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder]: 615)
≥ [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] ([Monitor Backlight]/[LVF
Luminance]: 615)
≥ [Eye Sensor] ([Eye Sensor]: 616)
≥ [Level Gauge Adjust.] ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 616)
641
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
[IN/OUT] ([Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 617)

≥ [Beep] ([Beep]: 617)
≥ [Headphone Volume] ([Headphone Volume]: 617)
≥ [Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)] ([Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]:
618)
≥ [Streaming] ([Streaming]: 618)
≥ [LAN / Wi-Fi] ([LAN / Wi-Fi]: 619)
≥ [Bluetooth] ([Bluetooth]: 619)
≥ [USB] ([USB]: 620)
≥ [Battery Use Priority] ([Battery Use Priority]: 620)
≥ [HDMI Connection] ([HDMI Connection]: 621)
≥ [Network Connection Light] ([Network Connection Light]: 622)
[Setting] ([Setup] menu ([Setting]): 623)

≥ [Save to Custom Mode] ([Save to Custom Mode]: 623)
≥ [Load Custom Mode] ([Load Custom Mode]: 623)
≥ [Custom Mode Settings] ([Custom Mode Settings]: 623)
≥ [Save/Restore Camera Setting] ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 624)
≥ [Reset] ([Reset]: 624)
[Others] ([Setup] menu ([Others]): 625)

≥ [Clock Set] ([Clock Set]: 625)
≥ [Time Zone] ([Time Zone]: 625)
≥ [System Frequency] ([System Frequency]: 626)
≥ [Pixel Refresh] ([Pixel Refresh]: 626)
≥ [Sensor Cleaning] ([Sensor Cleaning]: 627)
≥ [Language] ([Language]: 627)
≥ [Firmware Version] ([Firmware Version]: 628)
≥ [Approved Regulations] ([Approved Regulations]: 628)*
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
642
List of Menu – [My Menu]
[My Menu]
[Page 1] (My Menu: 629)
[Edit My Menu] (Edit My Menu: 630)

≥ [Add]
≥ [Sorting]
≥ [Delete]
≥ [Display from My Menu]
643
List of Menu – [Playback] menu
[Playback] menu
[Playback Mode] ([Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 525)
≥ [Playback Mode] ([Playback Mode]: 525)
≥ [Slide Show] ([Slide Show]: 525)
≥ [Rotate Disp.] ([Rotate Disp.]: 526)
≥ [Picture Sort] ([Picture Sort]: 526)
≥ [Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 526)
≥ [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 526)
≥ [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 527)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
527)
≥ [Behavior After Video Playback] ([Behavior After Video Playback]: 527)
[Process Image] ([Playback] ([Process Image]): 528)

≥ [RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 528)
≥ [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 528)
≥ [Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 528)
[Add/Delete Info.] ([Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 529)

≥ [Protect] ([Protect]: 529)
≥ [Rating] ([Rating]: 529)
[Edit Image] ([Playback] ([Edit Image]): 530)

≥ [Resize] ([Resize]: 530)
≥ [Rotate] ([Rotate]: 531)
≥ [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 531)
≥ [Copy] ([Copy]: 532)
≥ [Video Repair] ([Video Repair]: 533)
[Others] ([Playback] ([Others]): 534)

≥ [Delete Confirmation] ([Delete Confirmation]: 534)
≥ [Delete All Images] ([Delete All Images]: 534)
644
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® functions of the camera.
• This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone: 647

≥ Operating the Camera with a Smartphone: 663
≥ Sending Images from the Camera to a PC: 680
≥ Wi-Fi Connections: 684
≥ Send Settings and Selecting Images: 694
≥ [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 696
 Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions

Light (blue) Monitor Operation
The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a
connection.
Lit
The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there
is a connection.
When image data is sent using a camera
Blinking
operation.
(A)
(A) Network connection light
645
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
• Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while
sending images.
• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.
If the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing parts
may be sent.
• You can set so that the network connection light does not turn on:
([Network Connection Light]: 622)
646
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to a Smartphone
Connecting to a Smartphone
≥ Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 648
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 649
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 655
≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations: 661
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync”

(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
647
Installing “LUMIX Sync”

“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
Supported OS
Android™: Android 8 or higher
iOS: iOS 13 or higher
1 Connect the smartphone to a network.

2 (Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3 Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the
search box.
4 Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync ” .
• Use the latest version.

• Supported OSs are current as of April 2023 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.
• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
(English only)
648
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth

Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times
(Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 653)
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 7 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 12 or higher
• Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
649
1 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.

≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
• If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
LUMIX Sync
2 Check the content in the displayed guide and select

[Next] until the screen to register the camera is
displayed.
650
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3 Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Bluetooth]  [SET] 
[Pairing]
≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A)
is displayed.
(A)
4 On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.

• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
XXXXXXXXXXXX
651
5 When a message indicating that device registration is

complete, select [OK].
≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone
will be made.
OK
• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.

• During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
 End Bluetooth Connection

To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of
the camera.
[ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Bluetooth]  Select [OFF]
• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
652
 Connecting to a Paired Smartphone

Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1 Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.

• [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Bluetooth]  [ON]
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
3 Select [ ].
LUMIX Sync
4 Select [Bluetooth Setup].

5 Turn Bluetooth ON.
6 From [Registered camera(s)] items, select the camera’s device name.
Bluetooth
XXXXXXXX
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
653
 Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
• [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Bluetooth]  [SET]  [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.

• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
654
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])

Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible
without entering a password.
You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection
security.
• A third party may be able to intercept your transmissions if you do not use password
authentication. When recording or transmitting important images, we recommend
using password authentication. (Using Password Authentication to Connect: 657)
1 Set the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.

≥ [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [New
Connection]  [Control With Smartphone]
≥The SSID (B) of the camera is displayed on the screen.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 536)
(B)
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi

function ON.
655
3 Select the SSID displayed on the camera.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX i
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync ”.
5 (At the first connection) Confirm the device name

displayed on the camera and then select [Yes].
• When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the
camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using either
QR code or manual password input to connect with password authentication.
(Using Password Authentication to Connect: 657)
• When the following functions are being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Streaming Function]
– [Auto Transfer]
656
 Using Password Authentication to Connect

You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password
authentication through either QR code or manual input.
Scanning QR code to connect

1 Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].
• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup]  [Wi-Fi
Password]  [ON]
2 Display the QR code (C).
• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [New Connection]
 [Control With Smartphone]
• Press or to enlarge the QR code.
(C)

• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
4 Select [ ].
5 Select [Wi-Fi connection].
6 Select [QR code].
7 Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX Sync”.
657
Manually entering a password to connect

1 Display the screen in Step 2 (Scanning QR code to connect: 657).
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX i
3 On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (D) displayed on the camera.
4 (At the first connection) Enter the password (D) displayed on the camera.
(D)
658
 Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings

When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
1 Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.

• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [New Connection]
 [Control With Smartphone]
2 Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network

1 Select [Via Network] and then press or .
• Connect the camera to a wireless access point. ([Via Network]: 685)
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
Connecting directly
1 Select [Direct] and then press or .
• Select [WPS Connection] to connect the camera to a smartphone. ([Direct]:
689)
659
 Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection

To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1 Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.
2 Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [Yes]
3 On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
660
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone

with Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)]. (Fn Buttons: 536)
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 648)
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 649)
• Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image

1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
694)
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
661
Send multiple images

1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
694)
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
or : Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
 Using the menu to transfer easily

[ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
• If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press or to

execute.
• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (Send
multiple images: 662)
• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.

• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos, [Apple ProRes] videos
• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
– [Auto Transfer]
662
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Operating the Camera with a Smartphone
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone

≥ [Remote shooting]: 665
≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: 667
≥ [Import images]: 670
≥ [Auto Transfer]: 672
≥ [Location Logging]: 674
≥ [Remote Wakeup]: 676
≥ [Auto Clock Set]: 678
≥ [Camera settings copy]: 679
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the ( Bluetooth ) symbol require
a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
663
 Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
LUMIX Sync
(A)
(B) (C)
(D) (E)
(A) : App settings (Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 653, Using Password

Authentication to Connect: 657, [Remote Wakeup]: 676)
This allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.
(B) : [Import images] ([Import images]: 670)
(C) : [Remote shooting] ([Remote shooting]: 665)
(D) : [Shutter Remote Control] ([Shutter Remote Control]: 667)
(E) : [Others] ([Camera settings copy]) ([Camera settings copy]: 679,
Streaming Function: 699)
664
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 649, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 655)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1 Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.

2 Start recording.
• The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(F) (G)
(F) Takes a picture

(G) Starts/ends the video recording
• When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically

transfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone. ([Auto Transfer]: 672)
• Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
665
 Operation Method During Remote Recording

Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
[ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup]  Select

[Priority of Remote Device]
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the
screen, and select [End].
• The default setting is [Camera].
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
666
[Shutter Remote Control]
Bluetooth
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
1 Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home

screen.
2 Start recording.
LOCK
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
• Bulb Recording: 668
667
 Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
• Set the camera to [M] mode. (Manual Exposure Mode: 282)
• Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). ([B] (Bulb): 286)
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).

2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
• During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
668
 Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]

You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
• Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. ([Remote Wakeup]: 676)
[ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote Priority]

Shortens the time to return when using [Import images] or [Remote shooting].
[Remote Shutter Priority]

Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter Remote Control].
• To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera, set
[Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] ([Remote Wakeup]: 676)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] ([Auto Transfer]: 672)
• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
669
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via
Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 649, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 655)
1 Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.

2 Select the image to transfer.

• You can switch the card displayed by touching (H).
(H)
670
3 Transfer the image.

≥Select [ ].
• If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of
the screen.
• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using
“LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video
recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality
may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
• It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos, [Apple ProRes] videos
671
[Auto Transfer]
Bluetooth
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
Getting started:
1 Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Auto Transfer]  [ON]
• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate

the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or

[Join] (for iOS devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3 Check the send settings on the camera and then press

or .
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 694)
• Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
672
4 Record with the camera.

•[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
 To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images

[ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Auto Transfer]  Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera
automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth when you turn
on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
• Images are not transferred while the recording screen of the camera is displayed
on the smartphone in [Remote shooting].
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
• Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– Video recording
673
[Location Logging]
Bluetooth
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
• Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
1 Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Location Logging]  [ON]
• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ GPS ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2 Record images with the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded images.
674
• When [ GPS ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information

cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ GPS ].
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
675
[Remote Wakeup]
Bluetooth
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
• [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Remote Wakeup]  [ON]
 Turning On the Camera

Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,
select [Join].
• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
 Turning Off the Camera

1 Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Select [Turn off the camera].
3 Select [Power OFF].
676
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is
running are automatically transferred to a smartphone.
If [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is
resumed when the camera is next turned on.
• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work
even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
677
[Auto Clock Set]
Bluetooth
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Getting started:
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Bluetooth]  [Auto Clock Set]  [ON]
678
[Camera settings copy]
Bluetooth
This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
Getting started:
1 Select [ ] ([Others])  [ ] ([Camera settings copy])

in the “ LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Save or load settings information.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate the “LUMIX Sync”.
• Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.

• When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically
created.
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
• You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as those
in [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 822)
679
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC

Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.15.3 to 10.15.7, 11.0 to 11.7, 12.0 to 12.6, 13.0 to 13.2
Getting started:
• Turn on the PC.
• Create a destination folder for images.
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. ([PC
Connection]: 697)
 Create a Destination Folder for Images

When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
1 Select the destination folder and then right-click.
2 Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
When using Mac (Example for macOS 10.15)

1 Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following order.
[File]  [Get Info]
2 Enable folder sharing.
680
• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to

32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes
non-alphanumeric characters.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or
less alphanumeric characters.
• Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed
setting procedures.
1 Select the method for sending images on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [New
Connection]  [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send
Images Stored in the Camera to PC]
2 Connect the camera and PC by Wi-Fi.

≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 685) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
689), and then connect.
3 Enter the computer name of the PC you want to connect

to (for Mac, the NetBIOS name).
681
4 Select a folder for storing images.

• Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images
will be saved there.
5 Check the send settings and then press or .

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 694)
6 (When [Send Images to PC While Recording] is

selected) Take pictures.
•[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [Yes]
(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC] is

selected) Select an image. (Selecting Images: 695)
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you
set on your PC.
• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the
PC may not be possible.
• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
– [Auto Transfer]
682
 Images That Can be Sent

The images that can be sent depend on the method used for sending
them.
Images that can be sent

[Send Images Stored in the Camera to
[Send Images to PC While Recording]
PC]
JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4/MOV/Apple ProRes
• Depending on the OS version, these may not be displayed correctly.

• Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
683
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
Wi-Fi Connections
≥ [Via Network]: 685
≥ [Direct]: 689
≥ Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 691
≥ Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]: 693
When [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [LAN /

Wi-Fi] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from
either [Via Network] or [Direct] to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from History] or
[Select a destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected
device with the previously-used settings.
684
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access
point.
Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point.
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List] ([WPS

(Push-Button)]: 686, [WPS (PIN code)]: 686, [From List]: 687)
• After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
• Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
685
 [WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection.
Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS
mode.
Example)
 [WPS (PIN code)]

Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access
point.
3 Press or of the camera.
686
 [From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.
• Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to.

• Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again.
• If no wireless access point is found (Connecting by Manual Input: 688)
2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.
687
 Connecting by Manual Input
• Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.
1 In the screen in Step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. ([From List]: 687)
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then
select [Set].
3 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3-SAE]/[WPA2-PSK]/[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[No Encryption]
4 (When other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key and then
select [Set].
688
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the destination device.
Select the method for connecting with the destination device.
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the destination device to connect.
• On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect.
[Manual Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
1 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3]/[WPA3/WPA2]
• If [Wi-Fi Password] in [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], this is not displayed if the
connected device is [Smartphone].
2 Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the device.
• If [Wi-Fi Password] in [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], the password is not
displayed if the connected device is [Smartphone].
Select the SSID to establish a connection. (Connecting to a Smartphone
([Wi-Fi connection]): 655)
689
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
690
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings

Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history.

≥ [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [Select
a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]
2 Select the History item to connect to.

• Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.
 Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history.

• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [Select a
destination from History]
2 Select the History item to register and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated
as two characters.
691
 Editing Items Registered in Favorite

1 Display items registered to Favorite.
• [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [Wi-Fi Function]  [Select a
destination from Favorite]
2 Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.
[Remove from Favorite]
[Change the Order in Favorite]

Specify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order.
[Change the Registered Name]

Enter characters to change the registered name.
• The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register

frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
• When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
• If the device you want to connect to (PC, etc.) is connected to a wireless access
point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using
[Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (Sending Images from the Camera to
a PC: 680)
• It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are connected.
In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
– [Auto Transfer]
692
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]

You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi. (Fn Buttons: 536)
[Terminate the Connection]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending Images]

Sets the image size, file format, and other items for sending recorded images.
(Image Send Settings: 694)
[Register the Current Destination to Favorite]

Registers the current connection destination or method so that you can easily connect
with the same connection settings next time.
[Network Address Display (Wi-Fi)]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera when connecting via Wi-Fi.
([Network Address Display (Wi-Fi)]: 698)
• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
693
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
Send Settings and Selecting Images

≥ Image Send Settings: 694
≥ Selecting Images: 695
Image Send Settings

Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1 After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation

screen will be displayed, so press [DISP.].
2 Change the send settings.
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S], or [VGA])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAW+JPG]/[RAW]
• This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending of RAW
images from this camera. (Images That Can be Sent: 683)
694
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC], select the
images using the following procedure.
1 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].

2 Select the image.
[Single Select] setting

1 Press 21 to select an image.
2 Press or .
[Multi Select] setting

1 Press 3421 to select an image and then press or . (Repeat this)
• To cancel the setting, press or again.
• Images are displayed separately by card slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ].
• Selecting images at once is possible only for the images in a single card.
1 2 3
4 5 6
ュリヴヱハ 2.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
695
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
[LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] Menu

This configures the settings required for the wired LAN/Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed while connected with wired LAN/Wi-Fi.
Displaying the [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] menu.

≥ [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]

This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used
during remote recording. (Operation Method During Remote Recording: 666)
696
[IP Address Setting (LAN)]

Sets the IP address when connecting via wired LAN.
You can select to either automatically allocate the IP address with the DHCP, or set
any static IP address.
[DHCP Server]: Select when the camera is to be connected as the DHCP server.
[DHCP Client]: Select when the camera is to be connected as the DHCP client.
(Default setting)
[Static IP Address]: Select when connecting using an IP set in [Static IP Address
Setting].
[Static IP Address Setting]: Set the IP address to be used in [Static IP Address].
[IP Address]: The default setting is <192.168.0.2>.
[Subnet Mask]: The default setting is <255.255.255.0>.
[Default Gateway]: The default setting is <192.168.0.1>.
Use the correct combinations when setting the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and
[Default Gateway].
• Consult the administrator of the network you are using for detailed information about
the DHCP settings and static IP address settings.
• If you have modified settings in [IP Address Setting (LAN)], turn the camera off and
on again.
[Wi-Fi Password]
When connecting to a smartphone, you can use a password for enhanced security.
(Using Password Authentication to Connect: 657)
• You can change the password by using [Device Name/Password]. ([Device Name/
Password]: 698)
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the same workgroup as the
destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
• To change the workgroup name, press or and enter the new workgroup
name.
• To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
697
[Device Name/Password]
You can change the camera name (SSID) and password.
• Press [DISP.] to change the device name and password.
• The number of characters you can enter is a maximum of 32 for the device name
and between 8 and 63 for the password.
[LAN / Wi-Fi Function Lock]

You can set a password to prevent incorrect operation and use of the wired LAN/Wi-Fi
functions by a third party and to protect personal information that may be found either
in the camera itself or in images recorded with the camera.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it when you select [LAN / Wi-Fi
Setup] or [Streaming].
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
[Network Address Display (LAN)]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera when connecting via wired
LAN.
[Network Address Display (Wi-Fi)]

Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera when connecting via Wi-Fi.
• If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu
to reset the network settings and thereby reset the password.
698
Streaming Function
Live stream the camera’s images and audio over the internet.
There are the following connection methods for streaming:
Wi-Fi connection with an access point such as a router or

smartphone/USB tethering connection with a smartphone
• Streaming can be started with operations on a smartphone or on the
camera.
• Compatible with RTMP/RTMPS*.
You can stream to video sharing websites that support these protocols.
• When a smartphone is used, the camera is connected to the internet via
mobile data communications (4G, 5G, etc.) enabling you to live stream
from locations where a router is not available, when you are out and
about, for example.
Wired LAN connection with a PC

• A wired LAN connection with a PC requires a commercially available
USB ethernet adaptor.
• Operate the streaming software installed on the PC to stream.
• Compatible with RTP/RTSP*.
You can stream to video sharing websites that support these protocols.
* Communication protocol for streaming
699
Streaming Function
• Video cannot be recorded to the cards while using streaming function.

• For information about the tethering function of your smartphone, refer to the
operating instructions of the smartphone and the contract you have with the
cell-phone provider.
Depending on the contract you have, there may be limitations on tethering or it
may incur large additional charges.
• For information about USB ethernet adaptors whose operation has been verified
with this camera, check the following support site. (As of April 2023)
(English only)
≥ Stream by Operating a Smartphone: 701

≥ Stream by Operating the Camera: 705
≥ Stream by Operating the PC: 710
≥ Streaming Settings: 713
≥ Notes When Using the Streaming Function: 721
700
Streaming Function – Stream by Operating a Smartphone
Stream by Operating a Smartphone
Operate the smartphone app “LUMIX Sync” to start streaming. (Supported

protocols: RTMP/RTMPS)
Bluetooth
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 648)
• (When using USB tethering) Confirm that the camera and smartphone are not
connected via USB.
701
1 Set the camera’s recording mode to [ ].

2 Set streaming on the smartphone.

1 Start up “LUMIX Sync”.
2 Select [Others]  [Live streaming] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
3 Select a video sharing website or [Stream with RTMP/RTMPS].
• Select [Stream with RTMP/RTMPS] to enter the streaming destination
address manually.
4 Make detailed streaming settings.
• The setting items depend on the selection made in Step 3. Follow the
smartphone screen to make the settings.
[Connection Method]: Select [Wi-Fi] or [USB Tethering].

• If you select [Wi-Fi], set the wireless access point that the camera will
connect to for streaming.
[Streaming Quality]: Sets the image quality that will be streamed.
[Privacy settings]: Selects privacy setting.
[Stream URL]: Enter the streaming URL acquired from the streaming
service.
[Stream key]: Enter the streaming key acquired from the streaming
service.
5 Select [Set to the camera].
• If the message [Unable to confirm security of the streaming address.
Continue?] is displayed, check that the URL of the streaming destination
is correct before continuing the connecting operation.
• The settings will be sent from the smartphone to the camera.
• [Streaming Function] on the camera turns [ON] and [ ] is displayed on
the recording screen.
• (When using Wi-Fi) The camera connects via Wi-Fi to the access point.
702
3 (When using USB tethering) Set the USB tethering

connection.
1 Connect the camera and the smartphone using a USB connection cable.
(A)
(A) USB connection cable (commercially available)

2 Enable the USB tethering function on the smartphone.
• Select [USB Tethering] (for Android devices) or [Personal Hotspot] (for
iOS devices) on the smartphone.
• If a confirmation message appears on the smartphone screen asking for
permission to enable access by the connected device, grant permission.
Connection is not complete until permission is given.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
703
4 Start streaming.
≥Select [Start streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”.
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s recording screen.
5 Stop streaming.
≥Select [Stop streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”.
6 End the streaming function.

≥If you select [End streaming] on “LUMIX Sync”, the [Streaming
Function] of the camera will be set to [OFF].
• Displays a blue frame on the screen during streaming:

([Streaming Blue Frame Indicator]: 599)
• When you press the shutter button or the video rec. button on the camera to start
streaming, you can record the images being streamed on an external recorder
connected via HDMI:
(Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder: 471)
704
Streaming Function – Stream by Operating the Camera
Stream by Operating the Camera
Sets the streaming destination on a PC and saves it to a card. Insert the

card to the camera and start streaming by operating the camera.
(Supported protocols: RTMP/RTMPS)
SD
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Network Setting Software” to the PC.
(English only)
Supported OS
• Insert a card into the PC.
• (When using USB tethering) Confirm that the camera and smartphone are not
connected via USB.
705
1 Set the streaming destination on the PC.

1 Start up “LUMIX Network Setting Software”.
2 Login to a video sharing website and retrieve a streaming destination
(URL, stream key).
3 Input the streaming destination (URL, stream key) to “LUMIX Network
Setting Software” and select [Next].
4 Set the output destination (card) and file name, and select [Save].
• Characters that can be set in [File Name]: Alphabet (uppercase),
numbers, up to 8 characters.
• To prevent usage from a third party, you can secure the streaming
destination with a password.
– Put a check mark in [Password].
– When you set a password, password input will be required when
loading the streaming destination.
– You can enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• The settings set at step 3 is saved in the card.

3 Insert into the camera the card onto which you have
saved the streaming destination in Step 1.
706
4 Load the streaming destination onto the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Streaming]  [Streaming Setup]  [Save/
Load Streaming Address]  [Load]
1
≥If a password is set at step , input the password.
• The streaming destination address can be displayed and changed.

([Streaming Setup]: 715)
5 Set up streaming settings on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Streaming]
1 Select [Direct] in [Streaming Method].

2 Select [Wi-Fi] or [USB Tethering] in [Connection Method].
3 Select [Streaming Quality] in [Streaming Setup]. (Streaming Settings:
713)
4 (When using Wi-Fi) Set [Wi-Fi Connection Setting] in [Streaming Setup].
(Streaming Settings: 713)
707
6 Set [Streaming Function] on the camera to [ON].

≥ [ ][ ]  [Streaming]  [Streaming Function] 
[ON]
≥If the message [Unable to confirm security of the streaming
address. Continue?] is displayed, check that the URL of the
streaming destination is correct before continuing the connecting
operation.
≥[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
≥(When using Wi-Fi) The camera connects via Wi-Fi to the access
point.
7 (When using USB tethering) Set the USB tethering

connection.
(A)

• Select [USB Tethering] (for Android devices) or [Personal Hotspot] (for
iOS devices) on the smartphone.
8 Start streaming.
≥[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• Operations to start streaming may be needed on the video sharing website.
708
9 Stop streaming.
10 End the streaming function.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Streaming]  [Streaming Function] 
[OFF]

• When you press the shutter button or the video rec. button on the camera to start
streaming, you can record the images being streamed on an external recorder
connected via HDMI:
709
Streaming Function – Stream by Operating the PC
Stream by Operating the PC
Via a commercially available USB ethernet adaptor, connect the camera to

the router/PC with a wired LAN, then use the streaming software installed
on the PC to IP stream. (Supported protocols: RTP/RTSP)
(A) (B) (C) (B)

(A) USB ethernet adaptor (commercially available)
(B) LAN cable (commercially available)
(C) Router
Getting started:
• Install the RTP/RTSP compatible streaming software onto your PC.

710
2 Set [IP Address Setting (LAN)] to the same network as

the PC.
≥ [ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup]  [IP
Address Setting (LAN)] ([IP Address Setting (LAN)]: 697)
• If you have modified settings in [IP Address Setting (LAN)], turn the camera
off and on again.
3 Set up streaming settings on the camera.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Streaming]
1 In [Streaming Method], select [Via PC Software], and set [Connection

Method] to [LAN].
2 In [Streaming Setup], set [Streaming Quality] and [RTSP Port].
3 Set [Streaming Function] to [ON].
4 Connect the commercially available USB ethernet

adaptor to the camera, then use commercially available
LAN cables to connect the camera and the PC to a
router.
711
5 Use your streaming software to start/end streaming.

≥Set the URL as follows in your streaming software:
rtsp://(IP address of this camera)/stream
≥If the [RTSP Port] has been changed from the default setting (554),
set as follows:
rtsp://(IP address of this camera):(RTSP port)/stream
≥When streaming starts, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen
of the camera.
≥For details about operation methods, refer to the operating
instructions of the streaming software.

• When you press the shutter button or the video rec. button on the camera, you
can record the images being streamed on an external recorder connected via
HDMI:
• During IP streaming, just starting “LUMIX Tether” establishes the wired LAN
connection with “LUMIX Tether”, meaning that you do not have to operate the
camera.
(The live view is not displayed on the “LUMIX Tether” screen during streaming.)
712
Streaming Function – Streaming Settings
Streaming Settings
Configures streaming settings.
[ ][ ]  Select [Streaming]
713
Enables/disables the streaming function.
• The settings may not be reflected when the camera is

[Streaming connected to USB devices. Reconnect the USB connection
Function] cable if this occurs.
• Before setting to [ON], set [Streaming Method], [Connection
Method], and [Streaming Setup].
[Direct]: Directly stream from the camera to the live streaming
[Streaming service. (Supported protocols: RTMP/RTMPS)
Method] [Via PC Software]: Use the streaming software on a PC to
stream. (Supported protocols: RTP/RTSP)
[Wi-Fi]*1: Connect to an access point such as a smartphone via
Wi-Fi.
[Connection [USB Tethering]*1: Connect using the USB tethering function of
Method] a smartphone.
[LAN]*2: Use a commercially available USB ethernet adaptor to
connect to a PC with a LAN cable.
[Streaming Make advanced settings for streaming.
Setup] ([Streaming Setup]: 715)
*1 Displayed when [Streaming Method] is set to [Direct].

*2 Displayed when [Streaming Method] is set to [Via PC Software].
714
 [Streaming Setup]
[Streaming Sets the image quality that will be streamed. ([Streaming
Quality] Quality]: 718)
Set the RTSP port number.
[CHANGE]: Change to any number. (Up to 65535)
[DEFAULT]: Set to the default setting (554).
[RTSP Port]*1
• The following numbers cannot be set:
0 to 553, 555 to 1023, 1900, 10669, 10670, 15740, 50001, and
60606
Displays the current streaming destination address.
[Streaming
To change the streaming destination, press [DISP.] first then input
Address]*2
the streaming destination address.
715
Saves the current streaming destination

address to the card.
• If saving new data, then select [New File],
and if overwriting an existing file, select that
existing file.
• When [New File] is selected, a screen to
select the file name to save as is displayed.
[Save] [OK]: Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file name]: Changes the file
name and saves the file.
• Available characters: alphabetic characters
(uppercase), numerals, up to 8 characters
When you set [Password], the screen for
[Save/Load
entering the password (4-digit numeral) is
Streaming
displayed.
*2
Address]
Copy the streaming destination address in the
card to the camera.
[Load] • If you set a password when you saved the
streaming destination address on the card,
the password entry screen is displayed.
Deletes the streaming destination address
[Delete]
within the card.
When formatting the card, you can keep the
[Keep Settings
streaming destination address saved in the
While Format]
card and format.
Select whether to set a password when you
[Password] save the streaming destination address on the
card.
[Wi-Fi Sets the wireless access point the camera connects to when
Connection streaming. To change the destination, press [DISP.]. ([Via
Setting]*3 Network]: 685)
716
*1 Displayed when [Streaming Method] in [Streaming] is set to [Via PC Software].

*2 Displayed when [Streaming Method] in [Streaming] is set to [Direct].
*3 Displayed when [Connection Method] in [Streaming] is set to [Wi-Fi].
• Up to 10 streaming destination addresses can be saved onto one card.

• Set [Wi-Fi Connection Setting] before setting [Streaming Function] to [ON].
• If you forget the password, save the streaming destination address again with a
new password.
717
 [Streaming Quality]
• Video compression format:
– [H.265] streaming quality: H.265/HEVC
– [H.264] streaming quality: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC
• Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Frame rate

(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) [Wi-Fi]
(D) [USB Tethering]
(E) [LAN]

[Image Area of [Connection
Video] Method]
[Streaming Quality] Resolution (A) (B)
FULL APS-C (C) (D) (E)
[H.265/4K/50M/60p]   3840×2160 59.94p 50 — — 
[H.265/4K/25M/60p]   3840×2160 59.94p 25 — — 
[H.265/4K/25M/30p]    3840×2160 29.97p 25 — — 
[H.265/4K/12.5M/30p]    3840×2160 29.97p 12.5 — — 
[H.265/FHD/20M/60p]    1920×1080 59.94p 20 — — 
[H.265/FHD/16M/60p]    1920×1080 59.94p 16 — — 
[H.265/FHD/12M/30p]    1920×1080 29.97p 12 — — 
[H.265/FHD/6M/30p]    1920×1080 29.97p 6 — — 
[H.264/4K/50M/60p]   3840×2160 59.94p 50 — — 
[H.264/4K/25M/60p]   3840×2160 59.94p 25 — — 
[H.264/4K/25M/30p]    3840×2160 29.97p 25 — — 
[H.264/4K/12.5M/30p]    3840×2160 29.97p 12.5 —  
[H.264/FHD/16M/60p]    1920×1080 59.94p 16 *  
[H.264/FHD/8M/60p]    1920×1080 59.94p 8   
[H.264/FHD/6M/30p]    1920×1080 29.97p 6   
[H.264/FHD/3M/30p]    1920×1080 29.97p 3   
[H.264/HD/6M/60p]    1280×720 59.94p 6   
718
[H.264/HD/4M/30p]    1280×720 29.97p 4   

[Image Area of [Connection
Video] Method]
[Streaming Quality] Resolution (A) (B)
FULL APS-C (C) (D) (E)
[H.265/4K/50M/50p]   3840×2160 50.00p 50 — — 
[H.265/4K/25M/50p]   3840×2160 50.00p 25 — — 
[H.265/4K/25M/25p]    3840×2160 25.00p 25 — — 
[H.265/4K/12.5M/25p]    3840×2160 25.00p 12.5 — — 
[H.265/FHD/20M/50p]    1920×1080 50.00p 20 — — 
[H.265/FHD/16M/50p]    1920×1080 50.00p 16 — — 
[H.265/FHD/12M/25p]    1920×1080 25.00p 12 — — 
[H.265/FHD/6M/25p]    1920×1080 25.00p 6 — — 
[H.264/4K/50M/50p]   3840×2160 50.00p 50 — — 
[H.264/4K/25M/50p]   3840×2160 50.00p 25 — — 
[H.264/4K/25M/25p]    3840×2160 25.00p 25 — — 
[H.264/4K/12.5M/25p]    3840×2160 25.00p 12.5 —  
[H.264/FHD/16M/50p]    1920×1080 50.00p 16 *  
[H.264/FHD/8M/50p]    1920×1080 50.00p 8   
[H.264/FHD/6M/25p]    1920×1080 25.00p 6   
[H.264/FHD/3M/25p]    1920×1080 25.00p 3   
[H.264/HD/6M/50p]    1280×720 50.00p 6   
[H.264/HD/4M/25p]    1280×720 25.00p 4   
* This can be set when the streaming destination is RTMP. (Cannot be set when it is
RTMPS.)
719
• Set a streaming image quality (bit rate) appropriate to the communication speed
of your internet connection.
• Images output via HDMI are output with a resolution and frame rate that match
[Streaming Quality].
However, when [Streaming Quality] is set to [HD], the output is in [FHD]
resolution.
720
Streaming Function – Notes When Using the Streaming Function
Notes When Using the Streaming Function

≥ Notes When Using USB Tethering/Wired LAN: 722
• The following functions are not available while you are using the streaming function:
– [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] ([Photo Style])
– [Rec Quality]
– [Rec Quality (My List)]
– [96kHz/24bit], [48kHz/24bit] ([Sound Rec Quality])
– [4ch Mic Input]
– [Segmented File Recording]
– [Live Cropping]
– [Wi-Fi Function] (Wi-Fi connection destination during streaming can be set in
[Streaming Setup].)
– Pairing function of [Bluetooth]
– [Reset]
• The streaming function is not available when using the following functions:
– [HDMI RAW Data Output]
– When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
– During USB connection (PC)
– Tethered recording (except when connected via wired LAN)
• The communication speed depends on the internet connection and the handset, so
we recommend that you perform streaming tests beforehand.
• If you turn the camera off without ending the streaming function, when the next time
the camera is turned on, it is automatically reconnected to the connection destination
that was previously connected.
• The menu screen cannot be displayed while streaming.
• The camera’s recording information will not be displayed on the streamed images.
• The required conditions for streaming differ depending on the video sharing website.
Check the video sharing website for details.
721
Streaming Function – Notes When Using the Streaming Function
Notes When Using USB Tethering/Wired LAN

• When the streaming function is not to be used, set [Streaming Function] to
[OFF].
When set to [ON], if the [Connection Method] is set to [USB Tethering] or [LAN],
power is supplied from the battery of this camera to the connected device, so the
battery will be consumed faster.
• For information about the high temperature display (For information about
the high temperature display: 129)
• The network connection light does not light when connected to the internet via USB
tethering.
• After connecting via USB tethering or wired LAN, when charging the battery in the
camera, make sure that the charging light of the camera lights red.
If the charging light does not light, reconnect the USB connection cable while the
camera is turned off.
722
Connecting to Other Devices
This chapter describes connections with other devices, for example, HDMI
devices, such as TVs, and PCs.
Connect using either the HDMI socket or the USB port on the camera.
≥ Connecting: 724
≥ Viewing on a TV: 726
≥ Importing Images to a PC: 730
≥ Storing on a Recorder: 735
≥ Tethered Recording: 736
723
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
Connecting
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
HDMI socket
Connect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a
commercially available HDMI cable.
(4.9 feet) long).
724
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
USB port
Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC
or recorder.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
725
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
Viewing on a TV
You can connect the camera to a TV or external monitor to view recorded
pictures and videos.
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera and TV.
1 Connect the camera and TV with a commercially

available HDMI cable. (HDMI socket: 724)
2 Turn on the TV.
3 Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4 Turn on the camera.
≥Press [ ].
≥The recorded images are displayed on the camera and TV.
726
• With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)].
([Output Resolution(Playback)]: 621)
• Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI
Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. ([Background Color(Playback)]:
622)
• HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the same
time while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)].
• The audio of video recorded with [4ch Mic Input] set to [ON] cannot be output to
an external device connected via HDMI if the device is not compatible with
4-channel audio or high-resolution audio.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
727
 Using VIERA Link

VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
1 Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link using a

commercially available HDMI cable. (HDMI socket: 724)
3 Turn on the VIERA Link.
• [ ][ ]  [HDMI Connection]  [VIERA Link (CEC)]  [ON]
• Press [ ].
• The recorded images are displayed on the TV. (The monitor and viewfinder of
the camera will turn off.)
5 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link

If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching

If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
728
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function

using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies
are not guaranteed.
• The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with
Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
• Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
729
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
Importing Images to a PC
≥ Copying Images to a PC: 731
≥ Installing Software: 734
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to
the PC.
You will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video
format in order to play back or edit video on the PC.
You can also use software for processing and editing RAW images.
(Installing Software: 734)
730
Copying Images to a PC
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging
files and folders on this camera to the PC.
• The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which
can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
• Mac:
Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”.
For details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and PC.
1 Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection

cable. (USB port: 725)
2 Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
≥Windows: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
≥Mac: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
3 Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
731
 Folder Structure Inside Card
AD_LUMIX
CAMSET (A)
STREAM (B)
DCIM (C)
100XXXXX
(D)
PXXX0001.JPG
(E)
(F)
(G)
(A) The camera’s setup information

(B) Streaming Settings
(C) Images
(D) Folder number
(E) JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
MP4: MP4 videos
MOV: MOV videos, Apple ProRes videos
(F) File number
(G) Color space
P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
732
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 620)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
733
Installing Software
Install the software to process and edit RAW images.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.

 SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE

This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.13 to 10.15, 11, 12, 13
• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Adwaa’s support site.
734
Connecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder
Storing on a Recorder
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and recorder.
• Insert a card into card slot 1.
1 Connect the camera and recorder with the USB

connection cable. (USB port: 725)
2 Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
3 Operate the recorder to store the images.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode] selection
• Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
• Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
• For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions for
the recorder.
735
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
Tethered Recording
≥ Installing Software: 737
≥ Operating the Camera from a PC: 738
≥ Using “LUMIX Tether” with a Wired LAN Connection: 739
≥ Remote Control of Multiple Cameras: 741
If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you
can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera
from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen
(tethered recording).
In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during
tethered recording.
By using a commercially available USB ethernet adaptor, you can use
tethered recording by connecting the camera to the PC via a LAN cable.
Multiple cameras can also be operated remotely this way.
• For information about USB ethernet adaptors whose operation has been verified
with this camera, check the following support site. (As of April 2023)
(English only)
736
Installing Software
 “LUMIX Tether”
This software is for controlling the camera from a PC.
It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then
save the images to the PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
≥ Interface
USB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1))
• Use the latest version of “LUMIX Tether”.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
• For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX Tether”.
737
Operating the Camera from a PC

Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Tether” on PC.
1 Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection

cable. (USB port: 725)
2 Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press or
.
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s screen.
3 Use “ LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
• When there is a PC connection with [PC(Tether)], the following functions are not
available:
– [Streaming]
– [Wi-Fi Function] ([LAN / Wi-Fi])
– [Bluetooth]
738
Using “LUMIX Tether” with a Wired LAN Connection

Getting started:
1 Set the camera as a DHCP server.

Address Setting (LAN)]  [DHCP Server]
off and on again.
2 Set to wired LAN tethering connection.

≥ [ ][ ]  [USB]  [Tether(USB ethernet adaptor)] 
[ON]
3 Connect the commercially available USB ethernet

adaptor to the camera, then use a commercially
available LAN cable to connect the camera and the PC.
(A) (B) (C)

(C) A PC on which “LUMIX Tether” is installed
739
4 Use “ LUMIX Tether” to remotely control the camera.

≥(Initial connection) Set the password to be used to connect from
“LUMIX Tether” to the camera. (Between 8 and 31 characters)
≥[ ] is displayed on the top right of the camera’s screen.
• Reconnect the USB connection cable if there is a problem with operation.
740
Remote Control of Multiple Cameras

A number of cameras can be remotely controlled using “LUMIX Tether”.
Getting started:
1 Set the camera as a DHCP client (default setting).

Address Setting (LAN)]  [DHCP Client]
• If there is no DHCP server in the LAN, it is also possible to make the

connection by setting one camera as [DHCP Server], and the remainder as
[DHCP Client].
off and on again.
741
2 Do the operations in “Using “LUMIX Tether” with a

Wired LAN Connection” from Step 2.
≥Connect the cameras, PC, and router (hub) according to the
diagram below.
For example: When there is a DHCP server in the LAN, and the camera is to be
connected as a DHCP client
(A) (B) (C) (B) (D)

(C) Router (or hub)
(D) A PC on which “LUMIX Tether” is installed
≥You can use “LUMIX Tether” to remotely control multiple cameras.
742
• When a wired LAN connection is not to be used, set [Tether(USB ethernet

adaptor)] to [OFF].
When set to [ON], power is supplied from the battery of this camera to the
connected device, so the battery will be consumed faster.
• When using “LUMIX Tether” with a wired LAN connection, the following functions
are not available:
– [Wi-Fi Function] ([LAN / Wi-Fi])
– [Bluetooth]
• When recording with multiple tethered cameras, we recommend allocating
unique device names to each of the cameras:
[ ][ ]  [LAN / Wi-Fi]  [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup]  [Device Name/
Password]  [Device Name]
743
Materials
This chapter describes procedures to try when there is a problem and
provides information about the specifications for your reference.
≥ Digital Camera Accessory System: 745

≥ Using Optional Accessories: 746
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder Displays: 753
≥ Message Displays: 774
≥ Troubleshooting: 778
≥ Cautions for Use: 793
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time
with the Battery: 803
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time
According to Recording Media: 812
≥ List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying:
822
≥ List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 847
≥ Specifications: 854
≥ Trademarks and Licenses: 872
744
Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
Digital Camera Accessory System

(Product numbers correct as of April 2023.)
Product name Product number

Battery Pack DMW-BLK22
Battery Charger*1 DMW-BTC15
AC Adaptor*2 DMW-AC10
DC Coupler*2 DMW-DCC17
Battery Grip DMW-BGS5
DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,
Flash
DMW-FL200L
LED Video Light VW-LED1
Stereo Shotgun Microphone DMW-MS2
Stereo Microphone VW-VMS10
XLR Microphone Adaptor DMW-XLR1
Shutter Remote Control DMW-RS2
Tripod Grip DMW-SHGR1
Shoulder Strap DMW-SSTG9
*1 Supplied with an AC adaptor, an AC cable/AC mains lead and a USB connection

cable.
*2 The AC Adaptor (optional) can only be used with the designated Panasonic DC
Coupler (optional).
The AC Adaptor (optional) cannot be used by itself.

• For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to
our catalogs/website, etc.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/website, etc.
745
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
Using Optional Accessories

≥ Battery Grip (Optional): 747
≥ Shutter Remote Control (Optional): 749
≥ Tripod Grip (Optional): 751
≥ AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional): 752
• For information on the external flash (Using an External Flash (Optional): 339)
• For information on the external microphone (External Microphones (Optional):
386)
• For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor (XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 391)
746
Battery Grip (Optional)

When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5: optional)
improves ease of operation and grip when the camera is held vertically.
Also, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip provides a stable supply of
power even for long periods of recording.
• The Battery Grip is dust and splash resistant.
• The joystick on the camera body is able to be moved in 8 directions (up, down, left,
right, and diagonally), whereas the joystick on the Battery Grip can be moved in only
4 directions (up, down, left, and right).
 Selecting Battery Usage Priority

Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both
the camera and the Battery Grip.
Getting started:
• Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the battery grip connector.
1 Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.

3 Set the battery use priority.
• [ ][ ]  [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]: The battery in the camera is used first.
[BG]: The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.
747
• When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the

screen.
• You can register functions of your choice to the [Fn] button on the Battery Grip.
(Fn Buttons: 536)
• The [WB] button, [ISO] button, [ ] button, [AF ON] button, and joystick each
work the same as the buttons and joystick on the camera body.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the Battery Grip for details.
748
Shutter Remote Control (Optional)

You can connect the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to use
the camera as follows:
• Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake
• Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst recording
• Start/end the video recording
• Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of the Shutter Remote Control
 Registering Functions to the Video Rec. Button

You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter
Remote Control.
The functions that can be registered are the same as the functions that can
be registered to the Fn buttons for recording (Setting Items ([Fn Button
Set]/[Setting in REC mode]): 542).
[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
[ ][ ]  Select [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
• Register functions using the same operations as [Fn Button Set]. (Register
Functions to the Fn Buttons: 539)
749
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).

• Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.
750
Tripod Grip (Optional)

Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it as a grip for
recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.
• Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).

• The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip.
• Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
751
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)

With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without
worrying about the remaining battery charge.
• Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.

They cannot be used independently of one another.
• When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so the
structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.
After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler cover,
then firmly close the cover.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
752
Materials – Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
≥ Recording Screen: 753
≥ Playback Screen: 769
• The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to
[ ].
Recording Screen
(1) BKT
AWB RAW +
FINE
L AFS GPS Fn3
(2) APS-C Fn4

EXPS
F F
(6)
Fn5 SS SS
(3)
Fn6
OFF
(4) ISO ISO
24m59s Fn7
AEL BKT OFF
(5) 60 F3.5 +1/3 ISO100 999
(1)
Flash mode ([Flash Mode]: 343)
Flash setting ([Flash Synchro]: 349, Recording Using a

WL
Wireless Flash: 351)
AWBc AWBw
White balance (White Balance (WB): 302)/
1
1
Color Temperature (Color Temperature Setting: 307)
2500K
753
BKT White Balance Bracket, White Balance Bracket (Color

AWB Temperature) ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 245)
Adjusting the white balance (Adjusting the White Balance:
AWB AWB
308)
AWBL AWB lock setting ([AWB Lock Setting]: 570)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 310)
Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 323)/

EXPS Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 325)
LUT View Assist ([V-Log View Assist]: 442)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 446)

Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 121), Picture size ([Picture
Size]: 119)
Extended Tele Conversion (Extended Tele Conversion: 204)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 133)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 135)
MOV Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 133)/

4K 420/10-L Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 135)
59.94p Recording frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 135)/

60/59.94p Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
Electronic shutter ([Shutter Type]: 252)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 152, Record Using
AFS AFC MF
MF: 195)
Focus Limiter ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
BKT
AFS Focus Bracket ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 244)
AFL AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
754
MFL Focus ring lock ([Focus Ring Lock]: 575)

Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
FULL APS-C
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 149)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
AF detection setting (Automatic Detection: 173)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)
Connected to Wi-Fi (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and

Bluetooth functions: 645)
Connected to Bluetooth (Connecting to a Smartphone
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 674)
Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 259)
Camera shake alert (Using the Image Stabilizer: 261)
755
(2)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 250)
APS-C Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 149)

Anamorphic Desqueeze Display ([Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]: 449)
LC Live View Composite recording ([Live View Composite]: 246)
Overlay indication ([Sheer Overlay]: 592)
Loop recording ([Loop Recording (video)]: 453)
Color shading compensation ([Color Shading Compensation]:

333)
Streaming function is ON (Streaming Function: 699)
Currently streaming (Streaming Function: 699)
(3)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level

Disp.]: 378, External Microphones (Optional): 386)
Sound recording quality/XLR microphone adaptor setting
([Sound Rec Quality]: 382, XLR Microphone Adaptor
(Optional): 391)
4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 383)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 379)

Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 378)
Exposure meter ([Expo.Meter]: 591)
756
(4)
Histogram ([Histogram]: 586)
AF area (AF Area Operations: 186)
Spot metering target ([Metering Mode]: 270)

Center marker ([Center Marker]: 597)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 234)
Operation lock ([Operation Lock Setup]: 580)
24m59s Elapsed recording time (Basic Video Operations: 124)

Time code (Time Code: 398)
Image being sent ([Auto Transfer]: 672)
(5)
Focus (turns green) (Basic Picture Operations: 114)/

¥ Recording state (turns red) (High Resolution mode: 216,
Basic Video Operations: 124)
LOW
Focus (in low light AF situations) (Low illumination AF: 156)
STAR
Focus (Starlight AF) (Starlight AF: 156)
Flash adjustment ([Flash Adjust.]: 348)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
Program Shift (Program Shift: 274)
757
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 270)

AE
AEL AE Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 114)

F3.5 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 114)
BKT
F3.5 Aperture Bracket ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 243)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:

289)
BKT
+1/3
Exposure Bracket ([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 242)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 295)/
ISO 100
Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
Card/external SSD access indication (turns red) (Basic Video

Operations: 124, Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 481)
Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)/

Double card slot function ([Double Card Slot Function]: 607)/
External SSD (Using an External SSD (Commercially
Available): 481)
No card/external SSD
Card/external SSD full
758
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures

999 That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media: 812)
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
r20
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 213)
24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 813)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 52)
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power/Charging): 50)
Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 747)
(6)
Temperature rise warning icon (Recording: 779)
Fan error warning icon (Others: 792)
Touch Tab ([Touch Settings]: 579)
Fn3
Fn button (Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons): 550)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter (Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 108)
Exposure compensation (Exposure Compensation: 289)
AE
Touch AE (Touch AE: 111)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 200)
759
(Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 326)/ / (Operations During

Video Recording: 363)
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 325)
Filter on/off (Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 326)
EXPS Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 323)

F Aperture value (Operations During Video Recording: 363)
SS Shutter speed (Operations During Video Recording: 363)
Exposure compensation (Operations During Video Recording:
363)
ISO ISO sensitivity (Operations During Video Recording: 363)
Sound recording level adjustment (Operations During Video
Recording: 363)
Slow & Quick setting (Operations During Video Recording:
363)
760
 Control Panel
(1) 1/60 F3.5

ISO 0 0
(2) 0
100
3:2
(3) AFS FINE Fn
(4) 999
AWB 999
(1)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 76)
1/60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 114)

F3.5 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 114)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 52)/
Power supply (Power Supply: 49)
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 52)
(2)
ISO ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 295)/

100 Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
0
0 289)/
Flash setting ([Flash Adjust.]: 348, [Flash Synchro]: 349,
Recording Using a Wireless Flash: 351)/
Flash mode ([Flash Mode]: 343)
761
(3)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 207)

Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 152, Record Using
AFS
MF: 195)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 170)
FINE Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 121)
APS-C Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 149)/

3:2 Picture size/Aspect ratio ([Picture Size]: 119)

L
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the

Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 645)
Fn Fn button settings (Fn Buttons: 536)
762
(4)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 310)
AWB White balance (White Balance (WB): 302)

i.Dynamic Range ([i.Dynamic Range]: 292)
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 270)
Available): 481)
No card/external SSD
Card/external SSD full
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures

999 That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media: 812)
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
r20
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 213)
R24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 813)
---- No card
763
 Control Panel (Creative Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode)

FPS SHUTTER IRIS
(1)
30 1/60 F3.5
(2) 11 3 FULL TC
DF 00:00:00:00 REC
(3) MOV 420/10-L 24m59s OFF

4K 29.97p 24m59s
48kHz/24bit -36 -24 -12 -6 0
(4) CH1 -2
CH2 -6
ISO PHOTO STYLE WB

(5) AUTO
100 AWB
(1)
FPS Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 135)/

60 Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
SHUTTER
1/60 Shutter speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 279)
IRIS
F3.5 Aperture value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 276)
(2)
Exposure mode (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos:

361)
289)/
TC
DF 00:00:00:00 Time code (Time Code: 398)
Recording state (Screen Displays While Video Recording:
REC
126)
764
(3)
MOV 420/10-L
4K 29.97p
Available): 481)
24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 813)

Fan operating mode ([Fan Mode]: 601)
Streaming function is ON (Streaming Function: 699)
Currently streaming (Streaming Function: 699)

Battery indication (Power Indications: 52)/
Battery indication (battery grip) (Power Indications: 52)
(4)

(Optional): 391)

765
(5)
ISO ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 295)/

AUTO
100 Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 299)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 310)/

LUT View Assist ([V-Log View Assist]: 442)/
White balance (White Balance (WB): 302)
766
 Audio Information Display

4ch/96kHz/24bit -36 -24 -12 -6 0
CH1 -2
CH2 -6
(1)
-36 -24 -12 -6 0
CH3 -2
CH4 -6
EXT. GAIN Mute Audio Quality
(2)
STD. OFF 96kHz/24bit
4ch MIC Input Monitor Monitor CH
ON REALTIME CH1/CH2
(1)

(Optional): 391)

767
(2)
EXT.GAIN
STD. Sound recording gain switch ([Sound Rec Gain Level]: 380)
Mute
OFF Sound input mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 379)
Audio Quality
96kHz/24bit Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 382)
4ch MIC Input

ON 4ch microphone input ([4ch Mic Input]: 393)
Monitor
Sound monitoring (Headphones: 394)
REALTIME
Monitor CH
CH1/CH2 Sound monitoring channel ([Sound Monitoring Channel]: 396)
768
Playback Screen
2023.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999

(1) 3 8m30s (2)
GPS
(3)
(4) 60 F3.5 ±0 ISO100

FINE
L (5)
(1)
Playback mode ([Playback Mode]: 525)
Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On

2023.12. 1 10:00
for the First Time): 69)
Card slot (Switching the Card to Display: 491)/
Available): 481)
¿3 Rating ([Rating]: 529)
Video playback (Playing Back Videos: 492)
Protected picture ([Protect]: 529)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 674)

Obtaining information
769
(2)
100-0001 Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 609)

1/999 Image number/Total number of images
9 pic. Number of group images/
9 files Number of files
8m30s Video recording time (Playing Back Videos: 492)
XXmXXs Slow & Quick video (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
XXs
XXmXXs Loop recording ([Loop Recording (video)]: 453)
770
(3)
Playback (video) (Playing Back Videos: 492)
Group images (Group Images: 507)
Time code (Time Code: 398)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 382)
MOV Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 133)/

4K 420/10-L Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 135)
59.94p Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 135)/

60/59.94p Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 419)
FULL APS-C

Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 250)
(4)
Recording information
(5)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 52)

Battery Grip (Battery Grip (Optional): 747)
771
Detailed information display
AFS 1/5
3:2 FINE sRGB

L
STD. 1 5500
ISO 100 0
60 F3.5
0
2023.12. 1 10:00
100-0001
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 57)/External SSD (Using an External
SSD (Commercially Available): 481)
(2) Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First
Time): 69)
(3) Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 609)
(4) Recording information (basic)
(5) Recording information (advanced)
Histogram display
2/5
R
G
ISO 100 0
60 F3.5 B
2023.12. 1 10:00 Y
100-0001
772
Photo Style display
3/5
ISO 100 0
60 F3.5
2023.12. 1 10:00
100-0001
White balance display
1 4/5
5500K
G
ISO 100 0 A B
60 F3.5
M
2023.12. 1 10:00
100-0001
Lens information display
5/5
ISO 100 0
60 F3.5
2023.12. 1 10:00
100-0001
(6)
(6) The focal length corresponding to the angle of view when using a full-frame lens
with the [Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2]
773
Materials – Message Displays
Message Displays
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
 Card
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting.
([Card Format]: 606)
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]

• Use a card compatible with the camera. (Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 25)
[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]

• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
• Insert a different card.
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]

• Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
774
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing

speed of the card]
• The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.
Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (SD Cards That Can Be Used with This
Camera: 26)
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting. ([Card Format]: 606)
775
 Lens
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release
button while lens is attached.]
• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (Attaching a Lens: 61)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached

correctly.]
• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and
the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
 Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used,
contact the dealer.
• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
[The life span of this battery is starting to decline and should be

considered for replacement. To maintain reliability refrain from
using this battery.]
• The battery has deteriorated. Try not to use that battery.
776
 Others
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be
deleted]
• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. ([Card Format]: 606)
[A folder cannot be created]

• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
After formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File])
menu. ([File Number Reset]: 611)
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]

• Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
[The fan is not functioning correctly.]

• The fan has stopped. Turn off and on the camera. If the fan does not work after
turning the camera off and then on again, consult the dealer.
• The temperature of the camera will rise if you continue to use the camera with the
fan stopped. Do not use over long periods of time.
777
Materials – Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
≥ Power, Battery: 778
≥ Recording: 779
≥ Video: 784
≥ Playback: 785
≥ Monitor/Viewfinder: 786
≥ Flash: 787
≥ Wi-Fi Function: 788
≥ TV, PC: 791
≥ Others: 792
First, try out the following procedures.

If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] ([Reset]: 100) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
• [Power Save Mode] is enabled. ([Power Save Mode]: 54)
778
The battery becomes flat too quickly.

• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save
Mode]: 54).
• When [Continuous AF] is set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster. Battery
consumption can be reduced by setting to [MODE1] or [OFF]. ([Continuous AF]:
367)
• When the following functions are being used, power is supplied from the battery of
this camera to the connected device, so the battery will be consumed faster:
– [USB-SSD]
– [Streaming] (when [Connection Method] in [Streaming] is set to [USB Tethering]/
[LAN])
– [Tether(USB ethernet adaptor)] in [USB]
When not using these functions, set them to [OFF]. (Using an External SSD
(Commercially Available): 481, Streaming Function: 699, Tethered Recording: 736)
Recording
Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use
some functions.
• The temperature of the camera rises more readily in the following circumstances:
when the ambient temperature is high, during continuous use such as when
recording high-definition video, outputting via HDMI, or using the streaming function.
When the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If
you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be
used is displayed on the screen and recording, HDMI output, and the streaming
function will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message
indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message indicating that it
can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on again.
* When recording with the camera mounted on a tripod, etc., you can set the
temperature at which recording is stopped to a higher temperature. ([Thermal
Management]: 613)
779
Cannot record images. The shutter will not operate immediately

when the shutter button is pressed.
• If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 573)
The recorded image is whitish.

• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints
or similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor (Dirt on the Image Sensor:
794)
The recorded image is too bright or dark.

• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (Locking Focus and
Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293)
Multiple images are recorded at once.

• When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst Shot 2), pressing
and holding the shutter button will take burst pictures. (Selecting the Drive Mode:
207)
• When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (Bracket Recording: 238)
The subject is not focused properly.

• Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? ([Shutter AF]: 576)
– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 573)
– Is AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 293) set where it is not
appropriate?
– Is [Focus Limiter] set to [ON]? ([Focus Limiter]: 162)
– Is [AF Micro Adjustment] set? ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 166)
780
Cannot focus or zoom with the lens.

• Confirm the following details:
– Is [Focus Ring Lock] set to [ON]? ([Focus Ring Lock]: 575)
The recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not

effective.
• The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
The recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture.

• Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each
item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (Adjusting Image
Quality: 315)
– Set [Long Exposure NR] to [ON]. ([Long Exposure NR]: 256)
• When the camera is used continuously, the temperature inside the camera may rise
and this may cause lower image quality. We recommend turning off the camera
whenever you are not actually recording.
The subject appears distorted on the image.

• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture:
– [ELEC.]
– Video recording
This is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
781
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent

or LED lighting.
• This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter ([Shutter Type]: 252), lowering the shutter
speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be
mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 403), or fix the
shutter speed with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Recording Modes Specifically for
Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 359).
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.

• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 295)
782
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from

the actual scene.
• When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.

• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. ([Pixel Refresh]: 626)
783
Video
Cannot record videos.
• Try again after either returning the [System Frequency] to the original setting or
inserting another card.
• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.

The recorded audio is very quiet.
• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
([Continuous AF]: 367).
• Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.

• We recommend setting the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and recording with touch operation if
you are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (Operations
During Video Recording: 363)
784
Playback
Cannot play back. There are no recorded pictures.
• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
• Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. ([Playback Mode]: 525)
• Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
([System Frequency]: 131)
785
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
([Auto LVF/Monitor Off]: 55) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display
may switch to the viewfinder display.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may

change significantly for an instant.
• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.

• The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may
occur on the screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of
time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
786
Updating of the information display on the screen is sometimes

slow.
• When using functions that put a burden on processing in the camera, updating of the
information display on the screen may get slower, but this is not a malfunction. There
will be no change to the images recorded.
Functions that put a burden on processing in the camera:
60.00p
– HDMI output
– [Streaming]
Information displays that may get updated slower:
– [Time Code Display]
– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
– [Luminance Spot Meter], etc.
Flash
The flash does not fire.
• The flash does not fire when using the following functions:
– Video recording
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]
787
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get
disconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely
affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point

• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (Connecting by Manual Input: 688)
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
788
Cannot connect with a wireless access point.

• The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (Connecting by Manual Input:
688)
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as
well as the status of other wireless devices.
Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.

• Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.
If you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen
of the smartphone to connect.
If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the Bluetooth
connection settings again.
Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.

• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize

the user name and password, and connection is not possible.
• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
789
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The

camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
• At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of
the PC to which to connect. ([PC Connection]: 697)
• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from
those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the
OS.
Transmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be

transmitted.
• Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] ([Size]: 694), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 499).
• File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(Images That Can be Sent: 683)
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

• In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. ([Reset]: 100)
However, all information set in [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
790
TV, PC
The TV images are displayed with gray bands.
• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in
[Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
([Background Color(Playback)]: 622)
Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.

• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. ([USB Mode]: 620)
• Turn the camera off and on.
791
Others
[ ] is displayed on the screen.
• The fan has stopped. Turn off and on the camera. If the fan does not work after
turning the camera off and then on again, consult the dealer.
• The temperature of the camera will rise if you continue to use the camera with the
fan stopped. Do not use over long periods of time.
When the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the

camera.
• The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on
or off, or when the camera is swung. There is a sound from the
lens when recording.
• This is the sound of the internal lenses moving or the aperture operating. It is not a
malfunction.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.

• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
[ ][ ][ ]  Select desired language ([Language]: 627)
The camera becomes warm.

• The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this
does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
792
Materials – Cautions for Use
Cautions for Use

 The Camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then
reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.

If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables
supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.

• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in

contact with the camera for a long period of time.
793
 Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung
wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to
clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel
off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
 Dirt on the Image Sensor

If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the
recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function

The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust
that have affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu,
perform [Sensor Cleaning]. ([Sensor Cleaning]: 627)
794
Removing dirt on the image sensor

The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
• Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.
The blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
 Cleaning the Viewfinder

If the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder
using a commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a soft dry
cloth.
• The eye cup cannot be removed, so make sure it does not come loose when
cleaning the viewfinder.
• If the eye cup accidentally gets removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
 Monitor/Viewfinder
• Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
• Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder
screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light
constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.
Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled
precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
795
 Lens
• When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital
camera.
• Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
• Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the
lens surface.
Before and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of
the lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.
• When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent
dust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
• To protect the lens contact points (A), do not do the following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.
(A)
• To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the interchangeable lens
(S-R2060/S-S50), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this
does not impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
796
 Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on
performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Do not let the battery terminals (B) become soiled.

• Wipe with a dry cloth if they become soiled.
(B)
Always remove the battery after use.

• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects
(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.

• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal

objects (such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
797
 AC Adaptor
• The charging lights may blink under the influence of static electricity or
electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon
has no effects on charging.
• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
 Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight,
or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
798
 Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password
and LAN / Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. ([LAN /
Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 696)
• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other
handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or
indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including
personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have
registered or saved within the camera with [Reset] ([Reset]: 100).
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. ([Reset]: 100)
• Remove the card from the camera.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
799
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card

Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC
data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
 When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time

• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended
humidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)
• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a
closet or a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
 Image Data
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
800
 Tripod
• Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
• When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
• Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera,
or cause the rating label to come off.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.
 Shoulder Strap
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
801
 Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device.
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety
designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the
camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in

countries where it is sold.
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in
countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for
any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted.
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference.
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use.
When using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to use may be
displayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be viewed as unauthorized
access.
802
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and

Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
• The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
• Using a Panasonic SDXC memory card.
• Using a Samsung external SSD.
• The values listed are approximate.
 Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)

When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used
Recording media Number of pictures that can be taken

SDXC memory card 370
External SSD 300
When the interchangeable lens (S-S50) is used

External SSD 300
803
 Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder)


SDXC memory card 370 (1250)
External SSD 300

SDXC memory card 370 (1200)
External SSD 300
• The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time to Sleep] in
[Power Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting]
function works as intended.
(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
804
 Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)

(A) Using an SDXC memory card
(B) Using an external SSD
Continuous
Actual available
available
recording time
recording time
[Rec. File Recording (minutes)
[Rec Quality] (minutes)
Format] media [Image Area of [Image Area of
Video] Video]
FULL APS-C FULL APS-C
[4K/10bit/100M/60p] (A) 90 90 45 45
[4K/10bit/100M/50p] (B) 80 80 40 40
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] (A) 110 100 100 55 50 50
[MP4]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] (B) 90 90 90 45 45 45
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] (A) 130 100 110 65 50 55
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] (B) 110 90 100 55 45 50
805
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2) (A) 80 40

[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2) (B) 70 35
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9) (A) 90 45
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9) (B) 80 40
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)] (A)
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] (B) 80 80 40 40
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)] (A) 90 90 45 45
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] (B) 80 80 40 40
[C4K/60p/420/10-L] (A) 90 90 45 45
[C4K/50p/420/10-L] (B) 80 80 40 40
(A)
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
(B) 80 80 40 40
(A) 100 100 50 50
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
(B) 80 80 40 40
(A) 100 100 50 50
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
(B) 80 80 40 40
[MOV]
[C4K/30p/422/10-I] (A) 100 100 100 50 50 50
[C4K/25p/422/10-I] (B) 90 80 80 45 40 40
[C4K/30p/420/10-L] (A) 100 100 100 50 50 50
[C4K/25p/420/10-L] (B) 90 80 80 45 40 40
(A) 120 110 110 60 55 55
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
(B) 100 90 90 50 45 45
[FHD/120p/422/10-I] (A) 110 110 55 55
[FHD/100p/422/10-I] (B) 90 90 45 45
[FHD/120p/420/10-L] (A) 110 110 55 55
[FHD/100p/420/10-L] (B) 90 90 45 45
[FHD/60p/422/10-I] (A) 120 100 110 60 50 55
[FHD/50p/422/10-I] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
[FHD/60p/420/10-L] (A) 120 100 110 60 50 55
[FHD/50p/420/10-L] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
(A) 120 120 130 60 60 65
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
(B) 100 90 100 50 45 50
806
[5.8K/30p/422 HQ] (A)

[5.8K/25p/422 HQ] (B) 60 30
[5.8K/30p/422] (A)
[5.8K/25p/422] (B) 70 35
(A)
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 70 35
(A)
[5.8K/24p/422]
(B) 80 40
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] (A)
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] (B) 60 60 30 30
[C4K/60p/422] (A)
[C4K/50p/422] (B) 70 70 35 35
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] (A)
[Apple [C4K/25p/422 HQ] (B) 80 70 70 40 35 35
ProRes] [C4K/30p/422] (A)
[C4K/25p/422] (B) 80 70 70 40 35 35
(A)
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 80 80 80 40 40 40
(A)
[C4K/24p/422]
(B) 90 80 80 45 40 40
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] (A) 130 100 110 65 50 55
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
[FHD/60p/422] (A) 130 100 120 65 50 60
[FHD/50p/422] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
(A) 130 120 130 65 60 65
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 100 90 100 50 45 50
(A) 140 120 130 70 60 65
[FHD/24p/422]
(B) 110 90 100 55 45 50
807
Continuous
Actual available
available
recording time
recording time
[Rec. File Recording (minutes)
[Rec Quality] (minutes)
Format] media
[Image Area of [Image Area of
Video] Video]
FULL APS-C FULL APS-C
[4K/10bit/100M/60p] (A) 90 90 45 45
[4K/10bit/100M/50p] (B) 80 80 40 40
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] (A) 110 100 100 55 50 50
[MP4]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] (B) 90 90 90 45 45 45
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] (A) 130 100 110 65 50 55
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] (B) 110 90 100 55 45 50
808
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2) (A) 80 40

[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2) (B) 70 35
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9) (A) 90 45
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9) (B) 70 35
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)] (A)
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] (B) 80 80 40 40
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)] (A) 90 90 45 45
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(L)] (B) 80 80 40 40
[C4K/60p/420/10-L] (A) 90 90 45 45
[C4K/50p/420/10-L] (B) 80 80 40 40
(A)
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
(B) 80 80 40 40
(A) 100 100 50 50
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
(B) 80 80 40 40
(A) 100 100 50 50
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
(B) 80 80 40 40
[MOV]
[C4K/30p/422/10-I] (A) 100 100 100 50 50 50
[C4K/25p/422/10-I] (B) 80 80 80 40 40 40
[C4K/30p/420/10-L] (A) 100 100 100 50 50 50
[C4K/25p/420/10-L] (B) 90 80 80 45 40 40
(A) 120 110 110 60 55 55
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
(B) 100 90 90 50 45 45
[FHD/120p/422/10-I] (A) 110 110 55 55
[FHD/100p/422/10-I] (B) 90 90 45 45
[FHD/120p/420/10-L] (A) 110 110 55 55
[FHD/100p/420/10-L] (B) 90 90 45 45
[FHD/60p/422/10-I] (A) 120 100 110 60 50 55
[FHD/50p/422/10-I] (B) 90 80 90 45 40 45
[FHD/60p/420/10-L] (A) 120 100 110 60 50 55
[FHD/50p/420/10-L] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
(A) 120 110 120 60 55 60
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
(B) 100 90 100 50 45 50
809
[5.8K/30p/422 HQ] (A)

[5.8K/25p/422 HQ] (B) 60 30
[5.8K/30p/422] (A)
[5.8K/25p/422] (B) 70 35
(A)
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 70 35
(A)
[5.8K/24p/422]
(B) 70 35
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] (A)
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] (B) 60 60 30 30
[C4K/60p/422] (A)
[C4K/50p/422] (B) 70 70 35 35
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] (A)
[Apple [C4K/25p/422 HQ] (B) 70 70 70 35 35 35
ProRes] [C4K/30p/422] (A)
[C4K/25p/422] (B) 80 70 70 40 35 35
(A)
[C4K/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 80 80 80 40 40 40
(A)
[C4K/24p/422]
(B) 80 80 80 40 40 40
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] (A) 130 100 110 65 50 55
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
[FHD/60p/422] (A) 130 100 110 65 50 55
[FHD/50p/422] (B) 100 80 90 50 40 45
(A) 130 110 120 65 55 60
[FHD/24p/422 HQ]
(B) 100 90 100 50 45 50
(A) 130 120 130 65 60 65
[FHD/24p/422]
(B) 100 90 100 50 45 50
• Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
810
 Playback (When Using the Monitor)

Recording media Playback time (minutes)

External SSD 190
Recording media Playback time (minutes)

External SSD 190
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary
depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
• If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged,
then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
811
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and

Video Recording Time According to
Recording Media
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on recording media.
 Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken

• The listed values are a guide to the minimum number of pictures to be taken.
This may vary depending on the recorded subject.
• [Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
[Picture Card capacity External SSD capacity

Size] 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[L] (24M) 4490 8890 16880 34930 65760 131540
[M] (12M) 8230 16300 30490 63100 119200 238420
[S] (6M) 14530 28770 52510 108680 190710 381450
• [Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [RAW+FINE]
[Picture Card capacity External SSD capacity

Size] 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[L] (24M) 870 1730 3350 6930 13240 26490
[M] (12M) 960 1900 3670 7610 14550 29120
[S] (6M) 1010 2010 3870 8010 15250 30510
812
Recording Media
 Video Recording Time

• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
• The values listed are approximate.
• [Rec. File Format]: [MP4]

External SSD
Card capacity
[Rec Quality] capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
1h55m 3h55m 7h35m 15h45m 30h45m 61h35m
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 4h55m 9h45m 19h30m 40h30m 78h00m 156h10m

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 1h55m 3h55m 7h35m 15h45m 30h45m 61h35m
813
Recording Media
• [Rec. File Format]: [MOV]

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] 2h45m 5h30m
[4K/60p/422/10-I(H)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(L)] 14m00s 28m00s 54m00s 1h50m 3h40m 7h20m
[4K/60p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[3.3K/30p/422/10-I]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/30p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I] 21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[4K/30p/422/10-I]
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[FHD/120p/422/10-I]
814
Recording Media
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/60p/422/10-I]
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]
[FHD/30p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
815
Recording Media
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
816
Recording Media

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/50p/422/10-I(H)] 2h45m 5h30m
[4K/50p/422/10-I(H)]
[3.3K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/50p/422/10-I(L)]
[3.3K/25p/422/10-I]
[C4K/25p/422/10-I]
21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[4K/25p/422/10-I]
[FHD/100p/422/10-I]
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/422/10-L] 42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-I]
[FHD/25p/422/10-I]
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
817
Recording Media

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[C4K/48p/422/10-I(H)] 2h45m 5h30m
[4K/48p/422/10-I(H)]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[4K/48p/422/10-I(L)]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-I]
[C4K/24p/422/10-I] 21m00s 42m00s 1h20m 2h50m 5h30m 11h05m
[4K/24p/422/10-I]
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L] 42m00s 1h20m 2h40m 5h40m 11h05m 22h10m
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-I]
[FHD/24p/422/10-I]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h35m 14h45m 29h35m
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
1h25m 2h45m 5h25m 11h20m 22h10m 44h20m
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
818
Recording Media
• [Rec. File Format]: [Apple ProRes]

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[5.8K/30p/422 HQ] 1h05m 2h15m
[5.8K/30p/422] 1h40m 3h25m
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h50m
[5.8K/24p/422] 2h05m 4h15m
[3.3K/30p/422 HQ] 2h25m 4h50m
[3.3K/30p/422] 3h35m 7h15m
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ] 3h00m 6h05m
[3.3K/24p/422] 4h30m 9h05m
[C4K/60p/422 HQ] 1h05m 2h15m
[C4K/60p/422] 1h40m 3h25m
[C4K/30p/422 HQ] 2h15m 4h30m
[C4K/30p/422] 3h25m 6h50m
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 2h50m 5h40m
[C4K/24p/422] 4h15m 8h30m
[FHD/60p/422 HQ] 18m00s 37m00s 1h10m 2h30m 4h50m 9h45m
[FHD/60p/422] 28m00s 56m00s 1h45m 3h45m 7h20m 14h40m
[FHD/30p/422 HQ] 37m00s 1h10m 2h25m 5h00m 9h45m 19h30m
[FHD/30p/422] 56m00s 1h50m 3h35m 7h30m 14h40m 29h20m
[FHD/24p/422] 1h10m 2h20m 4h30m 9h20m 18h20m 36h40m
819
Recording Media

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[5.8K/25p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h40m
[5.8K/25p/422] 2h00m 4h05m
[3.3K/50p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h50m
[3.3K/50p/422] 2h10m 4h20m
[3.3K/25p/422 HQ] 2h50m 5h50m
[3.3K/25p/422] 4h20m 8h40m
[C4K/50p/422 HQ] 1h20m 2h40m
[C4K/50p/422] 2h00m 4h05m
[C4K/25p/422 HQ] 2h40m 5h25m
[C4K/25p/422] 4h05m 8h10m
[FHD/50p/422 HQ] 22m00s 44m00s 1h25m 3h00m 5h50m 11h40m
[FHD/50p/422] 33m00s 1h05m 2h10m 4h30m 8h45m 17h35m
820
Recording Media

External SSD
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB 1 TB 2 TB
[5.8K/24p/422 HQ] 1h25m 2h50m
[5.8K/24p/422] 2h05m 4h15m
[3.3K/24p/422 HQ] 3h00m 6h00m
[3.3K/24p/422] 4h30m 9h05m
[C4K/24p/422 HQ] 2h50m 5h40m
[C4K/24p/422] 4h15m 8h30m
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be
shorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File
Recording] or [Loop Recording (video)].
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available video recording time
depend on the recording conditions and the type of recording media.
• [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of pictures
that can be taken is 10000 or more.
• [99h59m] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining video recording
time is 100 hours or more.
• The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
821
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/

Settings Available for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Image Quality]

[Photo Style] [ ]   
[Metering Mode] [ ]   
[Aspect Ratio] [3:2]   
[Picture Quality] [FINE]   
[Picture Size] [L] (24M)   
[Picture Quality] [COMBINED]   
[Picture Size] [XL]   
[High Resolution [Simul Record Normal
[ON]   
Mode Setting] Shot]
[Shutter Delay] [2 SEC]   
[Motion Blur Processing] [MODE1]   
[Long Exposure NR] [ON]   
[Dual Native ISO Setting] [AUTO]   
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
[100]   
[ISO Sensitivity Setting]
(photo)] [ISO Auto Upper Limit
[AUTO]   
Setting]
822
[Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO]   

[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]   
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON]   
[Color Shading Compensation] —  
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]   
[Filter Effect] [OFF]   
[Filter Settings] [Simultaneous Record w/o
[OFF]   
Filter]
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]   
[Detecting Subject] [HUMAN]   
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1]   
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   
[Focus Limiter]
[SET] —   
[AF Assist Light] [ON]   
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]   
[Focus Peaking]
[SET] —   
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST]   
823
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode] [ ]   
[Firing Mode] [TTL]   
[Flash Adjust.] [±0 EV]   
[Flash Synchro] [1ST]   
[Manual Flash Adjust.] [1/1]   
[Auto Exposure Comp.] [OFF]   
[Wireless] [OFF]   
[Wireless Channel] [1CH]   
[Wireless FP] [OFF]   
[Communication Light] [HIGH]   
[Wireless Setup] —   
824
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]

[Bracketing Type] [OFF]   
[Bracketing]
[More Settings] —   
[Silent Mode] [OFF]   
[Operation Mode] [ ]   
[Body(B.I.S.) /
[ ]   
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER]   
[Image Stabilizer]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]   
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]   
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]   
[Lens Information] [Lens1]  
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] [H]   
[Burst Shot Setting]
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] [SH]   
[Shutter Type] [MECH.]   
[Shutter Delay] [OFF]   
[Ex. Tele Conv.] [OFF]   
[Mode] [Time Lapse Shot]   
[Shooting Interval Setting] [ON]   
[Start Time] [Now]   
[Time Lapse/ [Image Count] [1]   
Animation]
[Shooting Interval] [1m00s]   
[Exposure Leveling] [OFF]   
[Create New Folder At
—   
Rec]
[Live View [Start] —

Composite] [Shutter Delay] [OFF]   
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]   
[Self Timer] [ ] to [ ]
[SET] —   
825
[Video]: [Image Quality]

[Exposure Mode] [P]   
[Photo Style] [ ]   
[Dual Native ISO Setting] [AUTO]   
[100]   
(video)] [ISO Auto Upper Limit
[AUTO]   
Setting]
[Synchro Scan] [OFF]   
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF]   
[Master Pedestal Level] [0]   
[SS/Gain Operation] [SEC/ISO]   
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]   
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON]   
[Color Shading Compensation] —  
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]   
[Filter Effect] [OFF]   
[Filter Settings] [Simultaneous Record w/o
[OFF]   
Filter]
826
[Video]: [Image Format]

When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] or
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [MP4]
[Rec. File Format]   
When [System
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[MOV]
[Image Area of Video] [FULL]   
When [System
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]:
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
When [System
[Rec Quality]   
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [4K/
8bit/100M/25p]
When [System
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[Rec Quality (My List)] —   
[Slow & Quick Setting] [30fps]   
[Time Code Display] [OFF]   
[Count Up] [REC RUN]   
[Time Code] [Time Code Value] —
[Time Code Mode] [DF]   
[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF]   
[Luminance Level] [16-255]   
[HDMI RAW Data Output] [OFF]   
827
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]   
[Detecting Subject] [HUMAN]   
[AF Custom [ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   

Setting(Video)] [SET] —   
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   
[Focus Limiter]
[SET] —   
[Continuous AF] [MODE1]   
[AF Assist Light] [ON]   
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]   
[Focus Peaking]
[SET] —   
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST]   
828
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level [ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   

Disp.] [SET] —   
[Mute Sound Input] [OFF]   
[Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD]   
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] [0dB]   
[Sound Rec Quality] [48kHz/24bit]   
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] [ON]   
[Wind Noise Canceller] [STANDARD]   
[Wind Cut] [OFF]   
[Mic Socket] [ ]   
[Special Mic.] [STEREO]   
[4ch Mic Input] [OFF]   
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] [ON]   
[Sound Output] [REALTIME]   
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]  
[Sound Monitoring Channel] [CH1/CH2]   
829
[Video]: [Others (Video)]

[Silent Mode] [OFF]   
[Operation Mode] [ ]   
[Body(B.I.S.) /
[ ]   
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER]   
[Image Stabilizer]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]   
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]   
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]   
[Self Timer] [ ]   
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer For Video] [OFF]   
[Focus Position Setting] —
[Focus Transition Speed] [M]   
[Focus Transition]
[Focus Transition Rec] [OFF]   
[Focus Transition Wait] [OFF]   
[Loop Recording (video)] [OFF]   
[Segmented File Recording] [OFF]   
[Live Cropping] [OFF]   
830
[Custom]: [Image Quality]

[Show/Hide Photo Style] —   
[Photo Style
[My Photo Style Settings] —   
Settings]
[Reset Photo Style] —
[LUT Library] [Vlog_709]  
[ISO Increments] [1/3 EV]   
[Extended ISO] [OFF]   
[Multi Metering] [±0EV]   
[Exposure Offset [Center Weighted] [±0EV]   

Adjust.] [Spot] [±0EV]   
[Highlight Weighted] [±0EV]   
[Face Priority In Multi Metering] [ON]   
[Operation Syncs With
[OFF]   
Shutter]
[AWB Lock Setting]
[Lock Hold With Fn
[ON]   
Button]
[Color Space] [sRGB]   
[Exposure Comp. Reset] [OFF]  
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] [ON]   
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
[ ]   
Comp.]
[White Balance] [ ]   
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.] [Photo Style] [ ]   
[AF Mode] [ ]   
831
[Custom]: [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter [AFS] [FOCUS]   

Priority] [AFC] [BALANCE]   
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF]   
[AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF]   
[AF+MF] [OFF]   
[Focus Ring] [ON]   
[AF Mode] [ON]   
[MF Assist]
[Press Joystick] [OFF]   
[MF Assist Display] [PIP]   
[MF Guide] [ ]/[ ]*1   
[Focus Ring Lock] [OFF]   
[Tracking] [ON]   
[Full Area AF] [ON]   
[Show/Hide AF [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON]   

Mode] [Zone] [ON]   
[1-Area+] [ON]   
[Pinpoint] [ON]   
[Pinpoint AF [Pinpoint AF Time] [MID]   

Setting] [Pinpoint AF Display] [PIP]   
832
[Shutter AF] [ON]   

[Eye Detection Display] [ON]   
[Half-Press Shutter] [OFF]   
[Assign REC to Shutter Button] [ON]   
[Quick AF] [OFF]   
[Eye Sensor AF] [OFF]   
[Looped Focus Frame] [OFF]   
[Enlarged Live [Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]   

Display(Video)] [PIP Display] [PIP]   
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
833
[Custom]: [Operation]
[Layout Style] [MODE1]   
[Front Dial Assignment] [Value]   
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Item Customize (Photo)] —   
[Item Customize (Video)] —   
[Touch Screen] [ON]   
[Touch Tab] [OFF]   
[Touch Settings]
[Touch AF] [AF]   
[Touch Pad AF] [OFF]   
[Cursor] [ ]   
[Joystick] [ ]   
[Operation Lock
[Touch Screen] [ ]   
Setup]
[Dial] [ ]   
[DISP. Button] [ ]   
[Setting in REC mode] —   
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in PLAY mode] —   
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [AFTER PRESSING2]   
[ISO Displayed
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]   
Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
[Exposure Comp. [OFF]   
Down)]
Disp. Setting]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ]   
834
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1]   

[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]   
[Control Dial Assignment] [ ]   
[Dial Set.] [Exposure Comp.] [OFF]   

[Dial Operation Switch
—   
Setup]
[Rotation (Menu
[ ]   
Operation)]
[Joystick Setting] [D.FOCUS Movement]   
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] [Video Record]   
835
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Photo)]

[Duration Time (photo)] [OFF]   
[Auto Review] [Playback Operation
[OFF]   
Priority]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   
[Constant Preview]
[SET] —   
[Histogram] [OFF]   
[Photo Grid Line] [OFF]   
[MODE1] / [MODE2] /
[OFF]   
[Live View Boost] [OFF]
[SET] [M]   
[Monitor] [OFF]   
[Night Mode]
[LVF] [OFF]   
[LVF Disp. Set] [ ]   
[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ]   
[LVF/Monitor Disp. [Horizontal Image
Set] [AUTO]   
Flip(Monitor)]
[Vertical Image
[AUTO]   
Flip(Monitor)]
[Expo.Meter] [OFF]   
[Focal Length] [ON]   
[Blinking Highlights] [OFF]   
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF] 
[Sheer Overlay]
[SET] — 
[I.S. Status Scope] [OFF]   
[Level Gauge] [ON]   
[Luminance Spot Meter] [OFF]   
[Framing Outline] [OFF]   
[Show/Hide Monitor [Control Panel] [ON]   

Layout] [Black Screen] [ON]   
836
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Video)]

[LUT Select] [Vlog_709]   
[LUT View Assist
[V-Log View Assist] [OFF]   
(Monitor)]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]   
[Monitor] [MODE2]   
[HLG View Assist]
[HDMI] [AUTO]   
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]   
[Monochrome Live View] [OFF]   
[Center Marker] [OFF]   
[Safety Zone Marker] [OFF]   
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]   
[Frame Marker]
[SET] —   
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] /
[OFF]   
[Zebra Pattern] [ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]
[SET] —   
[WFM/Vector Scope] [OFF]   
[Color Bars] [SMPTE]   
[Video-Priority Display] [OFF]   
[Red REC Frame Indicator] [OFF]   
[Streaming Blue Frame Indicator] [OFF]   
837
[Custom]: [IN/OUT]
[Info Display] [OFF]   
[HDMI Recording Control] [OFF]   
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON]   
[Enlarged Live Display] [OFF]   
[Fan Mode] [AUTO2]   
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]

[Lens Focus Resume] [OFF]   
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop]   
[NON-LINEAR] /
[Focus Ring [NON-LINEAR]   
[LINEAR]
Control]
[SET] [300°]   
[AF Micro Adjustment] [OFF]  *1 *2
[Lens Info. Confirmation] [ON]   
[Vertical Position Info (Video)] [ON]   
*1 The adjustment value for the focus point cannot be registered.

*2 The settings information cannot be loaded onto a camera different from the one
where the camera settings were saved.
838
[Setup]: [Card/File]
[Card Format] —
[Double Card Slot [Recording Method] [ ]  

Function] [Destination Card Slot] [ ]  
[USB-SSD] [OFF]  
[Select Folder] —
[Folder / File
[Create a New Folder] —
Settings]
[File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link]  
[File Number Reset] —
[Artist] [OFF]  
[Copyright
[Copyright Holder] [OFF]  
Information]
[Display Copyright Info.] —
839
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]

[Sleep Mode] [5MIN.]  
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON]  
[Power Save Mode] [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.]  
[Power Save LVF
—  
Shooting]
[Thermal [Recording Max
[STANDARD]  
Management] Temperature]
[Monitor Frame Rate] [60fps]  
[LVF Frame Rate] [60fps]  
[AFC Live View] [SPEED PRIORITY]  
[Monitor Settings] / [Viewfinder] —  
[Monitor Backlight] / [LVF Luminance] [AUTO]  
[Sensitivity] [HIGH]  
[Eye Sensor]
[LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/MON AUTO]  
[Adjust.] — 
[Level Gauge
Adjust.] [Level Gauge Value
—
Reset]
840
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Beep Volume] [ ]  
[AF Beep Volume] [ ]  
[Beep] [AF Beep Tone] [ ]  
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ]  
[E-Shutter Tone] [ ]  
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3]  
[COMBINED WITH
[Sound Monitoring Channel(Play)]   
REC]
[Streaming Function] [OFF]
[Streaming Method] [Direct]  
[Streaming]
[Connection Method] [Wi-Fi]  
[Streaming Setup] —  *3
[Wi-Fi Function] — 
[LAN / Wi-Fi]
[LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] —  *4
[Bluetooth] — 
[ ] [Select on
[USB Mode]  
connection]
[USB] [USB Power Supply] [ON]  
[Tether(USB ethernet
[OFF]  
adaptor)]
[Battery Use Priority] [BG]  
[Output
[AUTO]  
Resolution(Playback)]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]   
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO]   
[HDMI Connection]
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [OFF]  
[Background
[ ]  
Color(Playback)]
[Photo Luminance Level] [16-255]  
[Network Connection Light] [ON]  
841
*3 [Streaming Quality] and [RTSP Port] settings are saved.

*4 [IP Address Setting (LAN)] setting in [LAN / Wi-Fi Setup] is saved.
However, the IP address set in [Static IP Address Setting] is not saved.
842
[Setup]: [Setting]
[Save to Custom Mode] —  
[Load Custom Mode] —  
[Limit No. of Custom
[3]  
Mode]
[Custom Mode [Edit Title] —  

Settings] [How to Reload Custom
—  
Mode]
[Select Loading Details] —  
[Save] —
[Load] —
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting] [Delete] —
[Keep Settings While
[OFF]  
Format]
[Reset] —
843
[Setup]: [Others]
[Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2023
[Time Zone] *1 
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] /
[System Frequency]  
[50.00Hz (PAL)]*1
[Pixel Refresh] —
[Sensor Cleaning] —
[Language] *1  
[Firmware Version] —
[Approved Regulations]*2 —
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
*2 Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
844
[My Menu]: [Edit My Menu]

[Add] —  
[Sorting] —
[Delete] —
[Display from My Menu] [OFF]  
[Playback]: [Playback Mode]

[Playback Mode] [Normal Play]  
[Slide Show] —  
[Rotate Disp.] [ON]  
[Picture Sort] [DATE/TIME]  
[Magnify from AF Point] [OFF]  
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [OFF]   
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE2]   
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]   
[Behavior After Video Playback] [End Playback]  
[Playback]: [Process Image]

[RAW Processing] —
[Time Lapse Video] —
[Stop Motion Video] —
845
[Playback]: [Add/Delete Info.]

[Protect] —
[Rating] —
[Playback]: [Edit Image]

[Resize] —
[Rotate] —
[Video Divide] —
[Copy] —
[Video Repair] —
[Playback]: [Others]
[Delete Confirmation] ["No" first]  
[Delete All Images] —
846
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each

Recording Mode
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo Style]     
[Metering Mode]    
[Aspect Ratio]     
[Picture Quality]     
[Picture Size]     
[Picture Quality]    
[Picture Size]    
[High Resolution [Simul Record Normal
   
Mode Setting] Shot]
[Shutter Delay]    
[Motion Blur Processing]    
[Long Exposure NR]    
[Dual Native ISO Setting]    
   
(photo)] [ISO Auto Upper Limit
   
Setting]
[Min. Shutter Speed]  
[i.Dynamic Range]    
[Vignetting Comp.]    
[Color Shading Compensation]    
[Diffraction Compensation]    
[Filter Effect]    
[Filter Settings] [Simultaneous Record w/
   
o Filter]
847
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting]    
[Detecting Subject]    
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]    
[Focus Limiter]     
[AF Assist Light]    
[ON] / [OFF]     
[Focus Peaking]
[SET]     
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]     
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode]     
[Firing Mode]    
[Flash Adjust.]    
[Flash Synchro]    
[Manual Flash Adjust.]    
[Auto Exposure Comp.]    
[Wireless]    
[Wireless Channel]    
[Wireless FP]    
[Communication Light]    
[Wireless Setup]    
848
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Bracketing Type]     
[Bracketing]
[More Settings]     
[Silent Mode]     
[Operation Mode]     
[Body(B.I.S.) /
    
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate]     
[Image Stabilizer]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]     
[Boost I.S. (Video)]     
[Anamorphic (Video)]     
[Lens Information]     
[Burst Shot [Burst Shot 1 Setting]     

Setting] [Burst Shot 2 Setting]     
[Shutter Type]     
[Shutter Delay]     
[Ex. Tele Conv.]     
[Time Lapse/Animation]     
[Live View [Start] 

Composite] [Shutter Delay] 
[Self Timer]     
849
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode]  
[Photo Style]       
[Metering Mode]      
[Dual Native ISO Setting]      
 
(video)] [ISO Auto Upper Limit
 
Setting]
[Synchro Scan]  
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]    
[Master Pedestal Level]  
[SS/Gain Operation]  
[i.Dynamic Range]      
[Vignetting Comp.]     
[Color Shading Compensation]      
[Diffraction Compensation]      
[Filter Effect]     
[Filter Settings] [Simultaneous Record w/
   
o Filter]
850
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Rec. File Format]      
[Image Area of Video]       
[Rec Quality]       
[Rec Quality (My List)]       
[Slow & Quick Setting] 
[Time Code Display]       
[Count Up]      
[Time Code Value]       
[Time Code]
[Time Code Mode]       
[HDMI Time Code
 
Output]
[Luminance Level]       
[HDMI RAW Data Output] 
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Detection Setting]      
[Detecting Subject]      
[AF Custom [ON] / [OFF]       

Setting(Video)] [SET]       
[Focus Limiter] [OFF]       
[Continuous AF]       
[AF Assist Light]      
[ON] / [OFF]       
[Focus Peaking]
[SET]       
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]       
851
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]       
[Mute Sound Input]       
[Sound Rec Gain Level]       
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]       
[Sound Rec Quality]      
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]       
[Wind Noise Canceller]       
[Wind Cut]       
[Mic Socket]       
[Special Mic.]       
[4ch Mic Input]       
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]       
[Sound Output]       
[Headphone Volume]       
[Sound Monitoring Channel]       
852
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Silent Mode]       
[Operation Mode]       
[Body(B.I.S.) /
      
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate]     
[Image Stabilizer]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]      
[Boost I.S. (Video)]       
[Anamorphic (Video)]       
[Lens Information]       
[Self Timer]       
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer For Video]       
[Focus Transition] 
[Loop Recording (video)] 
[Segmented File Recording]       
[Live Cropping] 
853
Materials – Specifications
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-S5M2X):

Information for your safety
Power source:
9.0 V
Power consumption:
4.9 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.9 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]
5.0 W (when recording with the monitor), 4.0 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-S50)]
Type
≥ Type
Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
≥ Lens mount
Leica Camera AG L-Mount
≥ Recording media
SD memory card / SDHC memory card*1 / SDXC memory card*1
*1 Compliant with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, UHS-II Video Speed Class
90
Double slot recording function is available.
854
Image sensor
≥ Image sensor
35 mm full-frame (35.6 mm×23.8 mm) CMOS sensor, a total of 25,280,000 pixels,
primary color filter
≥ Effective number of pixels of the camera
24,200,000 pixels
Latitude
14+ stops ([V-Log])
Recording format for still images

≥ File format for still images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW
≥ Picture size (pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5328×4000 (3536×2656)*2
[M]: 3792×2848 (2560×1920)*2
[S]: 2688×2016 (1840×1376)*2
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 10656×8000
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 7552×5664
[L]: 6000×4000 (3984×2656)*2
[M]: 4272×2848 (2880×1920)*2
[S]: 3024×2016 (2064×1376)*2
855

[L]: 6000×3368 (3984×2240)*2
[M]: 4272×2400 (2880×1624)*2
[S]: 3024×1704 (1920×1080)*2
[L]: 4000×4000 (2656×2656)*2
[M]: 2848×2848 (1920×1920)*2
[S]: 2016×2016 (1376×1376)*2
[L]: 6000×2208
[L]: 6000×3000
*2 Figures in parentheses are for APS-C lenses
≥ Image quality for pictures
Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW
856
Recording format for video

≥ Video format
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC, Apple ProRes)
≥ Audio compression format
MP4: AAC (2ch, 48 kHz/16 bit)
MOV: LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)*3
*3 LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit and 4ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)
is available for selection when an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1:
optional) is attached
≥ System frequency
59.94 Hz / 50.00 Hz / 24.00 Hz
≥ Image quality for video
Refer to the “[Rec Quality]” pages for information about resolution, recording frame
rate, and other elements of recording quality. ([Rec Quality]: 135)
857
≥ S&Q (Slow & Quick)

When [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/30p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L] / [C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/30p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/30p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/25p/420/10-L]*4
[C4K/25p/420/10-L] / [4K/25p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]*4 / [FHD/25p/420/10-L]*4
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4
[C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]*4
*4 There is cropping for 151 fps or more
858
Viewfinder
≥ Type
Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.5 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots, organic EL (OLED) live view
viewfinder
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
≥ Magnification
Approx. 0.78× (−1.0 m−1 50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [3:2])
≥ Eye point
Approx. 21 mm (at −1.0 m−1)
≥ Diopter adjustment range
−4.0 to +2.0 diopter
≥ Eye sensor
Yes
Monitor
≥ Type
Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
859
Focus
≥ AF type
TTL type based on image detection (image plane phase detection AF/contrast AF)
≥ Focus mode
AFS / AFC / MF
≥ AF mode
Tracking*5 / Full Area AF*5 / Zone (Horizontal/Vertical)*5 / Zone*5 /
1-Area+Supplementary*5 / 1-Area*5 / Pinpoint
Focus area selection is possible by touching or with the joystick
*5 Automatic detection (HUMAN, FACE/EYE, ANIMAL+HUMAN) can be switched
ON/OFF
≥ AF Micro Adjustment
Yes (All / Adjust By Lens)
Exposure control
≥ Light metering system, Light metering mode
1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering /
highlight-weighted metering
≥ Metering range
EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
≥ Exposure
Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual
Exposure (M)
≥ Exposure compensation
1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV
≥ ISO sensitivity for still images (standard output sensitivity)
Normal: AUTO / 50*6 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*6 / 204800*6
[V-Log]: AUTO / 320*6 / 640 to 51200
*6 When [Extended ISO] is set
• Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
860
≥ ISO sensitivity for video (standard output sensitivity)

Normal: AUTO / 50*7 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*7 / 204800*7
[V-Log]: AUTO / 320*7 / 640 to 51200
HLG: AUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400*7 / 204800*7
• Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
≥ Dual Native ISO setting
Normal:
[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 100 / 640 (dB display values are based on 100)
AUTO / 50*8 / 100 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 100
AUTO / 50*8 / 100 to 800
[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 640
AUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
[V-Log]:
AUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 51200
AUTO / 320*8 / 640 to 5000
AUTO / 2000*8 / 4000 to 51200
HLG:
AUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
AUTO / 400 to 3200
AUTO / 2500 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
861
Cinelike D2/Cinelike V2:

AUTO / 100*8 / 200 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
AUTO / 100*8 / 200 to 1600
AUTO / 640*8 / 1250 to 51200 / 102400*8 / 204800*8
Image stabilizer
≥ Image stabilizer type
Compliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer, Dual I.S.2
≥ Image stabilizer effect
In-body image stabilizer: 5.0 stops
[Focal length f=60 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]
Dual I.S.2: 6.5 stops
[Focal length f=200 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-E70200)]
(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)
862
White balance
≥ White balance mode
AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash / Set
mode 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
AWB lock supported
Shutter
≥ Type
Focal-plane shutter
≥ Shutter speed
Pictures:
Mechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a
second
Electronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/2000 of a
second
Electronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/8000 of a
second
Videos:
1/25*9 of a second to 1/16000 of a second
*9 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video mode and focus mode is
set to [MF], this can be set up to 1/2 of a second
≥ Flash synchronization speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/250 of a second*10
*10 The guide number decreases at 1/250 of a second, only during [S]/[M] modes
863
Burst recording
≥ Mechanical shutter / Electronic front curtain
High speed: 9 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 7 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 5 frames/second
Low speed: 2 frames/second
≥ Electronic shutter
[SH]: 30 frames/second
High speed: 9 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 8 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 5 frames/second
Low speed: 2 frames/second
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (SH burst recording)
[FINE] / [STD.] / [RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 200 frames
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (High speed, medium speed, low
speed)
[FINE] / [STD.]: 300 frames or more
[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 200 frames or more
• Using an SDXC memory card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3
(When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)
Zoom
≥ Extended Tele Conversion (Picture)
Max. 2.0×*11 (when a picture size of [S] is selected.)
*11 Max. 1.9× when using APS-C lenses
Microphone / Speaker
≥ Microphone
Stereo
≥ Speaker
Monaural
864
Interface
≥ USB
USB Type-C®, SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps (USB 3.2 Gen 2)
Supports USB Power Delivery (9.0 V/3.0 A)
Output: DC 5 V, 900 mA
≥ HDMI
HDMI Type A
≥ [REMOTE]
‰2.5 mm jack
≥ [MIC]
‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Mic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input (Operate the menu to switch
between these inputs)
Standard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input) / −10 dBV (Line Input)
≥ Headphones
‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Splash Resistant
Yes
Output of RAW video data via HDMI

Yes
Recording to an external SSD

Yes
Streaming
≥ Wireless IP streaming
Supported protocols: RTMP/RTMPS
≥ USB tethering with a smart device
Supported protocols: RTMP/RTMPS
≥ Wired IP streaming
Supported protocols: RTP/RTSP
865
External dimensions / Mass (Weight)

≥ External dimensions
Approx. 134.3 mm (W)×102.3 mm (H)×90.1 mm (D)
(5.29″ (W)×4.03″ (H)×3.55″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 740 g/1.64 lb (camera body, with battery and one card)
Approx. 657 g/1.45 lb (only camera body)
≥ Recommended operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
866
Wi-Fi
≥ Compliance standard
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
Specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was
purchased.
Refer to the “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>”
(supplied) for details.
≥ Encryption method
Wi-Fi compliant WPA™ / WPA2™ / WPA3™
≥ Access method
Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth
≥ Compliance standard
Bluetooth v5.0, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the

following:
AC
DC
Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
867
35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:

S-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”
≥ Mount
≥ Focal length
f=20 mm to 60 mm
≥ Lens construction
11 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lenses, 3 ED lenses, 1 UHR lens)
≥ Aperture type
9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22
≥ Angle of view
94o (Wide) to 40o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.15 m (0.49 feet) to ¶ (Wide to focal length 26 mm) / 0.4 m (1.31 feet) to ¶ (Tele)
(from the focus distance reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.43× (focal length 26 mm)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
No
868
≥ Filter diameter
67 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰77.4 mm (3.0″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 87.2 mm (3.4″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 350 g (0.77 lb)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
10 %RH to 80 %RH
869
35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:

S-S50 “LUMIX S 50mm F1.8”
≥ Mount
≥ Focal length
f=50 mm
≥ Lens construction
9 elements in 8 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens, 1 UHR lens)
≥ Aperture type
9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F1.8
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22
≥ Angle of view
47o
≥ In focus distance
0.45 m (1.48 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.14×
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
No
870
≥ Filter diameter
67 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰73.6 mm (2.9″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 82.0 mm (3.2″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 300 g (0.66 lb)
≥ Dust and splash resistant

Yes
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
10 %RH to 80 %RH
871
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
Trademarks and Licenses

• L-Mount is a trademark or registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
• USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
• The USB Type-C® Charging Trident Logos are trademarks of USB Implementers
Forum, Inc.
• The SuperSpeed USB 10Gbps Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB

Implementers Forum, Inc.
872
• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.

• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• Apple, Final Cut Pro, Mac, macOS, and ProRes are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
873
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Holdings Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
• “Wi-Fi®” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
• “WPA™”, “WPA2™”, and “WPA3™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
• Ninja V+ / Ninja V / ATOMOS are registered trademarks of ATOMOS Pty Ltd.
• ‘Blackmagic Design’ is a registered trademark of Blackmagic Design Pty. Ltd.
• Samsung is the registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
874
This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL
V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version
2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/
or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to
the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET] 
[Setup]  [Others]  [Firmware Version]  [Software info].
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third
party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more
than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or
LGPL V2.1, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: oss-cd-request@gg.jp.panasonic.com
The source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website
below.
https://panasonic.net/cns/oss/index.html
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video
in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from
a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,
L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
875
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying
documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and
batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in
accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health
and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact
your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In
this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
876
Firmware Update
≥ Firmware Ver. 1.3: F-3
≥ Firmware Ver. 2.0: F-14
A firmware update has been made available to improve camera

capabilities and to add functionality.
The subsequent sections describe functions that have been added or
modified.
• To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Firmware Version] in the
[Setup] ([Others]) menu.
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
(English only)
F-1
Firmware Update
About Applications/Software
When you have updated the firmware for the camera, use the latest
version of the application for your smartphone or the software for your PC.
“LUMIX Sync”
• Install or update the application on your smartphone.
“LUMIX Tether”
• Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
F-2
Firmware Ver. 1.3
≥ [AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added: F-4
≥ High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced: F-6
≥ MF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been Added: F-9
≥ Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-10
≥ Added Menus: F-12
F-3
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – [AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added
[AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been

Added
This magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ]. (In

other AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)
You can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto
lens.
1 Register [AF-Point Scope] to the Fn button. (Fn

Buttons: 536)
2 Press and hold the Fn button set in Step 1.
≥While pressing the button, the focus point is enlarged.
• When the screen is enlarged, pressing the shutter button halfway re-acquires
focus in a small central AF area.
• When the screen is enlarged, turn or to adjust the magnification.
Use for more detailed adjustments.
F-4
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – [AF-Point Scope] Function Has Been Added
• When the screen is enlarged, [AFC] changes to [AFS].

• When the following function is being used, AF-Point Scope does not work:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
 [AF-Point Scope Setting]

Changes the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope.
[ ][ ]  Select [AF-Point Scope Setting]
[Keep Enlarged Setting this to [ON] maintains the enlarged screen after pressing
Display] the Fn button until it is pressed again.
Sets the display method (full screen mode*1/windowed mode*2)
of the enlarged screen.
[PIP Display]
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 10×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
F-5
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – High Resolution Mode Function Has Been Enhanced
High Resolution Mode Function Has Been

Enhanced
≥ Support for Long Exposure Recording: F-6
≥ [Handheld High-Res] Has Been Added to the High Resolution Mode: F-7
Support for Long Exposure Recording

It is now possible to set shutter speeds up to 8 seconds in the High
Resolution mode.
This means that it is now also possible to use [Long Exposure NR].
• Settings in the High Resolution mode change as follows:

– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [OFF])/
[ELEC.+NR] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [ON])
– Shutter speed: 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second
F-6
[Handheld High-Res] Has Been Added to the High

Resolution Mode
The image stabilizer works when [Handheld High-Res] is set to on and you
can record pictures with higher resolution even without using a tripod.
1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ] (High resolution).

2 Set [Handheld High-Res].
≥ [ ][ ]  [High Resolution Mode Setting] 
[Handheld High-Res]  [ON]
[Handheld High-Res]
You can record without using a tripod. Turn on the image stabilizer function.
• When [OFF], the image stabilizer function is not available.
• When [ON], [Motion Blur Processing] is fixed to [MODE2].
3 Close the menu.

• The High Resolution mode icon (during handheld recording) [ ] is

displayed.

place.
5 Start recording.
F-7
• Hold the camera firmly during handheld recording so that the camera does not
shake. Recording may fail if there is a lot of shaking.
• Image merging can take a long time with handheld recording.
• When [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON], [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer]
changes to [ ] ([Normal]).
• When you have attached a lens that has an image stabilizer function that
supports panning, the image stabilizer on the lens also switches to normal mode
when [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON].
F-8
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – MF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been Added
MF Assist Magnification Setting Has Been

Added
It is now possible to magnify the full screen mode display in MF Assist up

to approx. 20 times when recording pictures.
The maximum magnification rate can be selected in a menu.
 [ ]  [ ]  [MF Assist]  Select [Max.

Magnification in "FULL"]
[6x]
Full screen display can be enlarged up to approx. 6 times.
The area that can be enlarged is broader.
[20x]
Full screen display can be enlarged up to approx. 20 times.
The quality of the enlarged image improves, but the area that can be enlarged is
reduced.
• The magnification rate becomes up to 6 times in the following cases:

–[ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– When [Enlarged Live Display] in [HDMI Rec Output] is set to [OFF] during
HDMI output
– During the windowed mode of enlarged display
F-9
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
Additions/Changes to Other Functions

≥ [Luminance Spot Meter]/[Zebra Pattern] Units Display Has Been
Changed: F-10
≥ [AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-11
≥ [AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Lens Fn Button Setting]: F-11
[Luminance Spot Meter]/[Zebra Pattern] Units

Display Has Been Changed
 [Luminance Spot Meter]
When [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], measurement is with the
“Stop” units when a LUT file has not been applied and with “%” units when
a LUT file has been applied.
 When [BASE/RANGE] Is Selected with [SET] in [Zebra

Pattern]
When [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], settings are made with the
“Stop” units when a LUT file has not been applied and with “%” units when
a LUT file has been applied.
F-10
[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Fn Button

Set]
[AF-Point Scope] can be assigned to an Fn button.
[ ][ ]  [Fn Button Set]  Select [Setting in

REC mode]
[1] tab
[Focus/Shutter]
• [AF-Point Scope]
[AF-Point Scope] Has Been Added to [Lens Fn

Button Setting]
You can assign [AF-Point Scope] to the focus button of an interchangeable
lens.
[ ][ ]  [Lens Fn Button Setting]  Select

[AF-Point Scope]
F-11
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – Added Menus
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
 List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available

for Copying
mode

[High Resolution
[Handheld High-Res] [OFF]   
Mode Setting]
[Max. Magnification in
[MF Assist] [6x]   
"FULL"]
[AF-Point Scope [Keep Enlarged Display] [OFF]   

Setting] [PIP Display] [PIP]   
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop]   
F-12
 List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording

Mode
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[High Resolution
[Handheld High-Res]    
Mode Setting]
F-13
Firmware Ver. 2.0
≥ Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added: F-15
≥ Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud: F-20
≥ SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added: F-29
≥ Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced: F-34
≥ Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced: F-40
≥ Additions/Changes to Other Functions: F-42
≥ Added Menus: F-45
F-14
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been Added
Video Proxy Recording Function Has Been

Added
During video recording, a proxy video with a low bit rate can also be
recorded simultaneously.
The size is small so it is suitable for data transmission, such as uploading
to the cloud. It is also less demanding on your PC during editing.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec. File Format]

proxy video.
≥ [ ][ ]  [Rec Quality]
• Items available for recording with proxy video are indicated as [Proxy
available].
3 Make proxy recording settings.

≥ [ ][ ]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  [Proxy
Recording]  [ON]
F-15
≥ The original video set in [Rec Quality] is recorded to card slot 1 and the
proxy video is recorded to card slot 2.
≥ During playback, the original video is indicated with [ ] and the proxy
video is indicated with [ ].
F-16
• You cannot change the recording destination for proxy videos.

• [Proxy Recording] is not available if a card is not inserted in one of the recording
destinations.
• When [USB-SSD] is set to [ON], the original video is recorded to the external
SSD. Set [USB-SSD] to [OFF] to play back the proxy video.
• If a lack of space on a card, etc., causes recording of the original video to stop
after recording has started, [Proxy Recording] also stops. If recording of the
proxy video stops first, recording of the original video continues.
• [Proxy Recording] is not available with the following recording media
combinations:
– SD/SDHC memory cards and SDXC memory cards
– SD/SDHC memory cards and external SSDs
• When the following functions are being used, [Proxy Recording] is not available:
– [MP4] ([Rec. File Format])
– [Rec Quality] with [4:3] or [3:2] aspect ratio
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video
– [HDMI RAW Data Output]
– [Streaming]
• The following functions are not available while you are using [Proxy Recording]:
– [Double Card Slot Function]
• The following functions are not available when recording proxy video:
– Fn buttons registered with [Photo Style] and [Apply LUT]
F-17
 Setting the Proxy Recording Quality

[ ][ ]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  Select
[Proxy Rec. Quality]
(A) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[Proxy Rec. YUV, Bit Bit rate (Mbps)

Resolution (A)
Quality] value 60p 50p 30p 25p 24p
[H] 1980×1080 4:2:0 10bit 16 16 12 12 12 HEVC
[M] 1980×1080 4:2:0 10bit 9 9 6 6 6 HEVC
[L] 1280×720 4:2:0 8bit 6 6 4 4 4 AVC
• The bit rate (Mbps) is a value for the images only. There is variation depending on
the audio recorded.
• The frame rate is the same as the original video.
• The aspect ratio is fixed to [16:9]. When the original video is [17:9], black bands are
added to the top and bottom of the screen.
• Audio is fixed to LPCM, 48 kHz/16 bit. The number of channels is the same as the
original video.
 Save Destination for Proxy Videos

Proxy videos are saved to the [xxx_PRXY] folder in card slot 2.
≥ The proxy video file name is the same as the original video.
F-18
 Applying LUT Files to Proxy Videos

This can be set when [Photo Style] is [REAL TIME LUT] or My Photo Style.
[ ][ ]  [Proxy Recording Settings]  Select

[Real Time LUT(Proxy)]
≥ When [Photo Style] is [REAL TIME LUT] or if a LUT file is applied in My

Photo Style, this is fixed to [ON].
F-19
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Compatible with Frame.io Camera to Cloud

By connecting the camera to the internet via Wi-Fi, you can upload still
images and proxy videos directly to the Frame.io platform.
* This does not guarantee all of the functions of “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”.
≥ Connecting with Frame.io: F-21

≥ [Send Images to Frame.io]: F-26
≥ [Upload Setup]: F-27
F-20
Connecting with Frame.io

[ ][ ]  [Frame.io]  [Frame.io Connection] 
Select [ON]
≥ Perform [Wi-Fi Connection Setting] and [Pairing(Frame.io)] when

connecting for the first time.
[Wi-Fi Connection Setting]

Select [New connection] and connect via Wi-Fi to the access point.
[Pairing(Frame.io)]
A pairing code is displayed on the camera.
Log into Frame.io from a PC, etc., and enter the pairing code in the device registration
screen.
• This can also be set by selecting [Frame.io Connection]  [SET] 
[Pairing(Frame.io)].
F-21
• You can view the [Status] in relation to Frame.io in the [Frame.io] menu screen.
– [NOT CONNECTED]: Connection with Frame.io not started
– [CONNECTING]: Currently trying to connect with Frame.io (incomplete)
– [CONNECTED]: Connection with Frame.io completed
– [CONNECTED(PAUSED)]: Camera connection has been paused on the Frame.io
site
• The user name ([User]) and project name ([Project]) are displayed on the camera
when the connection is completed.
• If connection with Frame.io fails repeatedly (authentication failure), try the pairing
setting procedure again.
• If it is not possible to connect with Frame.io, check the connection method and
then try setting [Frame.io Connection] to [ON] again.
• Depending on the status of the camera, connections may be temporarily
interrupted or it may take some time to transfer images.
• When the following functions are being used, [Frame.io] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
– [Streaming]
– [USB]
• When [Frame.io Connection] is set to [ON], the following functions are not
available:
– [Auto Transfer]/[Send Image (Smartphone)]/[Pairing] ([Delete])/[Wi-Fi network
settings] ([Bluetooth])
– [Wi-Fi Function]
– [Streaming]
– [Video Repair]
F-22
 Changing the Connection Method

[ ][ ]  [Frame.io]  [Connection Setup] 
Select [Connection Method]
[Wi-Fi]
Connect to an access point via Wi-Fi.
[USB Tethering]
Connect using the USB tethering function of a smartphone.
• When a smartphone is used, the camera is connected to the internet via
mobile data communications (4G, 5G, etc.) enabling you to connect with
Frame.io from locations where a router is not available, when you are out
and about, for example.
(A)

• Select [USB Tethering] (for Android devices) or [Personal Hotspot] (for iOS
devices) on the smartphone.
≥ If the connection method is changed while connected with Frame.io, the

connection with Frame.io is temporarily broken, and then it is
reestablished after the change.
F-23
Notes When Using USB Tethering

• For information about the tethering function of your smartphone, refer to the
operating instructions of the smartphone and the contract you have with the
cell-phone provider.
Depending on the contract you have, there may be limitations on tethering or it
may incur large additional charges.
• Set [Frame.io Connection] to [OFF] if you are not going to connect with
Frame.io.
When set to [ON], if the [Connection Method] is set to [USB Tethering], power is
supplied from the battery of this camera to the connected device, so the battery
will be consumed faster.
• For information about the high temperature display
When the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen.
If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot
be used is displayed on the screen and some functions, such as recording and
HDMI output, will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the
message indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message
indicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on
again.
• The network connection light does not light when connected to the internet via
USB tethering.
• After connecting via USB tethering, when charging the battery in the camera,
make sure that the charging light of the camera lights red.
If the charging light does not light, reconnect the USB connection cable while the
camera is turned off.
F-24
 Changing the Wi-Fi Connection Destination

Change the access point, etc., while connected to Frame.io.
[ ][ ]  [Frame.io]  [Connection Setup] 

Select [Wi-Fi Connection Setting]
≥ Press [DISP.] to reselect the connection destination.
 Disconnecting from Frame.io

Select [OFF]
≥ The upload queue is not cleared even if you break the connection (Wi-Fi)
with Frame.io.
 Unpairing (Frame.io)
[SET]  Select [Delete]
≥ This deletes the information for pairing with Frame.io and breaks the
connection (Wi-Fi) with Frame.io.
≥ The upload queue is cleared.
F-25
[Send Images to Frame.io]

When [Frame.io Connection] is set to [ON], the images to upload can be
reserved manually.
[ ][ ]  [Frame.io]  Select [Send Images to
Frame.io]
≥ You also can display the screen for selecting images by pressing the Fn
button which has been assigned [Send Images to Frame.io].
≥ The images filtered by [Upload File Format] in [Upload Setup] are
displayed.
6HQG,PDJHVWR)UDPHLR
ュリヴヱハ 2.
• Press 21 to select the images and press to add check marks.

• Images are added to the end of the upload queue when you press
[DISP.].
• During playback, images reserved for transfer are indicated with [ ]
and images already transfered are indicated with [ ].
F-26
[Upload Setup]
Make settings related to uploading of images.
[ ][ ]  [Frame.io]  Select [Upload Setup]
[Auto Upload to Queue]

When set to [ON], images are added to the Frame.io upload queue as they are
recorded.
[Upload File Format]

Select the format of the files to be automatically uploaded.
With [Send Images to Frame.io], you can filter the file types to display when making
image selections.
You can upload proxy videos and pictures (JPEG/RAW).
[Clear Upload History]

Removes the icon indicating an image is uploaded from images that have been
uploaded.
[Upload Status]
You can see the projects that are connected and the number of files remaining to be
uploaded, etc.
Press [DISP.] to see even more detailed information.
[Clear Upload Queue]

Clears the upload queue for Frame.io.
Removes the icon indicating an image is in the queue for uploading from images that
are in the queue for uploading.
• Images that are removed from the upload queue are not uploaded to Frame.io.
F-27
 Notes About the Upload Queue (Transfer Reservation

List)
When the camera has been connected to Frame.io, the images in the
upload queue are uploaded to Frame.io.
• If there are images remaining in the upload queue, uploading is continued even if the
camera on/off switch is set to [OFF]. The power is turned off when uploading is
completed. If [Exit] is selected to turn off the power, uploading is resumed when the
camera is next turned on.
• Uploading is canceled when the connection with Frame.io is broken and then is
resumed when the connection is reestablished.
• The upload queue is cleared in the following cases:
– [Clear Upload Queue] is executed
– Pairing with Frame.io is canceled
• Do not remove the battery while the camera is still turned on. The upload queue will
not be kept properly.
F-28
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been Added
SH Pre-burst Recording Function Has Been

Added
The SH pre-burst recording function has been added, which enables

recording of images for the set amount of time even between when the
shutter button is pressed halfway until it is pressed fully when taking SH
burst pictures.
In [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] you can set the length of time recordings
are made before the shutter is pressed fully.
(A)
(B)
(A) [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time]

(B) Recorded range
1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ]

(Burst Shot 2).
2 Select [SH PRE].
≥ [ ][ ]  [Burst Shot Setting]  [Burst Shot 1
Setting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]  [SH PRE]
[SH PRE]
Takes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 30 frames/second.
F-29
3 Close the menu.

4 Start recording.
• Pre-burst recording starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.
• [PRE] is displayed on the recording screen during SH pre-burst recording.

• If the shutter button is pressed and held at halfway for approx. 1 minute, the
frames before pressing fully cannot be saved. Press the shutter button halfway
again.
 Set Time Recorded Before Pressing Shutter Fully

[ ][ ]  [Burst Shot Setting]  Select [SH Burst
Pre-Recording Time]
[1.5SEC]
Recording starts from 1.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.
[1.0SEC]
Recording starts from 1 second before the shutter button was pressed fully.
[0.5SEC]
Recording starts from 0.5 seconds before the shutter button was pressed fully.
• The setting for [SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] is applied to both [Burst Shot 1
Setting] and [Burst Shot 2 Setting].
F-30
 Burst Rate
Mechanical Live View when
shutter, electronic Electronic shutter taking burst
front curtain pictures
[SH PRE] — 30 frames/second None
• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
 Maximum Number of Frames Recordable

[Picture Quality]
[RAW+FINE]/
[FINE]/[STD.] [RAW]
[RAW+STD.]
[SH PRE] 200 frames*
• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.

Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
* Recording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.
This includes the number of pictures taken with pre-burst recording.
 Number of Frames That Can Be Saved with Pre-burst

Recording Before the Shutter Button Is Pressed Fully
[SH Burst Pre-Recording Time] [SH PRE]

[1.5SEC] 45 frames
[1.0SEC] 30 frames
[0.5SEC] 15 frames
F-31
 Focus when Taking Burst Pictures

[Focus/Shutter Priority]
Focus mode ([Focus/Shutter [SH PRE]
Priority]: 573)
[FOCUS]
[AFS] [BALANCE] Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[RELEASE]
[FOCUS]
[AFC] [BALANCE] Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
• When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
 Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures

Focus mode [SH PRE]
[AFS] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
[AFC] The exposure is adjusted for each frame
[MF] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
F-32
Notes on SH pre-burst recording

• There are limits on the shutter speed you can set.
– [SH PRE]: To a minimum of 1/30
• Pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed fully are not saved in the
following cases:
– When recording with the Touch Shutter
– When [Half-Press Shutter] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu is set to
[ON]
• When the ambient temperature is high or Pre-Burst recording is performed
continuously, even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not
operate to protect the camera from overheating. Wait until the camera cools
down.
• Even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not operate when
there is insufficient free space on the card.
• The refresh rate on the live view screen becomes 30 fps when you have selected
[SH PRE] and you press the shutter button halfway.
F-33
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
Automatic Detection Function Has Been

Enhanced
It is now possible to set the subjects [HUMAN], [ANIMAL], [CAR], and
[MOTORCYCLE] for automatic detection.
It is also now possible to set [Target Parts] and detect eyes for [ANIMAL].
≥ How to set automatic detection: F-34

≥ Types of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent Auto Mode): F-38
≥ [Human Eye Detection Display]: F-39
How to set automatic detection

When automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are
automatically detected and the camera focuses.
• Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.

• When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
1 Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [AF Detection Setting]  [ON]
• You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
F-34
2 Select [Detecting Subject].

≥ [ ]/[ ][ ]  [Detecting Subject]
• Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].

• It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection
screen.
Detects humans.
Select either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the
[HUMAN]
[Target Parts].
• [ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
Detects animals.
Select either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target
Parts].
[ANIMAL] • Animals that can be detected are birds, canines
[Type of
(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including
Subject]
lions, etc.).
• [ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
Detects cars (mainly for motor sports).
[CAR] [Target Parts] cannot be selected.
Detects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).
[MOTORCYCLE] [Target Parts] cannot be selected.
Select the part to be brought into focus.
[Target
This can be set when the [Type of Subject] is either [HUMAN] or
Parts]
[ANIMAL].
F-35
 When [ ]
When a subject to be recorded is detected, an AF area is displayed.
If multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and
you can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.
(A)
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this automatically.
• A cross appears in the AF area when a human eye is detected. (A)
White
Displayed when multiple subjects are detected.
F-36
 When [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
If even part of a subject to be recorded enters the AF area, it is
automatically detected and focused.
• If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (B) works.
It is not possible to change the eye to focus on.
(B)
• [AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].

• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
• Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected
at once with [ ] of the AF mode will be different.
[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies
detected)
[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE]: Maximum 3
[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1
• Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.
F-37
Types of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent

Auto Mode)
Taking pictures Recording video
i-Portrait*1  
i-Scenery  
i-Macro  
*2
i-Night Portrait 
i-Night Scenery 
i-Food 
i-Sunset 
i-Low Light 
*3
 
*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])

menu is set to [HUMAN].
*2 Detected when using an external flash.
*3 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [ANIMAL], [CAR] or [MOTORCYCLE].
• If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).

• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
• Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
• When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
F-38
[Human Eye Detection Display]

[Eye Detection Display] in the [Custom] menu has been changed to
[Human Eye Detection Display].
[ON] / [OFF]
When set to [OFF], you can make the cross that appears on human eyes when
focused disappear by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.
F-39
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced
Image Stabilizer Function Has Been

Enhanced
Functionality of [E-Stabilization (Video)] has been changed.
Through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image
stabilizers, corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video
recording along the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the
peripheral distortion that readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle
lens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
[Photo]: [ ][ ]  [Image Stabilizer]  Select

[Video]: [ ][ ]  [Image Stabilizer] Select
[HIGH]
Large shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower than [STANDARD].
•[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[STANDARD]
Shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower.
•[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[OFF]
Turns the electronic image stabilizer (video) OFF.
• There will be variation in the effectiveness of the correction depending on the video
mode used for recording and the recording conditions.
F-40
Firmware Ver. 2.0 – Image Stabilizer Function Has Been Enhanced
• When the following function is being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not

available:
– [S&Q] mode
• While you are using the following functions, [HIGH] in [E-Stabilization (Video)] is
not available:
– Other than [OFF] in [Anamorphic (Video)]
F-41
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ [Root Certificate] Has Been Added: F-42

≥ [Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-43
≥ [Send Images to Frame.io] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-43
≥ [E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Fn Button Set]: F-43
≥ [Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU Settings]: F-44
≥ [E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU Settings]: F-44
[Root Certificate] Has Been Added

Registers a root certificate when connecting to the network.
[ ][ ]  Select [Root Certificate]
[Load]
Registers a root certificate saved on a card to the camera. (Maximum 6 files)
• Root certificates meeting the following conditions can be registered:
– Saved in the root directory of the card
– Extension is pem, cer, or crt
– Can be recognized as a certificate with OpenSSL commands
[Delete]
Selects root certificates registered with [Load] and deletes them.
[Certificate Information]
Selects root certificates registered with [Load] and displays their information.
F-42
[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Fn Button

Set]
[Proxy Recording] can be assigned to an Fn button.
REC mode]
[2] tab
[Image Format]
• [Proxy Recording]
[Send Images to Frame.io] Has Been Added to [Fn

Button Set]
[Send Images to Frame.io] can be assigned to an Fn button.
PLAY mode]
[1] tab
[IN/OUT]
• [Send Images to Frame.io]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to [Fn

Button Set]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] can be assigned to an Fn button.
REC mode]
[2] tab
[Others (Video)]
• [E-Stabilization (Video)]
F-43
[Proxy Recording] Has Been Added to [Q.MENU

Settings]
[Proxy Recording] can be assigned to the Quick menu.
[ ][ ]  [Q.MENU Settings] Select [Item
Customize (Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
[1] tab
[Image Format]
• [Proxy Recording]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] Has Been Added to

[Q.MENU Settings]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] can be assigned to the Quick menu.
[ ][ ]  [Q.MENU Settings] Select [Item
Customize (Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
[1] tab
[Others (Video)]
• [E-Stabilization (Video)]
F-44
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
 List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available

for Copying
mode
[Photo]: [Focus]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]   
[Detecting Subject]
[Target Parts]   
[Image Stabilizer] [E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]   
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] [H]   
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] [SH]   
[Burst Shot Setting]
[SH Burst Pre-Recording
[0.5SEC]   
Time]
[Proxy Recording] [OFF]   
[Proxy Recording
[Proxy Rec. Quality] [M]   
Settings]
[Real Time LUT(Proxy)] [OFF]   
[Video]: [Focus]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]   
[Detecting Subject]
[Target Parts]   
[Image Stabilizer] [E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]   
[Human Eye Detection Display] [ON]   
F-45
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Frame.io Connection] [OFF] 
[Send Images to
—
[Frame.io] Frame.io]
[Connection Setup] — 
[Upload Setup] — 
[Setup]: [Others]
[Root Certificate] —
F-46
 List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording

Mode
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Focus]
[Type of Subject]    
[Detecting Subject]
[Target Parts]    
[Image Stabilizer] [E-Stabilization (Video)]     
[Burst Shot 1 Setting]     
[Burst Shot [Burst Shot 2 Setting]     
Setting] [SH Burst Pre-Recording
    
Time]
[Proxy Recording]       
[Proxy Recording
[Proxy Rec. Quality]       
Settings]
[Real Time LUT(Proxy)]       
[Video]: [Focus]
[Type of Subject]      
[Detecting Subject]
[Target Parts]      
[Image Stabilizer] [E-Stabilization (Video)]      
• Frame.io, the Frame.io logo and Camera to Cloud are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and/or other countries.
F-47

Lumixs5iix Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lumixs5iix Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lumixs5iix Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product.

 Symbols Used in This Document

Notification classification symbols

: To confirm prior to using the function

: Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications

: Related functions and information

Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................41

How to Hold the Camera ...........................................................74

Taking Pictures 113

Basic Picture Operations .........................................................114

Recording Videos 123

Basic Video Operations ...........................................................124

[Rec Quality] ............................................................................135

Focus / Zoom 151

Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................152

Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer 206

Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................207

Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity 269

Exposure Compensation .........................................................289

White Balance / Image Quality 301

White Balance (WB) ................................................................302

Using an External Flash (Optional)..........................................339

Video Settings 358

Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/

[Sound Monitoring Channel] ............................................................ 396

Special Video Recording 418

Slow & Quick Video .................................................................419

HDMI Output (Video) 464

Connecting HDMI Devices.......................................................465

Using an External SSD (Commercially Available) 481

Compatible External SSDs ......................................................482

Playing Back and Editing of Images 489

Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................490

Group Images ..........................................................................507

Camera Customization 535

[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 596

List of Menu 631

[Photo] menu ...........................................................................632

Wi-Fi / Bluetooth 645

Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................647

[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 667

Streaming Function 699

Stream by Operating a Smartphone ........................................701

Connecting to Other Devices 723

Importing Images to a PC ........................................................730

Digital Camera Accessory System ..........................................745

 Handling of the Camera

Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.

 Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor

 Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance

 No Compensation Regarding Recording

 Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights

 Also Read “Cautions for Use” (Cautions for Use: 793)

≥Digital camera body

*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.

Items Supplied with DC-S5M2XK (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2XW

≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:

Items Supplied with DC-S5M2XC (Lens Kit Product)/DC-S5M2XW